Home

ABB ACQ810 Firmware Software

1. Additional parameter data 313 Data Update os oms i EA CI e oms d GER ERIR REIN 0b11111111 06 07 Status word Pb 16 0x0000 OxFFFF 2ms 06 02 Status word2 Pb 16 Ox000 oxFrF 2ms 06 03 Speed ctr stat Pb 16 Ox0000 xFFFF 250 06 05 Limit word Pb 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2500 06 07 Torii sus Pe 16 0000o 250 us 06 12 Op mode ack emm 16 on 2ms 0673 Super stus Pe O 06 14 Tmedfuncstat Pb 16 050000 0bMi 0ms 06 15 Counter satus Pb 16 0b000000 0brTi 0ms 06 17 Bitinverted sw Pb 16 0b000000 0bt 2ms em om o eem o o IO OxFFFFFEFE rtm m eem j oo OxFEFFFFFF re ms j e po pomme 0 OxFFFFFFFF 08 01 Active faut enum 16 0 69535 08 02 Last faut enum 16 02147489887 08 03 Faut meni R LE 32 2727 1 a gt 08 04 Faultimelo INT32 32 009000 240000 time 08 05 Alarm logger JUINTS2 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 08 06 Alarm logger UINTS2 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 08 07 Alarm loggers UINTS2 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 08 08 Aamioggeri UINTS2 16 Ox090 xFFF 2ms 08 09 Alarm loggers UINTS2
2. ACQ810 ARB E b E 5 HAN FT A e o a 71 E E External control a l E 2 l 1 0 1 a E LOT IS i Local control T R di PLC d 7 Programmable ERN M Logic Controller HP Drive to drive link or HO h gt T embedded fieldbus m E interface d I I L p FPBA 01 E p Ln sarao S der Femme Control panel or PC tool 58 DriveStudio SPC dL optional xxx in Slot Extra inputs outputs can be added by installing an optional I O extension module FIO xx into drive Slot 1 E Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC equipped with DriveStudio when the drive is in local control A speed control mode is available for local control Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control Changing the control location to local can be disabled by parameter 16 01 Local lock The user can select by a parameter 30 03 Panel ctrl loss how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break Control locations 55 E External control When the drive is in external control control commands are given through the fieldbus interface via the embedded fieldbus interface or an optional fieldbus adapter module the I O terminals digital and analog inputs optional I O extension m
3. 01 37 Savedco2 INTS2 32 02197483647 i moms 07 38 Temp intboard REALM 16 40160 C 2ms 07 39 Output voltage REAL 16 0 100 V oms 07 40 Speed REAL 32 30000 30000 wm 2ms 0741 Torque fit REAL 16 160 160 2ms 07 42 Fan start count INT32 32 02187483647 Moms ee E N E T 00000 00 2ms TENES 001111111111 22 22 mA 0205 AMT scaled REAL 32 32z68 32 68 2ms 22 22 mA REAL 32 3z68 3268 2ms poje REAL 356 ree mA 2m 0208 als Scaled REAL 52 aaee 32r em gt a Q T O J O Q 3 D Cl D Ss a Q5 Cl Q O Data Update No han Type ing Rango unit fine Notes oopa REAL 16 22 22 m 2m 0211 AM scaled REAL 32 32768 327068 2ms 0212 45 REA 16 22 22 mA 2ms 0213 Als scaled REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 021640 REAL 16 0 227 m 2m 02 17 A02 REA 16 0 27 mA 2m 021803 REAL 16 0 227 m 2m 02 19 AO4 REAL 16 0 227 mA 2m 02 20 Fean REAL 32 32768 32768 250us 0221 Freqout REAL 32 0 3277 Hz 20wm mmm DT IO OxFFFFFFFF mm T emmme o IO OxFFFFFFFF 2147483647 2147483647 om DT II OxFFFFFFFF m Om eem oro OxFFFFFFFF 21474
4. 0Jez no dwey YL 3q Z0 90 ploy dwey L 4q z0 90 WES U due Jal peedgs t0 co gt pueuJuJoo peeds ejes ayes ja peeds z0 0 Jeued e907 LL Hq 10 90 491 SUB d VECO qj 1890 6 19 LO 90 Las ureui vg4 92 ZO puewwo9 p ds juBe suo aoueJaje peeds jue suoy euin dois NA ZL Zc coep euin edeus 60 2z oep eun edeuss 9g0 zz cooe euin edeus 7 0 zz Looe euin edeys 90 zz euin 990 1oJd uBiH 24 418 10 euin 9980 Ued D 128 euin 99y UE9 2 9128 ew oed gozz I eu oov ZO ZZ Bujeos peeds 10 61 o1ez UL dwey ZL 10 Z0 90 dois WA S Hq L0 90 0 peduueuun jas peeds 0 0 pds youd yBIH G q 079 04 3910 JJMO 91 18 pds youd MOT 9 10 OZ 9 19 paoJoy JO U 8 48 X je1 peeds 01 S aleys peeds 50 Lz Bunny edid 9 1q 02 9 98p dejs uBa S 18 deis 94 8Z 18 uonounj ued apou u ziX3 S ZL apo peeds 7x4 84 1 0Z 9 ud ul bay jaued Z491 AZA US qea 29 Vad 1491 Vas pejeos Ziv pejeos LIV epouu uorejedo 37 ssed g 7 4q 079 r Joi ssed g 6 G 150 Jejseui JN LZ 1d LZ 8 A peeds sej Jo eedg suo 9g e paa05s SUOD 9 97 peeds jse Jo peeds 1suo g 9z oJez ud les je1 peeds LO Lz ul bej4 jaued 724 aza 4491 AZA cJe Vas 1491 vay pejeos ZIV pejeos LIV oJez Jes zje peeds Z
5. 34 12 Underload area f Hz Par 34 03 Par 34 04 Par 34 05 Par 34 06 Par 34 07 Settings Parameter group 34 User load curve page 216 Program features 77 S User definable U f curve The user can define a custom U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency The curve can be used in special applications where linear and quadratic U f ratios are not adequate e g when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V Custom Uff ratio Par 38 13 Par 38 12 Par 38 11 Par 38 10 Par 38 09 f Hz Par 38 04 Par 38 05 Par 38 06 Par 38 07 Par 38 08 Notes e The U f curve can be used in scalar control only i e when parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar e Each user defined point defined must have a higher frequency and higher voltage than the previous point WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance N or motor damage due to overheating Settings Parameter group 38 Flux ref page 237 8 Program features E Flux braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy DIO Yer 0 Tp Braking torque jd 96 Br spee TN Ty 100 Nm No flux braking 60 a 40 Flux braking 20 Flux braking No flux braking t s
6. Signal real selected by par 14 61 O 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum DIO2 output 1 1 frequency 14 63 Freq out min src When 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 61 Freq out src that corresponds to the minimum DIO2 Mele output value defined by parameter 14 65 Freq out min sca 0 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum DIO2 output frequency 14 64 Freq out max sca When 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Ered output defines the maximum DIO2 output frequency 3 32768Hz Hz Maximum DIO2 output Maximum DiO2outputfrequenoy 121Hz 1Hz EMT 65 Freq out min sca When 14 06 Le ric MN conf is set to Freg output defines the minimum DIO2 output frequency 3 32768Hz Hz Minimum DIO2 a Minimum DIO2 output frequency t 1Hz 1 Hz uw mes ESTOS E 170 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Alarm Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074202113 Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074267649 Fault Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074398721 Fault 1 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074529793 cm ON Supervision2 Bit 1 of 06 73 Superv status see page 136 1073808909 Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbrevi
7. EUREN yuoyino ssejdxe jnouy senJpd pay oj eunsojosip Jo esn uononpoudej Application macros 107 wo ON jeu gdy Z PAS 4010UJ 100p xny ON 200 U19 puonippJ ON 700 I8N N3 wj pul jo3uo9 dung 018 DOY awou 12 amp foug WIDIBDIP TGT 4030 oq xny ae Jowoysny sep uie sep 009 uo9 dung oigoov enu pundeg Uo pesog 2 100 ZN SOV 7M 100 1 SOW LN by Ey by Ey re wes 31s sits re wee sits sits Ze 1 FEU a OL Ze Te FE pI Teg 987 13 UNO 1990334 IYNSSIAA Id Qu G IX LIC N 11X 2011X 16Y20X ZIV Lid 10 Zia IUAPZ 1419 14V1S CW YOO 183LNI LW YOOTYSLNI AA Sn A AAA ERES APA EA a ge RRE AEREOS JOVLIOA TOYLNO9 Ooo 4 CO IO TE S E A E O TE A pom po Du T Xu p XV pu S ueppiqjoj nous si yuoyno sseJdxe jnoyym senupd pay 0 aunsojosip Jo esn uonjnpoudej Noor auvo TOMLNOD 018 DOV k 108 Application macros Level control macro S Description and typical application The level control macro is designed for controlling a station of 1 to 8 pumps that is used for either emptying or filling a container The level control functionality is activated by setting parameter 79 01 Level mode to Emptying or Filling and selecting external control
8. 300 Parameters 94 Ext IO conf I O extension configuration See also section Programmable I O extensions on page 77 94 01 ExtlO1 sel Activates an I O extension installed into Slot 1 No extension installed into Slot 1 FIO 01 FIO 01 extension installed into Slot 1 Additional 4 x DIO and 1 2 x RO are in use FIO 11 FIO 11 extension installed into Slot 1 Additional 2 x DIO 2 3 x Al and 1 x AO are in use FIO 21 FIO 21 extension installed into Slot 1 Additional 1 x DI 3 1 x Al and 2 x RO are in use FIO 31 FIO 31 extension installed into Slot 1 Additional 4 x RO are in use 95 Hw configuration Diverse hardware related settings 95 01 Ctrl boardSupply Selects how the drive control unit is powered Internal 24V The drive control unit is powered from the drive power unit it is mounted on This is the default setting External 24V The drive control unit is powered from an external power supply 95 03 Temp inu ambient Defines the maximum ambient temperature This temperature is used to calculate the estimated drive temperature If the measured drive temperature exceeds the estimated value an alarm COOLING or fault COOLING is generated Drive ambient temperature 97 User motor par Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor model 97 01 Use given params Activates the motor model parameters 97 02 97 12 Notes Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is selected by parameter 99 13 Drun
9. Temperature Motor nominal temperature rise Ambient temperature 31 14 Mot therm time 100 10000 s Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal protection model i e time inside which the temperature has reached 6396 of the nominal temperature See the motor manufacturer s recommendations The motor thermal protection model is used when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated Motor load 10096 Time Temperature rise 10096 63 Motor thermal time Time Motor thermal time constant 121s 214 Parameters 32 Automatic reset Configuration of conditions for automatic fault resets mE 32 01 Autoreset sel Selects faults that are automatically reset The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding fault is automatically reset The bits of the binary number correspond to the following faults AR overcurrent AR overvoltage AR undervoltage AR Al min Reserved AR external 32 02 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 32 03 Trial time Number of automatic resets 32 03 Trial time Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See parameter 32 02 Number of trials 1 0 600 0 s Time for automatic resets 32 04 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic res
10. 08 04 Fault time lo Time real time or power on time at which the active fault 121 occurred in format hh mm ss hours minutes and seconds 08 05 Alarm logger1 Alarm logger 1 Can be reset by entering a O Alarm Reserved SAFE TORQUE OFF page 336 STO MODE CHANGE page 336 5 MOTOR TEMPERATURE page 336 6 EMERGENCY OFF page 336 7 RUN ENABLE page 336 MOTOR ID RUN page 337 9 EMERGENCY STOP page 337 Reserved 43 DEVICE OVERTEMP page 337 INTBOARD OVERTEMP page 337 15 Reserved 08 06 Alarm logger2 Alarm logger 2 Can be reset by entering a O Alarm DEVICE OVERTEMP page 337 1 FIELDBUS COMM page 337 2 PANEL CTRL LOSS page 337 4 9 6 15 3 8 Al SUPERVISION page 387 4 FB PAR CONF page 397 B NO MOTOR DATA page 397 Bie Reed O OOOO OOOO 08 07 Alarm logger3 Alarm logger 3 Can be reset by entering a 0 Be pom OO 6 Resena COOS AUTORESET page 338 MOTOR NOM VALUE page 338 STALL page 338 12 LOAD CURVE page 338 13 LOAD CURVE PAR page 338 U f curve par page 338 140 Parameters No Alarm logger4 Alarm logger 4 Can be reset by entering a 0 CL OOCOCOOCCSCSCSCSCSCSSS o OPTION COMMLOSS page s OO SOLUTION ALARM page 343j z MOTOR TEMP page 389 8 GBT OVERLOAD page 339 4 eeren COOLING page
11. In the Parameters option you can e view and change parameter values e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Go to the Main menu by pressing E wi if you are in the LOC T MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Gyas press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS LOCU PAR GROUPS O01 on the menu with keys lt 4 and SY P and pressing 01 Actual values Select the appropriate parameter group with keys A y LOC U PAR GROUPS 99 and v 7 99 start up data 01 Actual val 02 I O values 03 Control values 04 Appl values EXIT 00 00 SEL ues LOCA PARAMETERS 9901 Language English 9904 Motor type 9905 Motor ctrl mode 9906 Mot nom current EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys A and LOC R PARAMETERS vw_ The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter Here the parameter 99 06 Mot nom current is used as an example 9906 Mot Dom current A EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 9906 Mot nom current A CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 26 The ACQ810 control panel Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A LOC PAR EDIT and S Ww P Pressing an arrow key once increments or decrements 9906 Mot nom current the value Keeping the key depressed for a whi
12. L om 7575 Sop speed unra 02 oorr wm Womm 7577 Sop speeds UNTO 02 0 82767 wm Womm 7578 Sopspeed7 Uri 02 0 22767 wm omm 7579 Stacey UNT 9 999 s Os 7520 Sop delay UNT 18 0 799 s s 7521 Speedraden UNmz 18 09 99 s 7522 speedraldar UNT 9 59 s 7523 ma pumps alos UNT os 7524 Mex pumps alos UNT 18 9 8 989 5 NEN m m m m m m m m m m m m m m S S 3 7530 uickramp mode Po 18 ooo mm gt I E ENCON S zesromweswo me O S 7601 Enable MF comm emm 8 Od No 76 03 76 04 76 05 76 06 76 07 76 08 76 09 76 10 76 11 76 12 76 13 76 14 76 15 76 16 Share lost delay 77 Pu 77 01 77 02 77 03 77 04 77 05 77 06 77 07 77 08 77 09 Wake up ext src 77 10 Wake up level 17 11 Wake up delay 78 Pump autochange 78 01 78 02 78 03 78 04 78 05 78 06 78 07 78 08 78 09 78 10 78 11 78 12 78 13 Interlock pump 8 Master enable Pump prior sel Prior choice 1 Prior choice 2 Mstr loss action Mstr loss delay Start order corr Master location Shared IO enable Set as source Shared signal 1 Shared signal 2 Share lost actn P x Bed E d Eg s OO T OO gt gt gt N gt gt 3 3 n D 3 Sleep mode sel Sleep int sel Sleep level Sleep delay Sleep ext sel Sleep boost step Sleep
13. Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter 5 44 32 kWh inv lim Sets the limit for the energy counter The counter monitors signal 01 24 kWh inverter see page 118 When the signal reaches the limit the alarm specified by parameter 44 33 kWh inv alm sel is given 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for the energy counter 1 1kWh kWh Dc capacitor Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for the energy counter 44 34 Counter reset Active counter reset clears all on time rising edge or value saturated alarms Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 07 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page NEN Pointer 115 45 Energy optimising Energy optimization settings See also section Energy savings calculator on page 86 45 01 Energy optim Enables disables the energy optimization function The function optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed 45 02 Energy tariff1 Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when savings are calculated See parameters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 0 00 Price of energy per kWh 21474836 47 45 06 Etariff un
14. direction 0 1000 s Duration of the second step and the rest of the steps which are run in the same direction 82 07 Time trig Time between periodical cleaning sequences See parameter 82 01 Pump clean trig bit 3 0 00 35791394 11 Time between cleaning sequences 1 1 min h 82 08 Nbr of steps Number of forward reverse step combinations to be performed during the cleaning sequence 0 2147483647 Number of steps 1 1721s 1 298 Parameters 82 09 Supervis source Defines a signal that triggers the cleaning sequence when it remains above the limit defined by parameter 82 10 Supervis limit for longer than the time set by parameter 82 11 Cleaning delay See also parameter 82 01 Pump clean trig bit 4 01 04 Motor current see page 116 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 1168 1073742085 Motor torque 01 06 Motor torque see page 1168 1073742086 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 82 10 Supervis limit Defines a limit for the signal selected by parameter 82 09 Supervis source 0 0 32767 0 Cleaning sequence triggering limit 10 1 82 11 Cleaning delay Defines a delay for triggering the cleaning sequence This delay is added to the triggering conditions selectable by bits 4 6 8 and 9 in parameter 82 01 Pump clean trig Note When the load curve bits 8 and 9 is used as the triggering condition the delay is recommended to prevent unnecessary recurrent cleaning
15. ee ad oe ohn se eee osea Bene dh ee eno a 384 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module 385 Drive control parameters llle rr 387 The fieldbus control interface nanana aaa aaa rre 388 The Control Word and the Status Word 0 0 0 ccc neo 389 Actual values amp naana aa 389 FBA communication profile 0 0 0 0 0 ars 389 Fieldbus references aa ee ee eee 390 vim m P 391 11 Control block diagrams What this chapter contains Rn 393 Speed ha lae suede 5550050 MEET ESSO PS STE SAIS ET EE ES D SS B 394 speed reference chain hrs 395 Speed error handling llle IR hrs 396 Torque reference modification operating mode selection 397 Process PID control setpoint and actual value selection 398 Direct torque control naaa eee ee eee 399 Further information Product and service inquiries 2 1 eee 401 PrOGUCKINAIMING a opor Goan eu bee ode ones ees ee ae eee ee eee bared 401 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 0 00 cee eee ees 401 Document library on the Internet 20 0 00 ene 401 About the manual 11 About the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes the contents of the manual It also contains information on the compatibility safety and intended audience
16. 0b00000 0b11111 WES 0b00000 ux ref Co Co HE IR REM o2 10 EEE ext mi nd a 40 Motor control uu CS CN IR EC e olas Dmm we E 44 Maintenance CCC MC CC ACC Im eae E mew ojeras em os T O m we mma R www E Bw imet 99 INC Device clean 44 08 Ontime2 alm sel 324 Additional parameter data R L NER re oor 410 Edge count se Boone xp o e 411 Edge count Umm x Tans TT 412 Edge count dv umma 32 Tamas 0 oo 413 edger amset emm 6 0 8 ras 414 age counratine P o 99 416 Edge comio S eme 3 H ROT 416 Edge countatm umm 32 Tans 10000 417 Edge courte umma zz Tamas 3 MATS Eagenzamser emm S os Ow EIL e Wm mn 99 420 vat count sre Vapome 3t O Sem 421 Vat counttim UNT 3 Tans 545m 4422 Vat countt umm 32 Tans 000 zvanam emm on Meg 424 Vacunz m Fe w0 99 1425 Val counte se vame 3 HT 428 Varcouniz UNT 32 Tans 9500 427 Varcouniz d Umm 82 Tamas 000 gt ealvaoizames em 6 o wer 428 Fan ontmeim Umm 32 Tmn mn 995 leir UNT 32 osna 99h O mm we tc eedem acom We pw am CD wm omn c NN ME 45 Energy optimising ME r mee 0 65 GBP az N
17. 10096 Control signal 96 Multipump Multiple drives each controlling a separate pump are 3 connected together using the drive to drive link 75 02 Nbr of pumps Total number of pumps used in the application including the pump connected directly to the drive 258 Parameters No Name Value 75 03 Follower mode Selects the source of reference when the drive is a follower MI Const speed Speed Follower drives are started and stopped by the control logic 0 in the master drive The master receives its reference from the PI controller When flow demand increases new pumps are started If parameter 76 10 Master location is set to n start the latest drive to start becomes the master at the same time the previously started drive becomes a follower and starts to follow the reference defined by parameter 75 04 Follower ref If parameter 76 10 Master location is set to Stable the drive that was started first remains the master 5 04 Follower Flow demand Master Follower a LL Stopped Master Follower Drive 2 E Master por Stopped Master Drives d pem Drive status See also the diagrams at parameter 75 04 Follower ref Parameters 259 No Name Value Description FbEq Copy of mstr The drive follows the same start stop commands and 1 reference received from the Pl controller as the master With this setting the drive does not become master when started In the example shown drive 1 is
18. 81 32 Pid enable dev Defines the process actual value level at which the Pipefill function is disabled and normal PID control is enabled After the level is reached the time defined by parameter 81 33 Pid enb dev dly is allowed to pass before normal PID control is enabled PID reference ramps are then observed if set The value is given in percent of the maximum process actual value 0 00 100 0096 Pipefill PID control breakpoint 81 33 Pid enb dev dly Delay for enabling PID control See parameter 81 52 Pid enable dev 0 12600 s PID enable delay 1 1s 81 34 Pipefill timeout Defines the maximum allowed time for the Pipefill function If the target process actual value parameter 81 32 Pid enable 100 1 dev is not reached within this time the action defined by parameter 81 35 Pipefill flt ctr is taken 0 12600 s Maximum Pipefill time 1721s 81 35 Pipefill flt ctr Defines the action for the Pipefill timeout parameter 81 34 Pipefill timeout The drive generates alarm PIPEFILL TIMEOUT The drive trips on fault PIPEFILL TOUT 1 Activate PID Normal PID control is enabled 2 296 Parameters 82 Pump cleaning Settings for the pump cleaning sequence See also section Pump cleaning on page 66 82 01 Pump clean trig Enables the pump cleaning sequence for the drive and defines the triggering conditions WARNING Before enabling the pump cleaning sequence make sure that it can be performed safely
19. Current Process actual value 1 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper Analog output AO1 Current Analog output AO2 Speed rpm Drive to drive link Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start Control panel connection Memory unit connection See Pressure sensor connection examples on page 114 102 Application macros E Application examples Fixed drive controlled pump with direct on line auxiliary pumps In this example the drive always controls the same pump Auxiliary pumps are connected to the supply through contactors that are controlled by the drive Below is a listing of typical parameter values that would be used in this configuration Trad pump control No Name macro default Application macros 103 G uo 0 gar diditJ ON 169 88V 1eeus GiGi W Hjo puonippJ ON 700 Sng N3 Sw o3u0 dung 0L8O9Y wou 199 914 4010UJ jOg XNY pe o4ddy JeuJojsn juo9 dung oigoov enu pad O p88Dg Mp 1030 op XnyV USppiqJo yuoyino ssejdxe jnouy senubd pay oj eunsoposip Jo esn uononpoudey 104 Application macros Z us J0jOU Jop xny ow 209 o puonippul 0800989 N3 bun Uou aay i o34u03 dung 018 DOY awou 12efoug WDIDDIP jin2Jl Jo ow jog xny Jawoysng sap 909 j
20. Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 gt or Sor Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 19 79 05 Stop level Defines the stop level for the pump station If parameter 79 02 Stopping mode is set to Stable level pumps 3 and 2 for example are stopped when 79 08 Start 3 level and 79 07 Start 2 level are reached respectively pump 1 is stopped at the stop level If parameter 79 02 Stopping mode is set to Common stop all pumps will continue to run until the stop level is reached See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Stop level 100 1 79 06 Start 1 level Defines the start level for pump 1 See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 1 100 1 79 07 Start 2 level Defines the start level for pump 2 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 2 100 1 Parameters 283 79 08 Start 3 level Defines the start level for pump 3 This is also th
21. O N O1 O NI QO O No gt ol CO MD QO A GG GW N N a D How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive How to view backup information How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals How to edit reference value The ACQ810 control panel 21 E Help and panel version Any mode How to get help Press to read the context sensitive help text for the LOC TIME amp DATE 6 item that is highlighted TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL If help text exists for the item itis shown on the display LOC t HELP Use E SE to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight savin EXIT 00 00 If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys LOC B HELP A and Tw to enable or disable automatic clock adjustment according to daylight saving changes EXIT 00 00 After reading the text return to the previous display by LOC B TIME DATE 6 pressing CZ TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE DAYLIGHT SAVING EXIT 00 00 SEL If the power is switched on switch it off If the panel cable can be disconnected easily unplug the panel cable from the control panel OR if the panel cable can not be disconnected easily switch off the control board or the drive Keep key 2 depressed while you switch on the power PANEL VERSION INFO and read the information The disp
22. O No non maskable start inhibit is active 1 Charging relay is closed 0 Charging relay is open 1 Safe torque off function is active See parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic 0 Safe torque off function is inactive 1 Sleep mode active 0 Sleep mode inactive 1 Ramp Function Generator input is forced to zero 0 Normal operation 1 Ramp Function Generator output is held 0 Normal operation 1 Ramp Function Generator output is forced to zero 0 Normal operation Start inh mask Start inh nomask Chrg rel closed Sto act 0 1 Sleep active N Ramp in O C2 Ramp hold r E O Ramp out 0 5 Reserved Parameters 135 06 03 Speed ctrl stat Speed control status word Speed act 1 Actual speed is negative neg Zero speed 1 Actual speed has reached the zero speed limit parameters 19 06 Zero speed limit and 19 07 Zero speed delay Above limit 1 Actual speed has exceeded the supervision limit parameter 19 08 Above speed lim 1 2 3 At setpoint 1 The difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference is within the speed window parameter 19 10 Speed window 4 Bal active 1 Speed controller output is being forced to value of parameter 27 35 PID bal ref 9 PI tune 1 Speed controller autotuning procedure is active active PI tune 1 Speed controller autotuning has been
23. Start level for pump 8 100 1 High level In emptying mode when the measured level exceeds this value all pumps start running at the speed defined by parameter 79 19 High speed In filling mode when the measured level exceeds this value all pumps stop if not stopped already 0 00 32768 00 High level 100 1 High switch Selects a digital source that is used to determine that the liquid level in the container has risen very high When the source switches on an alarm LC TANK FULL is given The alarm is cleared when the source switches off Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 Ss N gt Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 284 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 79 16 Start stop delay Sets a delay for stopping and starting a pump or pumps Whenever a start or stop level is reached this delay must elapse before any action is taken 0 3600s Start stop delay 79 17 Random coef Randomizes the start levels parameters 79 06 79 13 to avoid caking on the walls of the container For example with this parameter set to 10 0 the actual start level is randomized in the range of start level 10 start level 10 0 0 10 0 Random coefficient
24. Starts the drive in local control 18 The ACQ810 control panel E Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC JU 30 00rpm LOC B MAIN MENU 1 09 o COQ 9 o lt 2 State Dotted rotating Drive is running but not at reference arrow Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary Start command is present but the motor is not running arrow e g because start enable signal is missing e Name of the current mode e Name of the list or menu shown Panel operation mode Name of the operation state e g REF EDIT Reference value in the Output mode e Number of the highlighted item e g mode parameter group or fault Reference value or number of the selected item The ACQ810 control panel 19 Operating instructions E Basics of operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by entering the MENU state using soft key 2 and then by scrolling the A and SY 7 arrow keys until the option is highlighted and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Co
25. While there is constant flow demand and a pump must be running the Autochange function is activated rotating the starting order within each priority After Autochange the order is as follows ID 2 ID 1 ID 4 ID 3 Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 2 Running Flow demand ID 2 ID 1 ID 4 ID 3 Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 2 Running Flow demand 2 0 Parameters The selections of this parameter define how the desired order is achieved Optimal Drive order of priority is corrected only when the number of drives needs to be increased or decreased by the master as required by the process Instant chng Drive order of priority is corrected as soon as a new starting order is generated for example when the Autochange conditions are met The order is corrected by stopping low priority drives Higher priority drives are then started as required by the process 6 10 Master location Defines whether the master status is passed on with each started drive or not Stable The first drive started will remain the master as long as possible until for example the drive is no longer allowed to be master by parameter 76 03 Master enable or the drive trips on a fault In start The drive that was started last and is allowed to be master by parameter 76 03 Master enable is the master 76 11 Shared lO enable Determines whether shared signals broadcast on the drive to drive link if
26. 10 1 79 18 Normal speed In emptying mode defines the pump speed when the measured level is below the high level setting parameter 79 14 and the high switch parameter 79 75 is not active In filling mode defines the pump speed when the measured level is above the low level setting parameter 79 03 and low switch parameter 79 04 is not active Ideally this parameter should be set at the optimal operating point of the pump 0 0 32767 0 rpm Normal running speed 10 1 79 19 High speed In emptying mode defines the pump speed when the measured level exceeds the level defined by parameter 79 14 High level or when the high limit switch parameter 79 15 is active In filling mode sets the pump speed when the measured level falls below the level defined by parameter 79 03 Low level or when the low limit switch parameter 79 04 is active See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 0 32767 0 rpm High running speed 10 7 1 80 Flow calculation Settings for the flow calculation function See also section Flow calculation on page 65 80 01 Flow calc mode Enables the flow calculation function and determines whether a PQ power flow curve or HQ head flow curve is used for the calculation The curves are defined by parameters 80 04 80 23 Flow calculation not used The PQ curve is used for flow calculation 1 The HQ curve is used for flow calculation 2 Both Both the HQ and PQ curves are used for flow calculat
27. 19 Speed calculation 20 Limits 21 Speed ref EXIT 00 00 SEL Press lt to select the appropriate parameter group Select the appropriate parameter with keys A and v_ current value of each parameter is shown below it EDIT Press Current value of the value pointer parameter is shown as well as the parameter it points to Specify a new value with keys A and SY P The parameter the value pointer parameter points to changes respectively Press to accept any of the preselected values and to return to the parameters list The new value is shown in the parameters list To freely define an analog signal as the value choose Pointer and press wir The parameter group and index will be shown Select the parameter group with CA and SY 7 The text below the cursor displays the currently selected parameter group NEXT Press to select the parameter index Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting To save the new value for the pointer parameter press bw The new value is shown in the parameters list The ACQ810 control panel 27 LOC PARAMETERS 2101 Speed refi sel AIl scaled 2102 Speed ref2 sel 2103 Speed refl func 2104 Speed ref1 2 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC amp PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel AIl scaled P 02 05 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC PAR EDIT 2101 Speed ref FBA re P 02 26 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC PARAMETERS 2101 Spee
28. 20 20 mA Rip 100 ohm Drive 3 XAl 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Parameters 115 Parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the parameters including actual signals of the control program Note In case only part of the parameters are visible set parameter 16 21 Menu selection to Full Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by the drive Actual signals can be monitored but not adjusted by the user Parameter groups 1 9 typically contain actual signals Bit pointer setting A parameter setting that points to the value of a bit in another parameter usually an actual signal or that can be fixed to O FALSE or 1 TRUE When adjusting a bit pointer setting on the optional control panel Const is selected in order to fix the value to O displayed as C False or 1 C True Pointer is selected to define a source from another parameter A pointer value is given in the format P xx yy zz where xx parameter group yy parameter index zz bit number Pointing to a nonexisting bit will be interpreted as O FALSE In addition to the Const and Pointer selections bit pointer settings may also have other pre selected settings FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication pu IN Value pointer setting A parame
29. 23 07 23 08 23 09 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 19 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 20 23 21 23 22 Proport gain Integration time Derivation time Deriv filt time Acc comp DerTime Acc comp Ftime Speed err Ftime Speed additive Max torq sp ctrl Min torq sp ctrl SpeedErr winFunc SpeedErr win hi SpeedErr win lo Drooping rate PI adapt max sp PI adapt min sp Pcoef at min sp Icoef at min sp PI tune mode Tune bandwidth Tune damping 25 Critical speed REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL Val pointer REAL REAL enum REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL enum REAL REAL Range 0 30000 0 1800 0 1800 0 1000 0 1000 0 1000 0 1000 0 1800 0 200 0 600 0 10 0 1000 0 600 0 1000 0 1000 1600 1600 1600 1600 0 2 0 3000 0 3000 0 100 0 30000 0 30000 0 10 0 10 0 4 0 2000 0 200 rpm rpm rpm rpm Default Factory def macro 1 000 0 rpm 5 000 s 5 000 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 0 100 s 3 000 s 5 00 0 500 s 0 000 s 8 0 ms 0 00 s 8 0 ms 0 0 ms Zero 300 0 300 0 Disabled O rpm 0 rpm 0 00 O rpm O rpm 1 000 1 000 Done 100 00 Hz 0 5 25 01 25 02 25 03 25 04 25 05 25 06 25 07 Crit speed sel Crit speed1 lo Crit speed1 hi Crit speed2 lo Crit speed2 hi Crit speed3 lo Crit speed3 hi enum REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL REAL 0 1 30000 30000 300
30. 2605 S rdw Defines the week day on which time period teg Monday Time period stars on Monday pooo Tuesday Time period 1 stans on Tuesday Wednesday Time period 1 starts on Wednesday 7 NI Wednesday Time period 1 ends on Wednesday 7 00 00 00 Start time for time period 2 1 1s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 228 Parameters 36 08 Stop time2 Defines the stop time for time period 2 MN 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 2 1721s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 09 Star day2 Defines the week day on which tine period 2begns Wednesday Time period 2 starts on Wednesday 7 Wednesday Time period 2 ends on Wednesday Time period 2 ends on Friday Saway fme period 2 ends on Saturday BS 36 71 Sartimed Defines the siart tme forme prods 00 00 00 Start time for time period 3 24 00 00 36 12 Stop time3 Defines the stop time for time period 3 A 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 3 24 00 00 36 13 Sud Defines the week day on which tme period 3 begins Monday Time period 3 siars on Monday i Time period 3 starts on Thursday Time period 3 ends on Thursday Time period 3 ends on Saturday Parameters 229 36 15 Start time4 Defines the start time for time period 4 00 00 00 Start time for time period 4 1721s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 16 Stop time4 Defines the stop time for time period 4 MA 00 00 00 Stop time for time peri
31. 32 bit drive parameter 420000 200 x group 2 x index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 01 27 420000 200 x 1 2 x 27 420254 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 373 E Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives enhanced profile Register address Register data 16 bit words 400001 Fieldbus control word CW See section Control word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 3605 400002 Fieldbus reference 1 REF1 400003 Fieldbus reference 2 REF2 400004 Fieldbus data in out 1 Drive parameter 58 35 Data l O 1 400015 Fieldbus data in out 12 Drive parameter 58 46 Data l O 12 400051 Fieldbus status word SW See section Status word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 3067 400052 Fieldbus actual value 1 ACT1 400053 Fieldbus actual value 2 ACT2 400054 Fieldbus data in out 13 Drive parameter 58 47 Data I O 13 400065 Fieldbus data in out 24 Drive parameter 58 58 Data I O 24 400101 409999 Register address 16 bit drive parameter 400000 100 x group index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 03 18 is 400000 100 x 3 18 400318 Drive parameter access 32 bit drive parameter 420000 200 x group 2 x index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 01 27 420000 200 x 1 2 x 27 420254 374 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface DCU 16 bit profile E Control and Status words for the DCU 16 bit profile When the DCU 16 b
32. Al4 max scale REAL 32768 32768 1500 000 13 20 Al4 min scale REAL 32768 32768 0 000 13 22 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 22 000 mA or 10 000 V 13 23 REAL 16 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA or 2 000 V 13 24 AI5 max scale REAL 32 32768 32768 1500 000 13 25 AI5 min scale REAL 32768 32768 MI 0 000 13 33 UINT32 0b0000 0b1111 EMEN 0b0000 14 Digital I O DI invert mask Pb 16 0b00000 0b11111 Low 0b00000 4 04 DIO1 Ton UINT32 0 3000 0 0s 4 05 DIO1 Toff UINT32 0 3000 14 01 1 1 1 1 4 08 4 09 1 1 1 1 316 Additional parameter data MS A EI O I d a A 1052 Freaoutmaxse REAL 16 oa 19 1463 Freq outmin we REAL 18 osre o 1056 RO T 1 2 LS Femmes 001111111111 15 Analogue outputs sorfaorse Valpointer 2 omm 15 5 40rsre mex REAL 32 3209 02 100000 1506 aorsremin REAL 32 3mes sme 0 9 150740250 vapom 32 gt Seem pem Aozsemm REAL 32 3mes xme 0 9 rje vame 32 H Hee 1878 A0Seremin REAL 92 3mes sme omo TSR oma 32 Rn O9 75 30 AC cairan ewm 6 oa mada a 16 System 16 02 16 03 16 04 16 07 16 09 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 14 16 16 16 17 6 18 Parameter lock enum Pass code INT32 Param restore enum Param save enum User set sel enum User set log 16 20 22 19 Speed calculation O
33. Boost enable Flux reference and U f curve settings See also section User definable U f curve on page 77 38 01 Flux ref Sets the flux reference in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq at field weakening point 0 20096 Flux reference at field weakening point 38 03 UT curve func Selects the form of the U f voltage frequency curve below the field weakening point Note This functionality can be used in scalar control only i e when 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar Linear Linear U f curve Recommended for constant torque applications omms omms ne rr Quadratic Quadratic U f curve Recommended for centrifugal pump and fan applications User Custom U f curve The curve is formed by the points defined 2 by parameters 38 04 38 13 38 04 UT curve freq1 Defines the frequency at the 1st point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 1st point frequency 38 05 U f curve freq2 Defines the frequency at the 2nd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 2nd point frequency 38 06 UT curve freq3 Defines the frequency at the 3rd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 3rd point frequency 38 07 UT curve freq4 Defines the frequency at the 4th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 4th point frequency 38 08 U f cu
34. Enable fault O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive trips on fault LOAD CURVE 0x2312 when the curve is exceeded Note This fault must be disabled for the overload curve to work as a triggering condition for the pump cleaning sequence see parameter 82 01 Pump clean trig bit 9 An active fault would trip the drive and the cleaning sequence would not be performed Ena lim integ Enable limit integration O Disabled 1 Enabled Integration time defined by parameter 34 18 Load integ time is used After the supervision is evoked the current or torque is limited by the upper boundary of the load curve Ena lim always Enable limit always 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The current or torque is always limited by the upper boundary of the load curve 34 02 Underload func Configures the supervision of the lower boundary of the user load curve Ena sup Enable supervision 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Supervision enabled Input value sel Input value selection 0 Current Current is supervised 1 Torque Torque is supervised Ena warn Enable warning O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates alarm LOAD CURVE 0x2312 when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34 20 Underload time Ena fault Enable fault O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive trips on fault LOAD CURVE 0x2312 when the load remains below the curve for longer than the time defined by parameter 34 20 Underl
35. Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer Description Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 N N Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1 Bit O of 05 02 Trad pump cmd see page 131 Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 o
36. How to change the value of a parameter Parameters PARAMETERS Parameters PARAMETERS How to change the value of bit pointer parameters Parameters PARAMETERS How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to Parameters PARAMETERS fixed O FALSE or 1 TRUE How to select the monitored signals Parameters PARAMETERS How to do guided tasks specification of related Assistants ASSISTANTS parameter sets with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters CHANGED PAR 33 Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER Time amp Date TIME amp DATE Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 39 Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP I O Settings I O SETTINGS Reference Edit REF EDIT How to view drive info Drive Info DRIVE INFO How to view and edit recently changed parameters Parameter Change PAR CHG LOG Main menu options actually shown in the control panel How to change the value of value pointer parameters rF S O E r D P SE 0 zu AV s D Q D 0 O 3 O D O gt Q D lm un D How to view faults LC O O O c GO How to reset faults and alarms GO How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Co Cn l ajl A Ahi A Co C5 0 L l MT N DT ho NO N ROT NIN U
37. Modbus frame Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 359 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 58 35 Data l O 1 O default Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In Out parameters oelect the parameters that you want to read or write through the Modbus l O words 98 58 Data I O 24 360 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface Setting the drive control parameters After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up check and adjust the drive control parameters listed in the table below The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired source or destination for that particular drive control signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 10 01 Ext1 start func Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location 10 04 Ext2 startfunc FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location 10 10 Fault reset sel P 02 36 08 selects the fault reset bit of signal 02 36 EFB main cw as the source for the fault reset command of the drive Note To
38. Par Stop o according to the stop mode selected by par 11 03 Stop mode or according to the requested stop mode 10 01 bits 2 6 Note Simultaneous stop and start 10 04 commands result in a stop command 0 Noaction 2 action Start Iz Note Simultaneous stop and start commands 10 01 result in a stop command lee 0 No action No action action StpMode 1 Emergency OFF2 bit O must be 1 Drive is stopped by em off cutting off motor power supply the motor coasts to stop The drive will restart only with the next rising AND E of the start signal when the run enable signal is oon DE E stop OFF3 bit O must be 1 Stop within EN defined by 22 12 E stop time AND 10 13 No action StpMode 1 Emergency stop OFF1 bit O must be 1 Stop along the off 1 currently active ei ramp AND 10 15 0 j Noacio 2 2 action me 1 Stop ITI I I n I NM the currently active deceleration ramp 11 03 m Cp eon see m StpMode Coast to sto a p 11 03 coas 0 No action En run enable AND 10 11 Reset O gt 1 It t if tive fault t ese or ault reset if an active fault exists T other No action continued If all stop mode bits 2 6 are 0 stop mode is selected by parameter 11 03 Stop mode Coast stop bit 6 overrides the emergency stop bits 2 3 4 Emergency stop overrides normal ramp stop bit 5 122 Parameters No Bi Name Value inform
39. Power inu Power motor Process act Proc PID out Pointer 64 05 AL signal base 0 00 32768 00 64 06 PVL peak value1 32768 00 32768 00 64 07 Date of peak 01 01 80 64 08 Time of peak 00 00 00 23 59 59 64 09 Current at peak 32768 00 32768 00 A 64 10 Dc volt at peak 0 00 2000 00 V 64 11 Speed at peak 32768 00 32768 00 rpm 64 12 Date of reset 01 01 80 64 13 Time of reset 00 00 00 23 59 59 64 14 AL10 to 10 0 00 100 00 64 15 AL1 10 to 20 0 00 100 00 Description 01 02 Motor speed see page 116 01 03 Output frequency see page 116 01 04 Motor current see page 116 01 05 Motor current see page 1168 01 06 Motor torque see page 1168 01 07 Dc voltage see page 116 01 22 Power inu out see page 116 01 23 Motor power see page 1168 04 01 Act val see page 129 04 05 Process PID out see page 129 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100 amplitude Signal value corresponding to 100 Peak value recorded by the peak value logger Peak value The date on which the peak value was recorded Peak occurrence date dd mm yy The time at which the peak value was recorded Peak occurrence time Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded Motor current at peak Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the moment
40. See parameter 13 01 A T filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 13 12 AI3 max Defines the maximum value for analog input AI3 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 AI3 maximum value mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 13 AI3 min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al3 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 Al3 minimum value 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 11 000 V 156 Parameters 13 14 AI3 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al3 value defined by parameter 13 12 Al3 max Al scaled 32768 000 Real value corresponding to maximum AI3 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 15 AI3 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al3 value defined by parameter 13 13 A12 min See the drawing at parameter 13 14 A12 max scale 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al3 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 16 AIA filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al4 See parameter 13 01 Al1 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 13 17 Al4 max Defines the maximum value for analog input Al4 The input type depends on the type and or set
41. amp Date op oot eee eee cee eeu oh eae eee pera he de Giese eee hoes das 37 Parameter BACKUP 22 23 2949 ut bee dew AS E Ra EGER dee 39 WO SCUINGS gtesteneeabacas paneer Be bent ESRTESEERBAESP RIP ISTSSUPREESS Se 47 Reference Edit eee ees 49 DIVO IMO sae te dios da ee ee eee 50 Parameter Change Log e sims cae dues sirenas cada sas 51 3 Control locations What this chapter contains rns o3 Local control vs external control less 54 Evce leoiBMEFRRREREREPRTRETRPPRIPMPPPIPI 54 External Control lees 55 6 Table of contents 4 Program features What this chapter contains naaa aaa aaae 57 Drive configuration and programming 00 a 57 Programming via parameters naana ana e hs 58 Application programming 0 cc Rer 58 P mp control feat reS x oes quera unu ga d RERO EE NPERASTPERIATOUSEE ST SSSAS SI DPI US S 60 FID COMUO 25d cuui s Pesce RUE PPOPSPOEPRSTUNsaPeESSqLS 2 baud 60 Sleep function hrs 61 SOM DIDETIL sou wp E EE E see mendeeadee case o ee RR SS RES 63 RUOCHande 23425254 o peta aran SES bo ee ee ata vee a eee oy oda tae en a 64 Flow calculation 2 4 23m das ooo Ree Se es CH we de Re Eee A 65 PUM CIGANINO 6 ona v aude acco o Dad ewe de Gy de ee Oe ee e iea 66 Protective functions 0 0 0 0 a eens 66 Quick ramp mode ee eee eee 68 Control interfaces a2 2 2 3 3s eden ed dao dead EERE A CO d gue eee ew Gee 70 Programmable analog
42. and can be started DI3 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 DIA Digital input DIA as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 DI5 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 119 2 78 12 Interlock pump 7 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 7 Pointer When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started i bit 2 DIS Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 DIA Digital input DIA as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 D Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 2 78 13 Interlock pump 8 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 8 Pointer When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer PN 78 14 Runtime change Enables the reset or arbitrary setting of 04 28 Pump runtime 04 36 Trad 8 runtime 2 U J U O The parameter automatically reverts to this value Set Enables the setting of 04 28 Pump runtime to an arbitrary 1 value Parameters 279 Resets parameter 04 28 Pump runtime 2 runtime to an arbitrary value 7 78 15 Runtime diff Maximum pump run
43. gain 23 01 Proport gain and integration time 23 02 Integration time by coefficients at certain speeds The coefficients are defined individually for both gain and integration time When the actual speed is below or equal to 23 16 PI adapt min sp 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time are multiplied by 23 17 Pcoef at min sp and 23 18 Icoef at min sp respectively When the actual speed is equal to or exceeds 23 15 PI adapt max sp no adaptation takes place in other words 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time are used as such Between 23 16 PI adapt min sp and 23 15 PI adapt max sp the coefficients are calculated linearly on the basis of the breakpoints Coefficient for Kp or T 23 17 Pcoef at min sp or _ 23 18 Icoef at min sp Actual speed rpm 0 23 16 Pl adapt 23 15 PI adapt min sp max sp K Proportional gain T Integration time 30000 rpm Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation 1 1 rpm 0 23 16 Pl adapt min sp Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation See parameter 23 15 PI adapt max sp 0 30000 rpm Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation 1 1 rpm 23 17 Pcoef at min sp Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed See parameter 23 15 PI adapt max sp 0 000 10 000 Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed 1000 1 23 18 Icoef at min sp Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed See parameter 23 15 PI adap
44. it will wait for the delay specified by parameter 76 08 Mstr loss delay then proceed as defined by this parameter The drive will also generate an alarm Const speed The drive continues running and adopts the speed defined by parameter 26 08 Const speed3 Last speed The drive continues running at the last valid reference 1 received from the master Stop The drive stops running When the drive finds a master it will 2 start again upon a request from the master 76 08 Mstr loss delay Delay for a master loss situation See parameter 76 07 Mstr loss action 0 3600 s Delay for master loss 1721s 76 09 Start order corr Whenever the application requires more pumping volume additional drives are started The starting order is dependent on the priority setting of the drive parameters 76 04 76 06 Whenever several drives have the same priority the one with the lowest node number parameter 76 02 is started first by default The Autochange function can be used to automatically rotate the starting order within each priority group Drives running before the Autochange may continue to run so that the new starting order cannot be applied immediately this parameter defines the method with which the drive order of priority is corrected Example One pump is running If necessary additional pumps are started in the following order ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 Priority 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 2 Running Flow demand
45. page 136 Program features 81 DC voltage control E Overvoltage control Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is needed with two quadrant line side converters when the motor operates within the generating quadrant To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached E Undervoltage control If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed Note Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit e g UPS to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break Tm fout Upc Nm Hz VDC 160 80 920 Upc intermediate circuit voltage of the drive f output frequency of the drive Tm motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fut 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy 82 Program features E Voltage control and tr
46. t desired acceleration time Nstart Speed at start of acceleration Neng Speed at end of acceleration To calculate the value of parameter 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 use the following equation Nend start B 19 01 t 75 31 For example if parameter 19 01 Speed scaling is set to 1500 rpm and the motor should accelerate from 600 to 1200 rpm in 2 seconds parameter 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 should be set to 1200 600 1500 1500 gt 75 31 5 00 2 75 31 300 The quick ramp mode works only in the forward direction Settings Parameters 75 30 Quick ramp mode 75 38 QR NR swtch spd page 265 Diagnostics Parameter 05 48 Ramp status page 132 7 0 Program features Control interfaces E Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog inputs Each of the inputs can be independently set as a voltage 0 2 10 V or 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA input by a jumper on the JCU Control Unit Each input can be filtered inverted and scaled The number of analog inputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions See also Pressure sensor connection examples on page 114 Settings Parameter group 13 Analogue inputs page 153 Diagnostics Parameters 02 04 02 13 page 120 E Programmable analog outputs The drive has two programmable current type analog outputs Each output can be filtered inverted and scaled The number of analog outputs can be increased by using FIO xx
47. the slip gain should be increased At the 105 gain value no static speed error exists 2 rpm 40 rpm 5 Parameters 233 0 200 Slip gain 1 196 40 04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve When the voltage reserve has decreased to the set value the drive enters the field weakening area If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Uy 550 V and the voltage reserve is 596 the RMS value of the maximum output voltage in steady state operation is 0 95 x 550 V sqrt 2 369 V The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve value but the drive enters the field weakening area earlier 4 5096 Voltage reserve 1 1 40 07 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed IR compensation The function is useful in applications with a high break away torque where direct torque control DTC mode cannot be applied U Un 7 Relative output voltage IR compensation set to 15 Relative output voltage No IR compensation Field weakening point 60 of nominal frequency See also section R compensation for a scalar controlled drive on page 705 0 00 50 0096 Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor 100 1 voltage 40 10 Flux braking Defines the level of braking power Disabled Flux braking is disabled Moderate Flux level is limited during the braking Dece
48. 0 5 mA or V Example If parameter value is set to 0b0010 bit 1 A 1 max sup is selected 14 Digital I O Configuration of digital input outputs relay outputs the frequency input and the frequency output 14 01 Dl invert mask Inverts status of digital inputs as reported by 02 01 DI status Bit 0 M nvert DI1 1 Invert DI2 2 1 Invert DI3 3 ff Invert DI4 4 1 Invert DI5 MG DICT cont Seas wheter DIOT used as adel ouputorin INC DO sweissdgalogu CI 2 Input DIO1 is used as a digital input rea impar DIO Yi used as a euenoy par T aena omeo ouu o when 14 02 DIO1 confis set to Output Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 160 Parameters a Above limit Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Supervision3 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer P 14 04 DIO1 Ton Defines the on activation delay for digital input output DIO 1 when 14 02 DIO1 conf is set to Output Drive status Mi IMI 1 0 DIO1 status 1 0 14 04 DIO1 Ton 14 05 DIO1 Toff 3000 0 s On activation delay for DIO1 when set as an output 0 0 14 05 DIO1 Toff Defines the off deactivation delay for digital input output DIO1 when 14 02 DIO1 conf is
49. 05 Start speed 1 0 3276 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 7 264 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 75 12 Stop speed 1 When parameter 75 07 is set to Trad ctrl or Reg bypass this parameter defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump 1 When parameter 75 01 is set to Multipump this parameter defines the master speed at which the first follower drive stops When the speed of the pump connected directly to the drive falls below this value and one auxiliary pump or follower is running the stop delay counter see parameter 75 20 Stop delay is started If the speed is still at the same level or lower when the delay elapses the first auxiliary pump or follower stops The running speed of the drive is increased by Start speed 1 Stop speed 1 after the auxiliary pump or follower stops See also parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 1 1 1 rpm 75 13 Stop speed 2 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 2 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 2 1 1 rpm 75 14 Stop speed 3 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 3 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 3 1 1 rpm 75 15 Stop speed 4 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 4 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 4 1 1
50. 06 to Disabled LOC PAR EDIT 5602 01 param CANCEL 00 00 NEXT LOC G PAR EDIT 5603 01 param CANCEL 00 00 NEXT 32 The ACQ810 control panel E Assistants Assistants are routines that guide you through the essential parameter settings related to a specific task for example application macro selection entering the motor data or reference selection An assistant may merely consist of a sequence of parameters that the user must adjust but may also involve questions based on the answers one or several parameters are automatically adjusted The assistant may also display additional information about the selections In the Assistants mode you can Use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Different firmware versions may include different assistants How to invoke an assistant The table below shows how assistants are invoked Go to the Main menu by pressing Du if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Output mode his press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on OC T CHOICE 1 3 the menu with keys A and S WV P and pressing Select assistant wir 4 Motor Set up Application Macro Start up assistant EXIT 00 00 OK Select an assistant b
51. 1 FBA CW Fieldbus Control Word FBA SW Fieldbus Status Word n Speed Input Current RFG Ramp Function Generator f Frequency FBA CW Bit 7 0 FBA CW Bit 16 1 from any state OFF1 FBA CW Bit 4 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 OFF 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 FBA SW Bit 6 1 FBA SW Bit 0 1 from any state Emergency OFF OFF2 FBA CW Bit 2 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 ia FBA SW Bit 4 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXO xxxx 1xxx 1xxx xx10 FBA SW Bit 3 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXX0 xxxO 1xxx 1xxx xx10 from any state Emergency Stop OFF3 FBA CW Bit 3 1 and FBA CW Bit 0 1 OFF3 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 FBA SW Bit 5 1 FBA SW Bit 8 1 392 Control through a fieldbus adapter Control block diagrams 393 Control block diagrams What this chapter contains The chapter contains a graphical representation of the control program 394 Control block diagrams Deu joe peeds 0 yq 0 90 q gt e qr 0 ywi SAOQY Z UA 0 90 dee juiodjes IV 114 0 90 qe q sav AE q lt e e ep peeds 0137 0 61 yu peeds 0197 90 61 peeds oJez 10 0 90 ud peeds 10 OW LO LO yoeqpssaj pasds jui peeds sAogy 80 61 duweJun jespeeds yO 0 MOPUIM peeds 0161 159 peeds JOIOW pL LO HU peeds 1030IN 0 61 Control block diagrams 395 C peduiei jespeeds soso speeds Jeong e qeua peeds eonun pe 2x3 818 1 9 axa Wa
52. 10 04 selection Speed ref Par 10 01 99 99 selection selection Group 53 FBA MAIN SW DATA IN 21 01 FBA ACT1 selection D Par 01 01 99 99 Cyclic communication Group 52 Acyclic communication See the manual of the fieldbus Fieldbus specific interface Parameter adapter module table 1 See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus 2 The maximum number of used data words is protocol dependent 3 Profile instance selection parameters Fieldbus module specific parameters For more information see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 4 With DeviceNet the control part is transmitted directly 5 With DeviceNet the actual value part is transmitted directly Control through a fieldbus adapter 389 E The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller S Actual values Actual values ACT are 16 32 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive FBA communication profile The FBA communication profile is a state machine model which describes the general states an
53. 10 uz 0 504 10 7 00 00 MENU LCD display Divided into three main areas Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Sfatus line on page 78 Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display 3 Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function 4 Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START
54. 115 Selects whether DIO4 is used as a digital output or input DIO4 is used as a digital output DIO4 is used as a digital input Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO4 when 14 14 DIO4 conf is set to Output Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Sa ON lt gt ne gt ww FbEq 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 1073939969 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 1073874435 1073939971 1073743373 1073808909 1073874445 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 1073939969 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 No Name Value Above limit At setpoint Supervision1 Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 18 DIO5 conf Output Input 14 19 DIO5 out
55. 19 08 Above speed lim Defines the supervision limit for the actual speed 0 30000 rpm Actual speed supervision limit 1 1 rpm 182 Parameters No Name Value Description ERE 19 09 Speed TripMargin Defines together with 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed the maximum allowed speed of the motor overspeed protection If actual speed 01 01 Motor speed rpm exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 20 01 or 20 02 by more than the value of this parameter the drive trips on the OVERSPEED 0x7310 fault Example If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip margin is 300 rpm the drive trips at 1720 rpm Speed Speed trip margin Speed trip margin 0 0 10000 0 rpm Overspeed trip margin 10 1 rpm 19 10 Speed window Defines the absolute value for the motor speed window supervision i e the absolute value for the difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed reference 01 01 Motor speed rpm 03 03 SpeedRef unramp When the motor speed is within the limits defined by this parameter signal 02 24 FBA main sw bit 8 AT SETPOINT is 1 If the motor speed is not within the defined limits bit 8 is O 0 30000 rpm Absolute value for motor speed window supervision 20 Limits Drive operation limits See also section Speed controller tuning on page 73 20 01 Maximum speed Defines the allowed maximum speed og 20 02 Minimum speed Defines the allowed minimum speed Not
56. 196 32768 0 27 36 Pump scal speed Defines pump speed that corresponds to 100 PID controller output Speed scal 19 01 Speed scaling see page 780 1073746689 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 28 Procact sel Process actual value feedback settings 28 01 Act val 1 2 sel Selects the process actual value 1 or 2 Alternatively selects a source whose status determines which process actual value is used 0 Actual value 1 1 Actual value 2 Note This parameter is only effective when parameter 28 04 Act val func is set to Act1 Act val 1 Process actual value 1 selected Act val 2 Process actual value 2 selected Status of digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1073742337 0 determines which process actual value is selected Status of digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1073807873 determines which process actual value is selected DI3 Status of digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 07 DI status bit 1073873409 2 determines which process actual value is selected 1 Status of digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1073938945 3 determines which process actual value is selected Status of digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1074004481 4 determines which process actual value is selected Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 28 02 Act val 1 src Selects the source of
57. 29 Density Defines the density of the fluid to be pumped for the flow calculation function 0 00 32767 00 Fluid density 100 3 1 kg m 81 Pump protection Settings for pump protection functions See also section Protective functions on page 66 Q 3 O 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl Enables the primary supervision of pump inlet pressure and selects the action taken when low inlet pressure is detected The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained below the pressure limit 81 03 Al in low level for longer than the value of parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly The pressure can be measured using an analog pressure sensor or a pressure switch The input for an analog sensor is defined by parameter 81 02 Al measure inlet With an analog sensor a separate action for very low inlet pressure can be defined using parameter 81 05 Al in very low The input for a pressure switch is defined by parameter 81 06 DI status inlet Primary inlet pressure supervision not used Alarm Detection of low inlet pressure produces an alarm after the 1 delay defined by parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly expires Fault Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive after the delay 2 defined by parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly expires Parameters 289 No Name Value Description FbEq Protect Detection of low inlet pressure produces an alarm after the 3 delay defined by parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly expires The pum
58. 4 203 03A5 4 204 04A9 4 205 06A3 4 206 08A3 4 207 11A0 4 208 14A4 4 209 021A 4 210 028A 4 211 032A 4 212 03544 213 040A 4 214 053A 4 215 067A 4 216 080A 4 217 098A 4 218 138A 4 220 162A 4 221 203A 4 222 240A 4 223 286A 4 224 302A 4 225 361A 4 226 414A 4 227 477A 4 228 550A 4 229 616A 4 230 704A 4 231 377A 4 232 480A 4 233 570A 4 234 634A 4 235 700A 4 236 785A 4 237 857A 4 241 02A7 2 242 03A0 2 243 03A5 2 244 04A9 2 245 06A3 2 246 08A3 2 247 11A0 2 248 14A4 2 249 021A 2 250 028A 2 251 032A 2 252 035A 2 253 040A 2 254 053A 2 255 067A 2 256 080A 2 09 03 Firmware ID Displays the firmware name E g UIFQ 09 04 Firmware ver Displays the version of the firmware package in the drive e g 2002 hex 09 05 Firmware patch Displays the version of the firmware patch in the drive wet 121 09 10 Int logic ver Displays the version of the logic on the main circuit board of the drive 09 13 Slot 1 VIE name Displays the type of the VIE logic used in the optional 121 module in option slot 1 09 14 Slot 1 VIE ver Displays the version of the VIE logic used in the optional module in option slot 1 09 20 Option slot1 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 1 0 No option 1 No comm 2 Unknown 6 FIO 01 7 FIO 11 21 FIO 21 24 FIO 31 Option slot2 Displays the type of the optional
59. 94 Ext IO conf 95 Hw configuration 97 User motor par 99 Start up data D S Q 3 D Cl S o A N Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller via fieldbus adapter Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive via fieldbus adapter Selection of signals to be displayed on control panel 2 234 240 241 241 242 245 246 247 47 Configuration parameters for the embedded fieldbus EFB interface 249 Peak value and amplitude logger settings 293 Configuration settings for the pump station 256 Communication configuration for applications consisting of multiple 268 pumps with dedicated drives 271 274 279 284 288 296 299 300 300 300 301 118 Parameters Parameter listing 01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive Po 01 01 Motor speed rom Filtered estimated motor speed in rom The filter time 100 1 rpm constant can be adjusted using parameter 19 03 MotorSpeed filt 01 02 Motor speed Actual speed in percent of the motor synchronous speed 100 1 01 03 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz 100 1 Hz 01 04 Motor current Measured motor current in A 100 1A 01 05 Motor current 101 05 Motor current Motor current in Motor current in percent of the nominal motor current of the nominal motor current 10 2 196 LATA 06 Motor torque Motor torque in percent Meter arent in percent othe the nomi
60. ACT1 Raw data No scaling i e data is transmitted without scaling Source for the actual value which is sent to the fieldbus is selected by parameter 50 06 FBA act1 tr src Speed Fieldbus adapter module uses speed reference scaling Speed reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus profile e g with ABB Drives Profile integer value 20000 corresponds to parameter 19 01 Speed scaling value Signal 01 01 Motor speed rpm is sent to the fieldbus as an actual value See the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF2 scaling See parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel See parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel See parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel 2 50 06 FBA act1 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 1 when parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 50 07 FBA act tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 2 when parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 50 08 FBA sw bit12 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 28 02 24 FBA main sw bit 28 Note that this functionality may not be supported by the fieldbus communication profile Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iia 50 09
61. Additional parameter data E EI E ESA 16 0 10000 S 10s 35 Process variable 3504 Proo varidisol ewm 36 8 8 3 3000 MI 35 06 REAL 32768 32768 300 000 35 07 REAL 32768 32768 300 000 35 09 Signal2 max REAL 32768 32768 300 000 35 10 Signal2 min REAL 32768 32768 MI 300 000 3 300 000 32768 32768 ooo 32768 32768 7 300 000 a Proc var2 min 3 m wea em l NEN NEN Li 2 35 15 Signal3 param Val pointer 3 35 16 Signal3 max REAL 2 300 000 Signal3 min REAL 35 18 Proc var3 dispf Co Co a al a a N A 36 Timed functions 00 24 00 time 00 kar 1 7 00 24 00 time 3 1 1 Co Ql a Ke 2 6 6 2 1 3 3 1 1 3 36 14 Stop day3 1 36 15 Start time4 UINT32 3 Co Co Co O O O O O O CO Co O oe a er May 6 2 2 6 6 2 2 6 6 2 Additional parameter data 323 Data Default Factory 36 16 Stop time4 uas 27 00 00 00 24 00 00 time 00 00 00 36 17 Start day4 enum 16 Monday 36 18 Stop day4 enum 16 DEM Monday 36 19 Boost signal C FALSE 36 20 36 21 Boost time UINT32 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 00 00 Timed func Pb 16 0b00000 0b11111 0500000 36 22 Timed func2 Pb 16 0b00000 0b11111 MIN 0b00000 36 23 Timed func3 Pb 16 0b00000 0b11111 0b00000 36 24 Timed func4 Pb 16
62. Autochange function is used S 7 1 N Autochange disabled The drive with the lowest node number is started first Fixed Autochange will occur at intervals defined by parameter 1 78 05 Autochg interval with the following provisions n traditional pump control the drive speed must fall below the value defined by 78 04 Autochg level In multipump control the change is made according to parameter 76 09 Start order corr Note The timing is based on drive power on time rather than drive running time Hourcount The pumping duty is distributed among the pumps according 2 to parameters 04 28 Pump runtime 78 14 Runtime change and 78 15 Runtime diff All stop Autochange will occur when all the pumps are stopped Parameters 275 78 02 Autochg trad Selects whether only auxiliary pumps or all pumps are affected by the Autochange function This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control All pumps are affected by the Autochange function Aux Only auxiliary direct on line pumps are affected by the 1 Autochange function 78 03 Interlock mode Defines whether interlocks are used or not This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control WARNING Use of the Autochange function also N requires the use of interlocks Interlocks are used in applications where one pump at a time is connected to the output of the drive The remaining pumps are powered from the supply and started stopped by the rela
63. Compatibility The manual is compatible with ACQ810 standard pump control program version UIFQ2200 or later Safety instructions Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive Read the complete safety instructions before you install commission or use the drive The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the Hardware Manual Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the default settings of the function For each function the warnings and notes are given in this manual in the section describing the related user adjustable parameters Reader The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices electronic components and electrical schematic symbols 12 About the manual Contents The manual consists of the following chapters e The ACQ810 control panel provides a description and instructions for use of the control panel e Control locations describes the control locations and operation modes of the drive e Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACQ810 standard program e Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a connection diagram e Parameters describes the parameters of the drive e Additional parameter data contains further information on the parameters e Fault tracing lists the alarm warning and fault messages with possible causes and remedies e Control
64. Counter value UINT32 32 0 2147483647 Om 04 74 Counter value UINT32 32 0 2147483647 Om 0420 Actvalout REAL 32 0 3278 Om 0421 ctval2ou REAL 32 0 32768 t0ms 0422 Actval REAL 16 0 00 i0om 04 23 SetpointvalT REAL 32 0 32568 t0ms 04 24 Sotpointval2 REAL 32 0 32568 t0ms 0425 Setpotval i REAL 16 0 100 0m 0426 Wake up level REAL 32 32768 32768 10ms 04 27 Shared source UNNT32 16 0 8 om 0428 Pump ranime Wrsz 32 5 398881 A 30s 04 29 Trad Truntime INT32 32 0357913941 n 10ms 04 30 Trad 2 runtime INT32 32 0 3579139440 n 10ms 04 37 Trad 3 runtime INT32 32 0 357018941 h Om 0432 Trad 4runtime INT32 32 037913941 h 10ms 0433 Trad 5 runtime INT32 32 0 3579139440 n 10ms 04 34 Trad 6 runtime INT32 32 0357913941 n 10ms 04 35 Trad 7 runtime INT32 32 0 3579139440 n 10ms 04 36 Trad 8 runtime INT32 32 0 357913941 h Om TI 3 TI 3 T 3 T 3 T LH 2m a aL 0b11111111 os om 05 04 Nbr aux pumps on INT32 32 0 6555 mom 05 05 Flow act REAL 32 0 32767 mh 10ms 05 06 Flow by head REAL 32 0 32760 mh 10ms 05 07 Flow by power x 0 32567 m 10ms 05 08
65. DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iis 10 11 Run enable Selects the source of the external run enable signal If the run enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if running N 1 Run enable Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 N N Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 COMM CW External signal required through the fieldbus Control Word 1074201122 as indicated by 02 22 FBA main cw bit 7 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Be N 148 Parameters 10 13 Em stop off3 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF3 signal The drive is stopped along the emergency stop ramp time defined by parameter 22 12 Em stop time 0 OFF3 active Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 10 15 Em stop off1 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF1 signal The drive is stopped using the active deceleration t
66. FLOW Measured flow above Check the pump system for reasons that 0xB002 maximum limit might cause an increase in measured 08 20 Pump fault word b1 flow Check parameters 81 18 81 24 0404 LOW PRESSURE Pressure at pump inlet too Check for a closed valve on the inlet side 0xB003 low of the pump 08 20 Pump fault word b2 Check piping for leaks 0405 HIGH PRESSURE Pressure at pump outlet too Check piping for blocks 0xB004 high 08 20 Pump fault word b3 0406 VERY LOW PRESS Pressure at pump inlet too Check for a closed valve on the inlet side 0xB005 low of the pump 08 20 Pump fault word b4 Check piping for leaks 0407 VERY HIGH PRESS Pressure at pump outlet too Check piping for blocks OxB006 high 08 20 Pump fault word b5 Fault tracing 353 Fault fieldbus code MAX CLEANINGS Maximum number of OxB007 cleaning sequences 08 20 Pump fault word b6 exceeded see parameter group 82 Pump cleaning MF MASTER LOST The drive cannot detect a OxB008 master on the drive to drive 08 20 Pump fault word b8 link and is not itself allowed master to become master MF NO SHARED DATA Shared signals not 0xB009 received 08 20 Pump fault word b9 Check for reasons that might have had an increasing effect on the monitored signal parameter 82 09 For example increased viscosity of the fluid or faulty pump bearings may increase the current drawn by the motor and trigger the cleaning sequence more
67. Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar Once the ID run is activated it can be canceled by stopping the drive ID run must be performed every time any of the motor parameters 99 06 99 12 have been changed Parameter is automatically set to Standstill after the motor parameters have been set Ensure that the Safe torque off and emergency stop circuits if any are closed during the ID run After the ID run the drive maximum and minimum speeds are automatically set to 1 2 99 09 Mot nom speed No motor ID run is requested This mode can be selected only if the ID run Normal Reduced Standstill has already been performed once Normal Normal ID run Guarantees the best possible control 1 accuracy The ID run takes about 90 seconds This mode should be selected whenever it is possible Notes The driven machinery must be de coupled from the motor with Normal ID run if the load torque is higher than 20 or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID run Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Parameters 305 Reduced Reduced ID Run This mode should be selected instead of the Normal ID Run if e mechanical
68. O O O E E k HO e a e A o o O eS o O O O O N e Te N 00 Amplitude ranges parameters 64 24 64 33 Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current and cannot be reset With amplitude logger 1 100 corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive max Settings and diagnostics Parameter group 64 Load analyzer page 253 Program features 89 Miscellaneous E Backup and restore of drive contents General The drive offers a possibility of backing up numerous settings and configurations to external storage such as a PC file using the DriveStudio tool and the internal memory of the control panel These settings and configurations can then be restored to the drive or a number of drives Backup using DriveStudio includes e Parameter settings User parameter sets e Application program Backup using the drive control panel includes e Parameter settings User parameter sets For detailed instructions for performing the backup restore refer to page 39 and the DriveStudio documentation Limitations A backup can be done without interfering with drive operation but restoring a backup always resets and reboots the control unit so restore is not possible with the drive running Restoring backup files from one firmware version to another is considered risky so the results should be carefully observed and verified when done for the first time The parameters and application support are boun
69. PARAMETERS Select the appropriate parameter with keys lt A and 1404 DIOL Ton SY Current value of each parameter is shown below 1405 DIO1 Toff its name 1406 DIO2 conf 1407 DIO2 out src P 06 02 03 EXIT 00 00 EDIT Press X LOC B PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src Pointer CANCEL 00 00 NEXT Select CONST with keys CAN and SY P LOCI PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src Const CANCEL 00 00 NEXT The ACQ810 control panel 31 LOC t PAR EDIT 1407 DIO2 out src C Ia Yu LO CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new constant value TRUE or FALSE for the LOC B PAR EDIT bit pointer parameter with keys A and Cw 1407 DIO2 out src C unus 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To continue press 5 wl LOC Y PARAMETERS To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1407 DIO2 out src ET C TRUE The new value is shown in the parameters list 1408 DIO2 Ton 1409 DIO2 Toff 1410 DIO3 conf EXIT 00 00 EDIT How to select the monitored signals 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output Oc R PAR EDIT mode and how they are displayed with group 56 Panel display parameters See page 25 for detailed instructions 5601 S4gnall param on changing parameter values 0 Note If you set one of the parameters 56 01 56 03 to zero in the output mode you can see names for the two remaining signals The names are also shown if you set CANCEL 00 00 NEXT one of the mode parameters 56 04 56
70. PLC or requested functionality has not been activated Parameters in group 99 have not been set This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Select how motor identification should be performed parameter 99 13 IDrun mode Start identification routines by pressing Start key Check that it is safe to continue operation Return emergency stop push button to normal position or adjust the fieldbus Control Word accordingly Restart drive Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power Let drive cool down Check for excessive ambient temperature Check for cooling fan failure Check for obstructions in the air flow Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet Check status of fieldbus communication See appropriate User s Manual of fieldbus adapter module Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check cable connections Check if communication master is able to communicate Check PC tool or control panel connection Check control panel connector Replace control panel in mounting platform Check analog input source and connections Check analog input minimum and maximum limit settings Check PLC programming Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check that all t
71. Pipefill function is DI3 DI4 The status of digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI DI5 The status of digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI C status bit 4 determines whether the Pipefill function is enabled or disabled Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Mid 81 29 Pipefill step Defines the speed step used for the Pipefill function as well as the pump speed reference immediately after the Pipefill function is activated The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 81 31 Act change delay has elapsed and the change in process actual value defined by parameter 81 30 Req act change has not been reached The PID controller reference ramp time is specified by parameter 27 32 Pipefill ref acc 0 32767 rpm Speed step for the Pipefill function 1 1 rpm 81 30 Req act change Defines the requested change in process actual value within the time set by parameter 81 31 Act change delay 0 00 100 00 Requested change 100 1 81 31 Act change delay Defines the time that is waited after the process actual value is compared to the previous actual value If parameter 81 30 Req act change is measured in the actual 1074004481 value the speed reference stays as it is If 87 30 Req act change is not seen in the actual value the value of parameter 81 29 Pipefill step is added to the speed reference 0 100 s Delay for actual value change 1721s Parameters 295
72. Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Defines the source of minimum torque limit 2 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torq lim sel 20 08 Minimum torque1 see page 183 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 the motor in percent of the motor nominal power inverter in percent of the motor nominal power Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 119 Selects the source for speed reference 2 Note The reference signal must be in the range O 100 Zero speed reference 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 FbEq 1073742341 1073742343 1073742362 1073742363 1073746951 1073742341 1073742343 1073742362 1073742363 1073746949 1073746952 10 7 196 10 1 1073742341 1073742343 1073742356 1073742362 1073742363 1073742370 1073742374 1073742375 1073742341 Parameters 185 EFB reri 02 38 EFB main ref1 see page 128 1073742374 EFB ref2 02 39 EFB main ref2 see page 126 1073742375 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 21 05 Speed share Defines the scaling factor for the speed reference the speed reference is multiplied by the defined value 8 000 8 000 Speed reference scaling factor 1000 1 21 09 SpeedRef min abs Defines the absolute minimum limit for the speed reference Limited speed reference 20 01 Maximum speed 21 09 SpeedRef min abs 21 09 Speed refere
73. The following diagram illustrates the starting of the drives in a typical multipump configuration as the reference flow demand first increases then decreases Follower start and stop delays parameters 75 19 Start delay and 75 20 Stop delay are ignored in this presentation Time 5 05 Start speed 1 5 13 Stop speed 2 I Time I I Status M Master F Follower S Stopped F S M F S Reference setting This should generally be set at the 1 1 rpm optimal operating point of the pump 262 Parameters No Name Value 75 05 Start speed 1 Speed Min speed Aux pump or follower 1 Stop Start Description When parameter 75 07 is set to Trad ctrl or Reg bypass this parameter defines the start speed for auxiliary pump 1 When parameter 75 01 is set to Multipump this parameter defines the master speed at which the first follower drive starts When the speed of the pump connected directly to the drive exceeds this value and no auxiliary pumps or followers are running the start delay counter see parameter 75 19 Start delay is started If the speed is still at the same level or higher when the delay elapses the first auxiliary pump or follower starts The running speed of the drive is decreased by Start speed 1 Stop speed 1 after the auxiliary pump or follower starts 79 19 Start flow FbEq Max speed Time ON Increasing OFF Parameters 263 The following diagra
74. When torque or speed reference scaling is selected by parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel the fieldbus references are 32 bit integers The value consists of a 16 bit integer value and a 16 bit fractional value The speed torque reference scaling is as follows opeed reference FBA REF 65536 Final reference is limited by parameters value in rpm 20 01 Maximum speed 20 02 Minimum speed and 21 09 SpeedRef min abs Torque reference FBA REF 65536 Final reference is limited by torque limit value in 96 parameters 20 06 20 10 E State diagram Control through a fieldbus adapter 391 The following presents the state diagram for the FBA communication profile For other profiles see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module from any state Fault T RUN T FBA SW Bit 16 1 FBA SW Bit 12 0 FAULT SW Bit 16 1 DISABLE i FBA CW Bit 8 1 J Par 10 192 1 Par 10 1920 lt START INHIBITED MAINS OFF Power ON READY TO START lt q C E FBA CW FBA CW Bit 12 lt 0 RUNNING A E FBA CW Bit 13 0 FBA CW RFG OUTPUT ENABLED B di FBA CW Bit 14 0 FBA CW D RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED C FBA CW OPERATING D E from any state FBA CW Bit 0 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXO xx00 1xxx 1xxx xx10 XXXX XXXX XXXX xxx0 x000 1xxx 1xxx xx10 FBA Communication Profile FBA CW Bits 7
75. absolute value or relative to speed reference 0 3000 rpm Lower boundary of speed error window 1 1 rpm 23 14 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed Drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load torque reference speed controller output At 100 speed controller output drooping is at its nominal level e equal to the value of this parameter The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load Droop rate can be used e g to adjust the load sharing in a Master Follower application run by several drives In a Master Follower application the motor shafts are coupled to each other The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice Speed decrease Speed controller output x Drooping x Max speed Example Speed controller output is 50 droop rate is 1 maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm Speed decrease 0 50 x 0 01 x 1500 rpm 7 5 rpm Motor speed in of nominal No drooping 100 Drooping 23 14 Drooping rate Speed controller Drive load output 96 100 194 Parameters 23 15 Pl adapt max sp Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation Speed controller gain and integration time can be adapted according to actual speed This is done by multiplying the
76. and Slot 2 Fault tracing 339 other information 2049 MOTOR TEMP2 Estimated motor Check motor ratings and load 0x4313 temperature based on Let motor cool down Ensure proper 08 08 Alarm logger4 b2 motor thermal model has motor cooling Check cooling fan clean Programmable alarm 31 05 exceeded alarm limit cooling surfaces etc Mot temp2 prot defined by parameter 31 07 Check value of alarm limit Mot temp2 almLim Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Measured motor Check that actual number of sensors temperature has exceeded corresponds to value set by parameter alarm limit defined by 31 06 Mot temp2 src parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 Check motor ratings and load almLim Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit IGBT OVERLOAD Excessive IGBT junction to Check motor cable 0x5482 case temperature This fault 08 08 Alarm logger4 b3 protects the IGBT s and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable IGBT TEMP Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions 0x4210 excessive Check air flow and fan operation 08 08 Alarm logger4 b4 Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power 2050 2051 2052 COOLING Drive module temperature is Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 0x4290 excessive 40 C 104 F ensure that load current 08 08 Alar
77. are displayed 15 16 17 Power unit Selects the unit of power for parameters such as 01 22 Power inu out 01 23 Motor power and 99 10 Mot nom power Kilowatt 3J O 16 18 Fan ctrl mode Selects the fan control mode Available in frame sizes A to D Normal Control mode is based on the modulator ON OFF status Force OFF Fan is always off Advanced Control mode is based on the measured temperatures of the power stage and interface board 1 2 3 16 20 Macro Read Only Shows which application macro is currently selected For more information see chapter Application macros page 93 Note Changing the value of this parameter does not change the current application macro To change the application macro use the Application macro assistant available through the control panel instead 16 21 Menu selection Loads a short long or full parameter list r 180 Parameters Short Only a selective list of parameters will be displayed Long Only the parameters relevant to the current application 1 macro are displayed Full All parameters are displayed including those not relevant to 2 the current application macro 16 22 Drive boot Reboots the drive control unit No action Reboot not requested Reboot drive Reboot the drive control unit 1 19 Speed calculation Speed scaling feedback and supervision settings 19 01 Speed scaling Defines the terminal speed value used in acceleration and the initial speed valu
78. because of high torque and speed transients that are applied WARNING The motor may run at up to the maximum positive and minimum negative allowed speed during the ID run Several accelerations and decelerations are done The maximum torque current and speed allowed by the limit parameters may be utilized ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Adv standst Advanced Standstill ID run This selection is recommended with AC induction motors up to 75 kW instead of the Standstill ID run if the exact nominal ratings of the motor are not known or the control performance of the motor is not satisfactory after a Standstill 1D run Note The time it takes for the Advanced Standstill ID run to complete varies according to motor size With a small motor the ID run typically completes within 5 minutes with a large motor the ID run may take up to an hour 306 Parameters 99 16 Phase inversion Switches the rotation direction of the motor This parameter can be used if the motor turns to the wrong direction for example because of a wrong phase order in the motor cable and correcting the cabling is considered impractical Reversed rotation direction Additional parameter data 307 Additional parameter data What this chapter contains This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data For parameter descriptions see chapter Parameters on page 115 Terms and abbreviat
79. boost time Wake up mode sel Autochg style Autochg trad Interlock mode Autochg level Autochg interval Interlock pump 1 Interlock pump 2 Interlock pump 3 Interlock pump 4 Interlock pump 5 Interlock pump 6 Interlock pump 7 Data Type len 3 3 2 2 O O Range 0 3600 0 3600 32768 32767 0 0 12600 0 32767 32768 32767 0 100 0 100 ad e e 0 32767 0 1092 3 Additional parameter data 329 Default Factory def macro Ye Choice 1 o Const speed Optimal Stable Z 2 o o Al1 scaled AI2 scaled Alarm 10s Internal Speed 20 00 60s Not used 0 00 Wake gt ref Proc act 90 00 10s Z O O N EN IA Not used rom 0 rpm 0 02 h Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used du TENE DERE E 330 Additional parameter data AE EIA A L 79 Level control 79 01 tovermade emm e o2 o 79 02 Stopping mode emm 18 0 1 Commonstop 79 04 Low such Broome 32 f ewe 79 06 Stan Tiever REAL gt COO Tew Sm2ee RE 39 oo 79 08 Stan Siever REM gt o mex 7977 Serroiev REM 39 75 7932 San7iever REA gt HT Tvem Neee RE 3 99 9 NM 7974 Hghiwe REM 795 High swich 1 32 80 Flow calcu
80. cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check the sensor and its wiring Check analog input source and connections Check analog input minimum and maximum limit settings 0055 TECH LIB Resettable fault generated Refer to the documentation of the 0x6382 by a technology library technology library 0056 TECH LIB CRITICAL 0x6382 FORCED TRIP OxFF90 0x7121 Programmable fault 30 09 Stall function LOAD CURVE 0x2312 Programmable fault 34 01 Overload func 34 02 Underload func Permanent fault generated by a technology library Generic Drive Communication Profile trip command functionality requested by PLC or requested functionality has not been activated Motor is operating in stall region because of e g excessive load or insufficient motor power Overload or underload limit has been exceeded Refer to the documentation of the technology library Check PLC status Check PLC programming Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve Fault tracing 349 Code Fault fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 0063 0064 0065 MOTOR TEMP2 0x4313 Programmable fault 37 05 Mot temp2 prot IGBT OVERLOAD 0x5482 IGBT TEMP 0x4210 COOLING 0x4290 Estimated motor temperature based on m
81. end of the deceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time acc7 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at end of deceleration 1000 1s 22 12 Em stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an emergency stop OFF3 is activated i e the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling to zero Emergency stop activation source is selected by parameter 10 13 Em stop off3 Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw or 02 36 EFB main cw Note Emergency stop OFF1 uses the active ramp time 0 000 1800 000 s Emergency stop OFF3 deceleration time 1000 1s 23 Speed ctrl Speed controller settings mE 23 01 Proport gain Defines the proportional gain K of the speed controller Too large a gain may cause speed oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain K 1 T Integration time 0 Tp Derivation time 0 Error value Controller output Controller output Kp xe e Error value If gain is set to 1 a 10 change in error value reference actual value causes the speed controller output to change by 10 0 00 200 00 Proportional gain for speed controller 100 1 Parameters 189 23 02 Integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the
82. for the ABB Drives profiles llle Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles llle Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives classic profile Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives enhanced profile DCU TO SDILDIOTIG 22 2522 catas Eu Re ae do Rn dl AnA Sex OP UR EC RE GE m o s Control and Status words for the DCU 16 bit profile Status word for the DCU 16 bit profile llle State transition diagram for the DCU 16 bit profile References for the DCU 16 bit profile llle Actual signals for the DCU 16 bit profile 0 0 0 0 ccc ee ee Modbus register addresses for the DCU 16 bit profile ICA OZ ON DIOUIG Me c U UTUTET Control and Status words for the DCU 32 bit profile Status word for the DCU 32 bit profile 0 0 0 0 ce 10 Table of contents State transition diagram for the DCU 32 bit profile 376 References for the DCU 32 bit profile ooo 377 Modbus register addresses for the DCU 32 bit profile 379 Modbus function codes clle 380 Modbus exception codes aa eee eee 381 10 Control through a fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains 0 0 a eee eens 383 SVSICMMOVEIVICW sanan ded
83. heat up In applications where long DC hold times are required externally ventilated motors should be used If the DC hold period is long the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor Bit mE setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 12 Operating mode Selection of external control location and EXT2 operating mode 12 01 Ext1 Ext2 sel Selects the external control location EXT1 or EXT2 or the source of a selection EUM UR 0 E 1 EXT2 The external control location is determined by the status Lo 1073742337 digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 The external control location is determined by the status of 1073807873 digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 The external control location is determined by the status of 1073873409 digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 The external control location is determined by the status of 1073938945 digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 The external control location is determined by the status of 1074004481 digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 Parameters 153 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 12 05 Ext2 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location EXT2 Speed Speed control The reference is taken from the source defined by parameter 21 02 Speed
84. i 10 04 Ext2 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 2 EXT2 Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Not sel No start or stop command sources selected In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 10 05 Ext2 start in1 The states of the source bit are interpreted as follows State of source Command via par 10 05 0 3 wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10 05 Ext2 start in and 10 06 Ext2 start in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows via par 10 05 via par 10 06 Ay 9 S FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus 3 Control Word selected by parameter 50 15 FBA cw used i In1F In2R The source selected by 10 05 Ext2 start in1 is the forward 5 start signal the source selected by 10 06 Ext2 start in2 is the reverse start signal State of source 1 State of source 2 via par 10 05 via par 10 06 o 8m oa nara The source selected by 10 05 Ext2 start in is the start signal 0 stop 1 start the source selected by 10 06 Ext2 start in2 is the direction signal O forward 1 reverse Panel The start and stop commands are taken from the control T panel 10 05 Ext2 start in Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2 See parameter 10 04 Ext2 start func
85. if applicable DEVICE OVERTEMP Measured drive temperature Check ambient conditions 0x4210 has exceeded internal fault Check air flow and fan operation limit Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against unit power SHORT CIRCUIT Short circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable 0x2340 cable s or motor Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check the fault logger for a fault code extension See appropriate actions for each extension below Extension 1 Short circuit in the upper Contact your local ABB representative transistor of U phase Extension 2 Short circuit in the lower 0003 0004 transistor of U phase Extension 4 Short circuit in the upper transistor of V phase Extension 8 Short circuit in the lower transistor of V phase Extension 16 Short circuit in the upper transistor of W phase Extension 32 Short circuit in the lower transistor of W phase DC UNDERVOLTAGE Intermediate circuit DC Check mains supply and fuses 0x3220 voltage is not sufficient due to missing mains phase O O O al blown fuse or rectifier bridge internal fault Fault tracing 345 Code Fault fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 0006 0007 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 EARTH FAULT 0x2330 Programmable fault 30 05 Earth fault FAN FAULT OxFF83 CURR MEAS GAIN 0x3183 WIRING OR EARTH F
86. is scaled into an internal signal 02 20 Freq in by parameters 14 57 14 60 as follows 02 20 Freq in 14 59 14 57 fpjo1 Hz 3 32768 Hz DIO1 maximum frequency 14 58 Freq in min Defines the minimum input frequency for DIO1 when parameter 14 02 DIO1 conf is set to Freq input See parameter 14 57 Freq in max 3 32768 Hz DIO1 minimum frequency 14 59 Freq in max scal Defines the value that corresponds to the maximum input frequency defined by parameter 14 57 Freq in max See parameter 14 57 Freq in max 32768 32768 Scaled value corresponding to DIO1 maximum frequency 14 60 Freq in min scal Defines the value that corresponds to the minimum input frequency defined by parameter 14 58 Freq in min See diagram at parameter 14 57 Freq in max 32 68 32 68 Scaled value corresponding to DIO1 minimum frequency 14 61 Freq out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output DIO2 when 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page EN 115 Parameters 169 14 62 Freq out max src When 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq output defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 14 61 Freq out src that corresponds to the maximum DIO2 frequency output value defined by parameter 14 64 Freq out max sca fpjo2 Hz 14 64 14 65 1468 1462 63 14 62 Signal real selected by par 14 61 fpjo2 Hz 14 64
87. load current or torque at point 1 of user load curve Maximum load at point 1 1 1 Maximum load current or torque at point 2 of user load curve Drive output frequency at point 4 of user load curve Maximum load at point 2 1 1 Maximum load current or torque at point 3 of user load curve Maximum load at point 3 1 1 Maximum load current or torque at point 4 of user load curve Maximum load at point 4 1 1 Maximum load current or torque at point 5 of user load curve Maximum load at point 5 1 1 Integration time used in limit supervision whenever enabled by parameter 34 01 34 02 Integration time ki l E o 220 Parameters 34 19 Load cool time Defines the cooling time The output of the overload integrator is set to zero if the load stays continuously below the upper boundary of the user load curve 10000 s Load cooling time 1721s 0 34 20 Underload time Time for the underload function See parameter 34 02 Underload func 0 10000 s Underload time 1721s 35 Process variable Selection and modification of process variables for display as parameters 04 06 04 08 35 01 Signall param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 06 Process var7 01 07 Dc voltage see page 178 1073742087 Value pointer setting see Jerms and abbreviations on page 115 35 02 Signall max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value de
88. mode The values of parameters 97 02 97 12 are updated according to the motor characteristics identified during the ID run This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Parameters 97 02 97 12 inactive UserMotPars The values of parameters 97 02 97 12 are used in the 1 motor model 3 AllUserPars Reserved 97 02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance Rs of the motor model MI 0 00000 0 50000 Stator resistance in per unit 100000 D U 1 p u 97 03 Rruser Defines the rotor resistance Rp of the motor model 0 00000 0 50000 Rotor resistance in per unit 100000 p u 1 p u D S Q 3 D Cl S o O O No Name Value Description FbEq 97 04 Lm user 0 00000 10 00000 p u 97 05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance Of s 0 00000 1 00000 Leakage inductance in per unit Defines the main inductance Lw of the motor model 100000 1 p u Main inductance in per unit 100000 1 p u 5 E 97 06 Ld user Defines the direct axis synchronous inductance 0 00000 10 00000 p u 97 07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance 0 00000 10 00000 p u 97 08 Pm flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux 0 00000 2 00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit 100000 1 Direct axis inductance in per unit 100000 1 T E Quadrature axis inductance in per unit 100000 1 Y 97 09 Rs user Sl 0 00000 100 00
89. of holding registers in a server device Write Single Register Writes a single holding register in a server device 0x08 Diagnostics Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The serial line port of the slave device must be initialized and restarted and all of its communication event counters cleared If the port is in the Listen Only mode no response is returned If the port is not in the Listen Only mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to the Listen Only mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The only function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function subcode 01 0x10 Write Multiple Registers Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers in a server device 0x17 Read Write Multiple Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding Registers registers in a server device th
90. on the error process setpoint process actual value at the PID controller input is inverted Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 27 18 PID maximum Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output Using the minimum and maximum limits it is possible to restrict the operation range 32768 0 32768 0 Maximum limit for PID controller output 27 19 PID minimum Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output See parameter 27 78 PID maximum 32768 0 32768 0 Minimum limit for PID controller output 1 27 30 Pid ref freeze Freezes or defines a source that can be used to freeze the setpoint reference input of the process PID controller This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process feedback connected to an analog input and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process The setpoint input of the PID controller is frozen as long as the selected source is 1 See also parameter 27 37 Pid out freeze 10 1 O 27 01 PID setpoint sel 27 12 2 13 27 14 27 15 27 16 27 10 27 19 Process actual value group 28 Procact sel Process PID controller input not frozen Freeze Process PID controller input frozen Activation of digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073742337 status bit 0 freezes process PID controller input Activation of digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073807873 status bit 1 freezes proce
91. operation The parameter automatically reverts to this setting example between AO1 and Al1 or AO2 and AI2 e Set the analog input to current using the jumper on the control unit A reboot is needed to validate changes The results of the calibration are saved to the memory unit and used automatically until cleared by a reset selection of this parameter Make the following preparations before activation e Connect a wire between the analog output to be calibrated and the corresponding analog input for BEEN AO calib Calibrate analog output AO1 MI AO calib Calibrate analog output AO2 EMEN AO1 reset Reset the previous calibration of analog output AO1 4 AOZ2 reset Reset the previous calibration of analog output AO2 16 System Local lock and parameter lock settings parameter restore user parameter set load save parameter change log reset parameter list settings unit of power selection application macro display 16 01 Local lock Selects the source for disabling local control Take Release button in the PC tool LOC REM key of the panel O Local control enabled 1 Local control disabled WARNING Before activating ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the drive Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 16 02 Parameter lock Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents parameter changing Locked Locked Parameter values cannot be changed from the control
92. panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code into parameter 76 03 Pass code The lock is open Parameter values can be changed l l 1 Not saved The lock is open Parameter values can be changed butthe 2 changes will not be stored at power switch off 16 03 Pass code Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 16 02 Parameter lock After entering 358 at this parameter parameter 16 02 Parameter lock can be adjusted The value reverts back to 0 automatically 0 2147483647 Pass code for parameter lock 1 1 16 04 Param restore Restores the original settings of the application i e parameter factory default values Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Done Restoring is completed o N Parameters 17 Restore defs All parameter values are restored to default values except motor data ID run results and fieldbus adapter and drive to drive link configuration data Note After restoring you need to reselect the appropriate application macro by launching the Application macro assistant available through the control panel Clear all All parameter values are restored to default values including motor data ID run results and fieldbus adapter and drive to drive link configuration data PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring Drive CPU is re booted after the restoring is completed 16 07 Param save Saves the valid parameter values to
93. rate at point 2 of the PQ curve 100 1 m h m h 80 18 PQ curve P3 Power input in kilowatts of pump at point 3 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Power input of pump at point 3 100 1 kW kW 80 19 PQ curve Q3 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 3 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 3 of the PQ curve 100 1 m3 h m h 80 20 PQ curve P4 Power input in kilowatts of pump at point 4 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Power input of pump at point 4 100 1 kW kW 80 21 PQ curve Q4 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 4 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 4 of the PQ curve 100 1 m3 h m h 80 22 PQ curve P5 Power input in kilowatts of pump at point 5 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Power input of pump at point 5 100 1 kW kW 80 23 PQ curve Q5 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 5 on the PQ performance curve un 32767 00 Flow rate at point 5 of the PQ curve 100 1 m3 h m h 80 24 HQ PQ brk point Sets the transition point between the HQ and PQ performance curves The PQ curve is used above this breakpoint 80 27 Sensors hat diff Defines the height difference between the inlet and outlet pressure sensors 0 00 32767 00 m Height difference 100 1m 288 Parameters 80 28 Pump nom speed Defines the nominal speed of the pump in rpm 0 32767 rpm Nominal speed of pump 1 1 rpm 80
94. reaction to fast speed changes Compare to parameter 19 03 MotorSpeed filt 0 0 10000 0 ms Speed filter time constant 10 1 ms Parameters 249 No Name Value Description FbEq 56 09 Torque filt time Defines a filter time constant for 01 40 Torque filt A longer time constant makes the filtered result more steady but slows down the reaction to fast speed changes 0 0 10000 0 ms Torque filter time constant 10 1 ms 58 Embedded Modbus Configuration parameters for the embedded fieldbus EFB interface See also chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 355 58 01 Protocol ena sel Enables disables the embedded fieldbus communication protocol Note When the embedded fieldbus interface is enabled the drive to drive link operation parameter group 76 is automatically disabled Modbus RTU protocol enabled Defines the node address Node address Selects the baud rate of the RS 485 link 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 76 8 kbit s 115 2 kbit s Selects the number of the data bits the use and type of the parity bit and the number of the stop bits Eight data bits no parity bit one stop bit Eight data bits no parity bit two stop bits Eight data bits even parity bit one stop bit Eight data bits odd parity bit one stop bit 58 06 Control profile Selects the communication profile used by the Modbus protocol ABB Drives profile classic version ABB Drives pro
95. requested by parameter 23 20 PI request tune mode T PI tune 1 Speed controller autotuning procedure has been completed done successfully Speed not 1 Speed controller autotuning has been requested when the drive was Zero running but zero speed has not been reached within preset maximum time 9 15 Reserved Limit word1 Limit word 1 Torq lim 1 7 Drive torque is being limited by the motor control undervoltage control current control or pull out control or by the torque limit parameters in group 20 Limits 1 Spd ctl tlim 1 Speed controller output minimum torque limit is active The limit is min defined by parameter 23 10 Min torq sp ctrl 2 Spd ctl tlim 1 Speed controller output maximum torque limit is active The limit is max defined by parameter 23 09 Max torq sp ctrl 3 4 Reserved 5 Tlim max 1 Torque reference maximum value is limited by the rush control because speed of maximum speed limit 20 07 Maximum speed Tlim min 1 Torque reference minimum value is limited by the rush control because speed of maximum speed limit 20 02 Minimum speed Reserved 136 Parameters Ili n 1 Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage age 1 Overvoltage 1 Intermediate circuit DC overvoltage NI s QM TT An inverter current limit is active The limit is identified by bits 8 11 rent B Reserved Motor pull 1 Motor pull out limit is active i e the motor cannot produce more torque o
96. rpm 75 16 Stop speed 5 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 5 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 5 1 1 rpm 75 17 Stop speed 6 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 6 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 6 1 1 rpm 75 18 Stop speed 7 Defines the stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 7 See parameter 75 12 Stop speed 1 0 32767 rpm Stop speed for auxiliary pump or follower 7 75 19 Start delay Defines a start delay for auxiliary pumps or followers See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 12600 s Start delay 1721s parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 7522 Speed hoidot See dagram al parameter 75 05 Start speed 75 23 Min pumps allow Defines the minimum number of pumps that will run simultaneously 1 1 rpm Note The pumps that are kept running will ignore the stop speeds defined for them by other parameters in this group Parameters 265 75 24 Max pumps allow Defines the maximum number of pumps that can be run simultaneously MAN Maximum number of pumps 121 5 25 Drive start dly Start delay for the pump that is directly controlled by the drive This does not affect the starting of the auxiliary pumps WARNING There must always be a delay set if the pumps are equipped with star delta starters The delay must be set longer than the time setting of the starter After the pum
97. rpm Par 25 03 690 rpm 3 Par 25 04 2 1380 rpm Par 25 05 1590 rpm Critical speeds are disabled Critical speeds are enabled 1 25 02 Crit speed1 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 03 Crit speed hi 30000 30000 Low limit for critical speed 1 1 1 rpm rpm 25 03 Crit speed1 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1 Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 02 Crit speed1 lo 30000 30000 High limit for critical speed 1 1 1 rpm rpm 25 04 Crit speed2 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 05 Crit speed2 hi 30000 30000 Low limit for critical speed 2 1 1 rpm rpm Parameters 197 No Name Value Description 25 05 Crit speed2 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2 Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 04 Crit speed lo 30000 30000 High limit for critical speed 2 rpm 25 06 Crit speed3 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3 Note This value must be less than or equal to the value of 25 07 Crit speed3 hi 30000 30000 Low limit for critical speed 3 rpm Note This value must be greater than or equal to the value of 25 06 Crit speed3 lo 25 07 Crit speed3 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3 30000 3
98. scaled see page 120 1073742345 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 1073742347 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 xo o o Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 29 04 Internal set 1 Defines process setpoint 1 when parameter 29 02 Setpoint 1 src is set to Int set 1 0 00 32768 00 Internal process setpoint 1 100 1 29 05 Internal set 2 Defines process setpoint 2 when parameter 29 03 Setpoint 2 src is set to nt set 2 0 00 32768 00 Internal process setpoint 2 100 1 29 06 Reference step 1 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when one auxiliary direct on line motor is running Example The drive operates three parallel pumps that pump water into a pipe The pressure in the pipe is controlled The constant pressure reference is set by parameter 29 04 Internal set 1 During low water consumption only the speed regulated pump is run When water consumption increases constant speed direct on line pumps are started first one pump and if the demand grows further also the other pump As water flow increases the pressure loss between the beginning point of measurement and the end of the pipe increases By setting suitable reference steps the process setpoint is increased along with the increasing pumping capacity The reference steps compensate the growing pressure loss and prevent the pressure fall at the
99. selections n7 and 3 wire 1 1 In1St In2Dir Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running DI1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O 1073742337 DI2 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Parameters 147 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat The bitis on when 1074005518 any one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 10 06 Ext2 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT2 See parameter 10 04 Ext2 start func selection 3 wire Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page i 10 10 Fault reset sel Selects the source of the external fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 gt 1 Fault reset Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 1073742337 me Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 07
100. sequences 0 600 s Cleaning sequence triggering delay 1721s 82 01 Pump clean trig bit 6 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 82 13 Clean max ctrl Defines the action taken if the maximum number of cleaning sequences 82 14 Clean max number is exceeded within the time set by parameter 82 15 Clean max period 2 the time set by parameter 82 75 Clean max period Defines the time ending now within which cleaning sequences are counted 82 16 Clean step acc Defines the acceleration time from 0 rpm to the step frequency parameters 82 02 First Step and 82 03 Second Step 0 32767 s Step acceleration time 1 1s cme ON cm ON 1 T Parameters 299 82 17 Clean step dec Defines the deceleration time from the step frequency parameters 82 02 First Step and 82 03 Second Step to 0 rpm 0 32767 s Step deceleration time 1721s 83 Energy monitoring Energy consumption monitoring settings See also section Energy consumption monitoring on page 86 83 01 Energy mon mode Enables disables and selects the mode of consumed energy monitoring Whenever the consumption within the current period exceeds the selected reference by a predefined margin or tolerance the drive takes the action defined by parameter 83 05 Energy mon ctrl Energy monitoring not in use Limits The current energy monitoring period is compared to the 1 consumption limit set by parameter 83 03 kWh limit Prev
101. signals to be displayed on control panel 56 01 Signall param Selects the first signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default signal is 01 40 Speed filt Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 56 02 Signal2 param Selects the second signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default signal is 07 04 Motor current Pointer Value pointer setting see Jerms and abbreviations on page 775 56 03 Signal3 param Selects the third signal to be displayed on the optional control panel The default signal is 01 41 Torque filt Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 56 04 Signal1 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56 01 Signal param is displayed on the optional control panel Disabled Signal not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled are shown together with their respective signal name Normal Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit 1 12 248 Parameters Bar Shows the signal as a horizontal bar Drive name Shows the drive name The drive name can be set using the DriveStudio PC tool Drive type Shows the drive type 56 05 Signal2 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56 02 Signal2 param is displayed on the optional control panel Disabled Signal not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled are shown together with their respective signal name 2 2 Disabled Sign
102. text identifying the fault is shown gc R FAULT To reset the fault press To return to the previous display press wa FAULT 3 6 PANEL CTRL LOSS RESET EXIT The ACQ810 control panel 37 E Time amp Date In the Time amp Date option you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats set the date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the LOC t MAIN MENU 1 rimas e EZ repeatedly until you get to the MAN RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Time Date option by selecting TIME amp DATE Oc Y TIME amp DATE 1 on the menu with keys A and SY 2 and pressing l TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBILITY on LOC CLOCK VISLB 1 the menu press select Show clock Hide clock with keys LAS and SY and Hide cloc press or if you want to return to the previous display without making changes press Ez EXIT 00 00 S
103. the drive reacts to loss of start interlock signal DIIL External fault parameter 30 01 A source for an external fault signal is selected by this parameter When the signal is lost a fault is generated Panel control loss detection parameter 30 03 The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break Motor phase loss detection parameter 30 04 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected Program features 85 Earth fault detection parameter 30 05 The earth fault detection function is based on sum current measurement Note that e an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection ina grounded supply the protection activates within 2 milliseconds e in an ungrounded supply the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more e the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres will not activate the protection e the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped Supply phase loss detection parameter 30 06 The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is detected Safe torque off detection parameter 30 07 The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input For more information on the oafe torque off function see the Hardware Manual of the drive and Application guide Safe torque off function for ACSM1 ACS850 and ACQ810 drives 3AFE68929814 Engli
104. the permanent memory Note A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or panel but not when altered 2 through a fieldbus adapter connection 16 09 User set sel Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of parameter settings The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in use after the next power up Notes Fieldbus adapter parameters groups 50 53 are not part of user parameter sets Any parameter changes made after loading a set are not automatically stored they must be saved using this parameter IO mode Load user parameter set using parameters 16 11 User lO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi 16 10 User set log Shows the status of the user parameter sets see parameter 16 09 User set sel Read only WR Nowesehmebensme Set1 lO act User parameter set 1 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User lO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set2 lO act User parameter set 2 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User lO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi 178 Parameters Set3 lO act User parameter set 3 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User lO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set4 lO act User parameter set 4 has been selected by parameters 16 11 User lO sel lo and 16 12 User IO sel hi Set1 par act User parameter set 1 has been loaded using parameter 16 09 User set sel Set2 par act User parameter set 2 has been loaded using parameter 56 16 09 User s
105. the pump For example a quicker ramp time can be used to accelerate the pump to a certain speed after which a slower standard ramp time is used to control the process in normal operation In submersible pumps the mechanical wearing of bearings can be reduced by ramping the pump quickly up to a certain speed Either one or two additional ramp sets can be enabled through the quick ramp mode In parameters 75 33 QR 1 2 swtch and 75 37 QR NR switch the user can specify whether the ramp set is changed when the speed reference exceeds a user defined switchover speed or when the ramp set change is requested by a digital input Parameter 75 37 QR NR swtch overrides parameter 75 33 QR 1 2 swtch The following drawing illustrates acceleration in the quick ramp mode when both additional ramp sets are used Speed reference rpm Source selected by par 5 33 activated 75 37 QR NR switch L E Tz Da eee eee a a E Ms CON Source selected by par 5 3 activated a AA Time SA a b C a Quick ramp set 1 75 31 and 75 32 active b Quick ramp set 2 75 35 and 75 36 active C Standard ramp set 22 02 and 22 03 active Program features 69 Parameter 19 01 Speed scaling must be used to calculate acceleration and deceleration times for the ramp sets An example of calculating the acceleration time of quick ramp set 1 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 is shown below Time 75 31 Speed Astart Mend 19 01 where
106. through the embedded fieldbus interface describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using the embedded fieldbus interface e Control through a fieldbus adapter describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network using an optional fieldbus adapter module e Control block diagrams contains a graphical representation of the control program Terms and abbreviations p DWhpuifacefrdgis put grs po EEES o Dsiwewpuefecetrdgiowpisgs OOO Term abbreviation FSCA 0x IGBT I O ID run JMU JPU r r N V U MSW Parameter U Ii e UJ PI controller PID controller PLC Power unit PTC RFG STO UIFQ xxxx UPS About the manual 13 Optional Modbus adapter Insulated gate bipolar transistor a voltage controlled semiconductor type widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and high switching frequency Input Output Motor identification run During the identification run the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control Control unit of the drive module The JCU is installed on top of the power unit The external I O control signals are connected to the JCU or optional I O extensions mounted on it User adjustable operation instruction to the drive or signal measured or calculated by the drive Proportional integral controller Proportional integral derivative controller Drive speed control is based on PID algo
107. using the autotune function parameter 23 20 PI tune mode Autotuning is based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine It is however also possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time Autotuning can be performed in four different ways depending on the setting of parameter 23 20 PI tune mode The selections Smooth Middle and Tight define how the drive torque reference should react to a speed reference step after tuning The selection Smooth will produce a slow response Tight will produce a fast response The selection User allows customized control sensitivity adjustment through parameters 23 21 Tune bandwidth and 23 22 Tune damping Detailed tuning status information is provided by parameter 06 03 Speed ctrl stat If the autotuning routine fails the AUTOTUNE FAILED alarm will occur for approximately 15 seconds If a stop command is given to the drive during the autotuning the routine is aborted The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are e The ID run has been successfully completed e Speed torque current and acceleration limits parameter groups 20 Limits and 22 Speed ref ramp are set e Speed feedback filtering speed error filtering and zero speed are set parameter groups 19 Speed calculation and 23 Speed ctrl he drive is stopped The results of the autotune routine are automatically transferred into parameters e 23 01 Proport gain proportional gain of t
108. value counter 1 44 23 Val cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func Pre selectable alarm for value counter 1 Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for value counter 1 Parameters 239 No Name Value Description FbEq 44 24 Val count2 func Configures value counter 2 This counter measures by integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 44 25 Val count2 src When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44 26 Val count2 lim an alarm is given if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter The signal is sampled at 1 second intervals Note that the scaled see the FbEq column at the signal in question value of the signal is used The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 14 Counter value2 Bit 5 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 25 Val count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 178 1073742081 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 44 2
109. value with the default value Zi Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting LOC amp MESSAGE CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys A and NO parameters v_ and pressing A If there are no changed parameters in the history corresponding text will be shown If parameters have been changed a list of them is LOC CHANGED PAR shown Select the changed parameter on the list with 9906 Mot nom current keys lt 4 and amp 7 The value of the selected 3 5 A parameter is shown below it 9907 Mot nom voltage CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 34 The ACQ810 control panel SAVE i To accept the new value press Ew If the new value is gc U CHANGED PAR the default value the parameter is removed from the list 9906 Mot nom current of changed parameters 3 0 A Jo cancel the new value and keep the original press 9907 Mot nom vo tage CZ pu Mot nom s Mot nom spee EXIT 00 00 EDIT The ACQ810 control panel 35 E Fault Logger In the Fault Logger option you can view the drive fault history e see the details of the most recent faults read the help text for the fault and make corrective actions e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Go to the Main menu by pressing S if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Eras t EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Fault Logger option b
110. 0 33 04 Superv1 lo 32768 00 32768 00 33 05 Superv2 func Disabled High Abs Low Abs High 33 06 Superv2 act Speed rom Speed Frequency Current Current Torque Dc voltage O Power inu Parameters 215 04 01 Act val see page 129 1073742849 04 05 Process PID out see page 129 1073742853 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Selects the upper limit for supervision 1 See parameter 33 01 Superv1 func Upper limit for supervision 1 100 Selects the lower limit for supervision 1 See parameter 33 01 Superv1 func Lower limit for supervision 1 100 1 1 Selects the mode of supervision 2 Supervision 2 not in use When the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act falls below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated 1 When the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act falls below the value of parameter 33 08 Superv2 lo bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 06 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 07 Superv2 hi bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status is activated parameter 33 05 Superv2 func 01 22 Power inu out see page 118 1073742102 216 Paramete
111. 00 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rom Disable 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm Additional parameter data 319 ne Name ype A C9 2601 Constspecdtine Po 16 comu om 2602 Constspeedsert Wipome 3 gt e Bit pointer C FALSE 30000 30000 rpm 1200 rpm 16 30000 30000 0 rpm REAL 30000 30000 0 rpm REAL 30000 30000 rpm 0 rpm 30000 30000 rpm 0 rpm 30000 30000 rpm 0 rpm 27 Process PID 2 Setpoint 96 1 00 60 00 s 0 00 s 1 00 s C FALSE 100 0 0 100 ala ojo 32 32768 32768 32 32768 32768 Bit pointer 32 Bit pointer 32 REAL 16 0 100 Pipefill ref dec REAL 16 0 100 Val pointer 32 Val pointer 32 28 Procact sel 28 07 Act FBA scaling enum 29 Setpoint sel 29 01 Setpoint 1 2 sel Bit pointer 29 02 Setpoint 1 src Val pointer 29 03 Setpoint 2 src Val pointer c l gt lt G l Gl Gl o C FALSE 32768 32768 0 0 Speed scal OO 32 3 3 Act val 1 Al2 scaled Zero Act1 0 32768 100 0096 0 32767 DERE 1 l hit Src 100 CO l Gl O NI Ml O NMI N 3 3 32 N Setpoint 1 Int set 1 Zero 320 Additional parameter data No mame mwee O A lse TSR X Wk 2012 Roterenesiep 7 REAL 6 oo 99x 3001 Evematut Tae TS gt ome 3002 Spesdrersafe REAL 10 39m0 3090 wm 9mm 3008 Panerct
112. 00 64 30 AL2 60 to 70 0 00 100 00 Parameters 255 Description FbEq Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 20 and 30 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 30 and 40 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 40 and 50 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 50 and 60 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 60 and 70 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 70 and 80 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 80 and 90 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that exceed 90 Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 0 and 10 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 10 and 20 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10
113. 000 ohm 97 10 Rruser Sl 0 00000 100 00000 ohm 97 11 Lm user Sl Defines the stator resistance Rs of the motor model 100000 1 ohm Stator resistance Defines the rotor resistance Rp of the motor model 100000 1 ohm Rotor resistance ES c 2 Defines the main inductance Lw of the motor model 0 00 100000 00 Main inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 12 SigL user SI Defines the leakage inductance OLs 0 00 100000 00 Leakage inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis synchronous inductance 0 00 100000 00 Direct axis inductance 100 1 mH mH 97 14 Lquser SI Defines the quadrature axis synchronous inductance 0 00 100000 00 Quadrature axis inductance 100 1 mH mH 99 Start up data Language selection motor configuration and ID run settings 99 01 Language Selects the language of the control panel displays Note Not all languages listed below are necessarily supported 302 Parameters 99 04 Motor type Selects the motor type Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running AM Asynchronous motor Three phase AC induction motor with squirrel cage rotor 99 05 Motor ctrl mode Selects the motor control mode DTC Direct torque control This mode is suitable for most applications Note Instead of direct torque control use scalar control with multimotor applications 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if
114. 0000 High limit for critical speed 3 rpm 26 Constant speeds Constant speed selection and values An active constant speed overrides the drive speed reference See also section Constant speeds on page 73 26 01 Const speed func Determines how constant speeds are selected and whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not when applying a constant speed Const speed mode 1 Packed 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources defined by parameters 26 02 26 03 and 26 04 0 Separate Constant speeds 1 2 and 3 are separately activated by the sources defined by parameters 26 02 26 03 and 26 04 respectively In case of conflict the constant speed with the smaller number takes priority 1 Start dir To determine running direction for a constant speed the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 26 06 26 12 is multiplied by the direction signal forward 1 reverse 1 For example if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is negative the drive will run in the forward direction 0 Accord Par The running direction for the constant speed is determined by the sign of the constant speed setting parameters 26 06 26 12 198 Parameters 26 02 Const speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is O Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 1 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and p
115. 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 cm ON DI4 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 DIS Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer 115 150 Parameters 10 19 Start inhibit Enables the start inhibit function If the drive is not actively started and running the function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required the drive trips on a fault and the fault is reset the run enable signal is activated while the start command is active see parameter 10 11 Run enable e control changes from local to remote external control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or vice versa A new rising edge of the start command is needed after the start inhibit has been activated Note that in certain applications it is necessary to allow the drive to restart Disabled The start inhibit function is disabled Enabled The start inhibit function is enabled 1 10 20 Start intrl func Defines how the start interlock input DIIL on the JCU control unit affects the drive operation Off2 stop With the drive running e 1 Normal operation e 0 Stop by coasting The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from O to 1 With the drive stopped e 1 Starting allowed e 0 Starting not allowed Off3 stop Wit
116. 02 Trad pump cmd see page 131 Bit 0 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Fault Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074398721 Fault 1 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074529793 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page a mE 166 Parameters No Name Value 14 48 RO3 src Trad pump3 Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 51 RO4 src Trad pump4 Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit ae ON At setpoint Description Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output ROS Bit 2 of 05 02 Trad pump cmd see page 131 Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Sta
117. 0318 Drive parameter access 32 bit drive parameter 420000 200 x group 2 x index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 01 27 420000 200 x 1 2 x 27 420254 376 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface DCU 32 bit profile E Control and Status words for the DCU 32 bit profile When the DCU 32 bit profile is in use the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Fieldbus control word as is to the Drive control word parameter 02 36 EFB main cw E Status word for the DCU 32 bit profile When the DCU 32 bit profile is in use the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Drive status word parameter 02 37 EFB main sw as is to the Fieldbus status word SW E State transition diagram for the DCU 32 bit profile See section State diagram on page 391 in chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 377 E References for the DCU 32 bit profile The DCU 32 bit profile supports the use of two fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 The references are 32 bit values consisting of two 16 bit words The MSW Most significant word is the integer part and the LSW Least significant word the fractional part of the value A negative reference is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive value of the integer part MSW The fieldbus references are written as is into the drive reference values 02 38 EFB main ref or 02 39 EFB main ref2 Param
118. 1 External run enable signal is received No external run enable signal is received Relay 1 Drive is modulating running Drive is not modulating Normal operation is enabled Drive is running and following given iM reference Normal operation is disabled Drive is not following given reference for example it is modulating during magnetization Emergency OFF2 is inactive 1 Emergency stop OFF3 ramp stop is active Emergency stop OFF3 is inactive Start inhibit is active Start inhibit is inactive An alarm is active See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 No alarm is active At setpoint Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value i e the difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within the speed window defined by parameter 19 10 Speed window y c O Drive has not reached setpoint a 1 Emergency OFF2 is active continued 124 Parameters Bi Name Value information continued Pym 1 Operation is limited by any of the torque limits 0 Operation is within the torque limits as limit LE speed exceeds limit defined by parameter 19 08 Above speed lim i r speed is within the defined limits omm act External control location EXT2 is active EN control location EXT1 is active LL fb cil ieldbus local control is active Fieldbus local control is inactive Zero IN speed is below limit defined by parameter 19 06 Zero speed speed
119. 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func Relay output RO1 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 0 1073742338 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word see page 133 1073939969 Charged Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074333186 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 44 11 Edge count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 1 121 44 12 Edge count1 div Divisor for rising edge counter 1 Determines how many rising edges increment the counter by 1 1 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 1 121 44 13 Edg cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 09 Edge count1 func BERE icd NN Parameters 237 No Name Value Description FbEq 44 14 Edge count2 func Configures rising edge counter 2 The counter is incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 44 15 Edge count2 src switches on unless a divisor value is applied see parameter 44 17 Edge count2 div After the limit set by parameter 44 16 Edge count2 lim is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 22 Edg cnt2 alm sel is given and the counter is reset The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 12 Counter edge2 Bit 3 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until r
120. 1 When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31 01 Mot temp1 prot Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model which uses the motor thermal time constant parameter 31 14 Mot therm time and the motor load curve parameters 31 10 31 12 User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve if the motor is overheated WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1 3 PTC sensors connected to digital input DI5 Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions in
121. 15 03 15 04 15 05 15 06 Signal real selected by par 15 01 32 68 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 06 AO1 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 01 AO1 src that corresponds to the minimum AO1 output value defined by parameter 15 04 AO1 out min See parameter 15 05 AO1 src max 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 1507 AO2se Selects a arve signal io be connected to analog output A02 01 07 Dc voltage see page 118 Parameters 173 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 15 08 AC filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO2 See parameter 15 02 AO 1 filt time 1509 A02 outmax Denes the maximum ouput value or analog output A02 1510_AO2 outmin Deines the minimum ouput value o analog opu A02 15 11 AO2 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 07 AO2 src that corresponds to the maximum AO2 output value defined by parameter 75 09 AO2 out max lao V 15 09 19 10 18 12 15 11 Signal real selected by par 15 07 lao2 V 15 09 75 70 15 11 15 12 Signal real selected by par 15 07 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO2 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 174 Parameters No Name Value Description
122. 16 0 9999 f 0 e dbe oom fel o Z o fee sajran S TSH Saans unta 32 TR 5602 Senate paran Um HHH ro 5503 Sgnal para UN 32 2 na 5604 Sgnat made wma 3 ema 5505 Sgnai2mode mra o 3 Mme 5606 Sinas mo Wm 3 ema 5607 ocatrefunt oma 93 fm 58 01 protocarena ser umrz 3 oa bis Sie fome oe 999 5805 Pary Umm a2 93 ames 58 06 comargro e umn 3 8 3 ABBEnhanced 58 08 Commloss mode uma 32 0 2 f Rane 58 09 Comm oss cion umne 32 0 8 Nene 58 10 Remesh setings UNE 3 o1 Done 5811 Reference susto Fb 16 1 555 0 58 12 8F8 comm speed emm 18 0 1 dw 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 58 23 Raw SW LSW Pb 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 24 Raw SW MSW Pb 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 25 Raw Ref 1 LSW Pb 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 26 Raw Ref 1 MSW NE MN 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 27 Raw Ref2LSW Pb 58 28 Raw Ref 2 MSW LOB 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 0xFFFF Additional parameter data 327 CAE d en ef macro ad ini UNDC CO O me EC S Se ee 151 muse Wodowr UNT 32 Ot OT gt 45wWMWw S LTS Wo owe 0 s CI ES NEP NNNM 64 Load analyzer 64 01 pvu signar vaipomer 522 gt m 403 eserioogers eroon 32 eFASE Iaa Rener 32 owe
123. 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 08 10 Alarm loggers UINTS2 16 0x0000 OxFFFF_ 2ms 08 15 Alarm wordt UINTS2 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 05 16 Alarm word2 UINT32 16 0x0000 OXFFFF 2ms 08 17 Alarm words UINT32 16 Ox000 oxrFFF 2ms 08 78 Alarm word UNTS2 16 0x0000 OxFFFF_ 2ms 0820 Pump fault word Pb 16 Ox000 oxFrF 2ms womens A OxFFFFFFFF or LL T E 09 02 Drive rating 10132 16 90 8935 oso Fimmare 1D Pb 8 O H 09 04 Firmware ver Pb 16 o 09 05 Firmwarepatch Pb 16 0930 niloge ver Fe 3 LL 09 13 Slot 1 VIE name INT32 16 0x0 0xFFFF 09 14 Slot 1 VIE ver INT32 16 Ox0000 0xFFFF 0920 Op onsort INT32 te 0 25 09 2 Option sat INT32 16 0 25 314 Additional parameter data Parameter groups 10 99 CA EI 9 10 Start stop dir 1001 Ext stertine emm or m 1002 Perse foe 32 gt 0 1005 exi sartin2 mipome 32 erasE molese emm 8 or mt 1005 exe statint mome 3 o 1008 ex ari mome 3 Yarane Bipome 32 1073 Em stop of Tans TS 1075 Ensiop om Bipme 3 d TRUE 107
124. 19 01 Speed scaling not to parameter 20 01 Maximum speed If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits 0 000 1800 000 s Quick ramp set 2 acceleration time 1000 1s 75 36 Quick ramp dec2 Defines the quick ramp set 2 deceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling not from parameter 20 01 Maximum speed to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl 0 000 1800 000 s Quick ramp set 2 deceleration time 1000 1s 75 37 QR NR swtch Selects the source for switching from quick ramp set 1 or set 2 to the standard ramp set defined by par
125. 2 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection 2 When overtemperature is detected the drive reacts as defined by parameter 31 05 Mot temp2 prot Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal protection model which uses the motor thermal time constant parameter 31 14 Mot therm time and the motor load curve parameters 31 10 31 12 User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor load curve The motor temperature decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load curve if the motor is overheated WARNING The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1 3 PTC sensors connected to digital input DI5 Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to analog input Al1 and analog output AO1 on the JCU Control Unit of the drive Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor conn
126. 29 Setpoint sel multiplied by the wake up level for longer than the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay the drive wakes up See the diagram below Process actual value Wake up delay 77 11 Wake gt ext If the signal selected by parameter 77 09 Wake up ext src remains below the wake up level 77 10 Wake up level longer than the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay the drive wakes up Wake up delay 77 11 Signal selected by 77 09 Wake up level 77 10 2 4 Parameters Wake lt ext If the signal selected by parameter 77 09 Wake up ext src remains above the wake up level 77 10 Wake up level longer than the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay the drive wakes up Wake up level 77 10 Signal selected by 77 09 Wake up delay 77 11 Selects the signal source for parameter 77 09 Wake up ext MU src selections Wake gt ext and Wake lt ext 04 01 Act val see page 129 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 77 10 Wake up level Defines the wake up limit for the sleep function See the selections of parameter 77 08 Wake up mode sel 32768 00 Wake up level 100 32767 00 77 11 Wake up delay Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See the selections of parameter 77 08 Wake up mode sel O 100 s Wake up delay 1721s 78 Pump autochange Pump Autochange and interlock settings See also section Autochange page 64 8 01 Autochg style Selects whether the
127. 3 Analogue inputs A user set is loaded through parameter 16 09 User set 14 Digital I O sel Select parameter group 16 System with keys LA gt 15 Analogue outputs MESS Te system RR EXIT 00 00 SEL SEL Press So to select parameter group 16 Select LOC UY PARAMETERS parameter 16 09 User set sel with keys A and 1603 Pass code R Current value of each parameter is shown below 1604 param restore its name 1607 Param save 1609 User set sel No request EXIT 00 00 EDIT 3 LOC t PAR EDIT 1609 User set sel NO request 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Select the user set you want to load with keys lt 4 and LOC PAR EDIT m A 1609 User set sel UOS CUNT Load set 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Panel shows a text identifying the fault LOC FAULT FAULT 310 USERSET LOAD RESET EXIT How to view information about the backup Go to the Main menu by pressing wl if you are in the LOC 5 MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Otherwise press wa repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu AS S T STANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 46 The ACQ810 control panel Go to the Par Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys A and S V 7 and pressing Select SHOW BACKUP INFO with keys A and SW Press The display shows the following information about th drive from where the backup was made BACKUP INTERFACE VER Format version of the backup file FIRMW
128. 3 Trad master page 131 05 04 Nbr aux pumps on page 131 05 36 First in order page 132 05 37 Time autochg page 132 06 20 Pump status word page 137 08 21 Pump alarm word page 143 Program features 65 E Flow calculation The flow calculation function provides a reasonably accurate typically 3 6 calculation of the flow without the installation of a separate flow meter The flow is calculated on the basis of parameter data such as pump inlet and outlet diameters pressure at pump inlet and outlet height difference of pressure sensors and pump characteristics The user can either define a PQ power flow or HQ head flow performance curve that is used as the basis for the calculation lt is also possible to use both curve types together with a breakpoint setting Notes e The flow calculation function is not to be used for invoicing purposes e The flow calculation function cannot be used outside the normal operating range of the pump Settings Parameter group 80 Flow calculation page 284 The presence of pressure sensors in the system determines which parameters should be set refer to the following table for recommendations 80 04 80 13 Typically not required Typically required HQ curve definition 80 14 80 23 Typically required Typically not required PQ curve definition Diagnostics Parameters 05 05 05 08 page 131 66 Program features E Pump cleaning The drive has a pump cleani
129. 30 V DC COM 5 2A p NC 6 g XD24 24 V DC 24VD Digital input ground 24 V DC E Digital input output ground 4 Ground selection jumper XDI DI E E a Start interlock 0 Stop DIIL usum E XDIO DIO1 E Do 2 amp XAI Reference voltage VREF Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Current Speed reference 1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 6 Current Process actual value 1 AI2 current voltage selection jumper Al2 XAO AO1 Analog output AOS Cure O Analog output AO2 Speed rpm AOD 7 um d XD2D Drive to drive link termination jumper B Drive to drive link BGND 3 XSTO Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start Control panel connection Memory unit connection See Pressure sensor connection examples on page 114 114 Application macros Pressure sensor connection examples XAI 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm Note The sensor must be powered externally XAI t VREF Reference voltage output 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm XAI T VREF Reference voltage output 0 4 20 mA gil Actual value measurement 20 20 mA Drive 1 XAI 0 4 20 mA 6 Al2 Actual value measurement 20 20 mA R 100 ohm 24V Drive 2 XAI Power supply 6 A Actual value measurement
130. 339 e VENUCHANGED page339 y TEMPMEAS FAILURE page 340 SSCS B Maintenance counter alarms 2085 2071 page 340 S DCNOT CHARGED page 340 Alarm logger 5 Can be reset by entering a O gt D 3 o O O O om O1 Alarm PIPEFILL TIMEOUT page 341 MIN FLOW page 341 MAX FLOW page 341 LOW PRESSURE page 341 HIGH PRESSURE page 341 VERY LOW PRESS page 341 VERY HIGH PRESS page 341 PROFILE HIGH page 341 MAX CLEANINGS page 342 ALL PUMPS INLOCKD page 342 ENERGY LIMIT page 342 DATE WRONG page 342 Reserved BOOSTING page 342 PIPE FILLING page 342 3 a a e N al AT Oy Nn A N Ql Parameters 141 No Name Value Description FbEq 2 D om 3 O O O D O Alarm logger 6 Can be reset by entering a 0 Alarm NO MORE PUMPS page 342 CLEANING page 342 AUTOCHANGE page 342 LEEPING page 342 TART DELAY page 342 LC TANK FULL page 342 LC TANK EMPTY page 343 MF MASTER LOST page 343 MF NO SHARED DATA page 343 15 Reserved C 9 Alarm word1 Alarm word 1 This alarm word is refreshed ie when the alarm terminates the corresponding bit is cleared Bt pom OoOO o SAFE TORQUE OFF page 33 a STO MODE CHANGE page 338 OOO O 5 MOTOR TEMPERATURE page 335 e EMERGENCYOFF page 336 O y RUN ENABLE page 33
131. 5 08 Pump ref power Settings Parameter group 45 Energy optimising page 240 E Energy consumption monitoring The control program monitors the energy consumption of the drive and pump and provides the monthly consumption during the last 12 calendar months as actual signals There is also a comparison function that generates an alarm if the consumption rises significantly compared to past consumption The length of a monitoring period is set by a parameter The energy consumption within the currently running period is compared to a parameter adjustable limit the previous monitoring period or the average of two previous periods Whenever the consumption within the current period exceeds the reference by a predefined margin or tolerance an alarm is given Settings Parameter group 83 Energy monitoring page 299 Diagnostics Parameters 05 20 05 35 page 131 E Signal supervision Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function Whenever the signal exceeds or falls below a predefined limit a bit of 06 13 Superv status is activated Absolute values can be used Settings Parameter group 33 Supervision page 214 Program features 87 Diagnostics Parameter 06 13 Superv status page 136 E Maintenance counters The program has six different maintenance counters that can be configured to generate an alarm when the counter reaches a pre defined limit The counter can be set to monitor any parame
132. 50 V AC 30 V DC CoM 5 2A 2 e e e XD24 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC vb 3 H Digital input output ground Ground selection jumper XDI A XDIO XAI VREF AGND Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Al1 Current Speed reference 1 Al1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 Current Process actual value 1 Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper lt A TI TI Analog output AO1 Current Analog output AO2 Speed rpm Drive to drive link Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start Control panel connection Memory unit connection See Pressure sensor connection examples on page 114 98 Application macros Hand Auto control macro S Description and typical application Start and stop commands and references setpoints can be given from one of two external control locations EXT1 Hand or EXT2 Auto The start stop commands received through EXT1 Hand are connected to digital input DI1 while the reference is connected to analog input Al1 The start stop commands from EXT2 Auto are connected to DI2 while the reference is connected to Al2 The selection between Hand Auto is dependent on the status of DI5 The drive is speed controlled The speed reference and start stop commands can also be given from the control panel S Default settings Below is a listin
133. 6 Val count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 2 121 44 27 Val count2 div Divisor for value counter 2 The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integration 1 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 2 121 44 28 Val cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 2 See parameter 44 24 Val count2 func Pre selectable alarm for value counter 2 LEN Mot bearing Pre selectable alarm for value counter 2 44 29 Fan ontime lim Sets the limit for the cooling fan on time counter The counter monitors signal 01 28 Fan on time see page 118 When the signal reaches the limit alarm 2056 COOLING FAN is given 0 00 35791394 11 Alarm limit for cooling fan on time h 44 30 Runtime lim Sets the limit for the drive run time counter The counter monitors signal 01 27 Run time counter see page 116 When the signal reaches the limit the alarm specified by parameter 44 31 Runtime alm sel is given 0 00 35791394 11 Alarm limit for the drive run time counter h 44 31 Runtime alm sel Selects the alarm for the drive run time counter ro Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter Add cool fan Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter 1 Cabinet fan Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter 3 240 Parameters Dc capacitor Pre selectable alarm for the drive run time counter 4
134. 7 Startenabie Sipome 3 67 RE 1070 Sartnnon emm 8 93 e 1020 Serm emm 38 or om Coast ms 1106 Dcou eomer 12 Operating mode 7 13 Analogue inputs 13 01 AN1 filt time REAL S 0 100 s 13 02 Al1 max REAL 16 22 22 mA or 11 mA or V 20 000 mA or 10 000 V 03 A 1 min REAL 22 22 mA or 11 mA or V 4 000 mA or 2 000 V 5 0 rpm 30 C FALSE 1 05 1 06 a D PID aj a N O NO O C2 11 11 V 11 11 V S 11 11 V um 11 11 V O Go Co O 3 06 Al2 filt time REAL 0 100s 13 07 Al2 max REAL 1 22 22 mA or 11 mA or V 20 000 mA or 10 000 V 13 08 Al2 min REAL 1 22 22 mA or 11 mA or V 4 000 mA or 2 000 V 09 AI2 max scale REAL 32768 32768 MES 100 000 13 10 AI2 min scale REAL 32768 32768 DIN 0 000 13 11 AI3 filt time REAL 0 30 0 100 s E O C2 W E O N Oo O NIN O O GO Q C2 N Additional parameter data 315 Data Default Factory 13 12 AI3 max REAL 16 22 22 mA or 11 11V mAor V 22 000 mA or 10 000 V 13 13 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11 V 4 000 mA or 2 000 V Pumasa REAL 32 H 1600000 aR nns REAL 3r 3010802788 000 13 17 Al4 max REAL 16 22 22 mA or 11 11 V mAor V 22 000 mA or 10 000 V 13 18 REAL 22 22 mA or 11 11V mAor V 4 000 mA or 2 000 V 13 19
135. 73 No tuning has been requested normal operation Smooth Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for smooth operation Middle Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for medium tight operation Tight Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for tight operation User Request speed controller autotune with the settings defined by parameters 23 21 Tune bandwidth and 23 22 Tune damping 23 21 Tune bandwidth Speed controller bandwidth after autotune procedure in user mode A larger bandwidth results in more restricted speed 1 2 3 4 controller settings 0 00 2000 00 Hz Tune bandwidth for user Pl tune mode 100 1 Hz 23 22 Tune damping Speed controller damping after autotune procedure in user mode Higher damping results in safer and smoother operation 0 0 200 0 Speed controller damping for user Pl tune mode O II 196 Parameters 25 Critical speed Configuration of critical speeds or ranges of speed that are avoided due to for example mechanical resonance problems 25 01 Crit speed sel Enables disables the critical speeds function Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to 1560 rpm To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges activate the critical speeds function setthe critical speed ranges as in the figure below Motor speed rpm Drive speed rpm Par 25 02 540
136. 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 and 75 32 Quick ramp dec1 are in use 2 QR Set2 1 Acceleration and deceleration times of quick ramp set 2 par 75 35 Quick ramp acc2 and 75 36 Quick ramp dec2 are in use Normal 1 Acceleration and deceleration times defined by par 22 02 Acc time and ramp 22 03 Dec time are in use E Reserved Special 1 Acceleration and deceleration times defined by par 82 16 Clean step ramp acc and 82 17 Clean step dec or the PID controller ramp down time par 81 17 Protect dec time is in use 1 2 swtch 1 Actual speed is higher than the switchover speed par 75 34 QR 1 2 spd switch spd 7 QR NR 1 Actual speed is higher than the switchover speed par 75 38 QR NR switch spd swich spd Parameters 133 06 Drive status Drive status words mE 06 01 Status word1 Status word 1 of the drive Ready 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 7 Drive is not ready 1 Enabled 1 External run enable signal is received O No external run enable signal is received 2 Started 1 Drive has received start command SEE Drive has not received start command 3 Running 1 Drive is modulating O Drive is not modulating Em off 1 Emergency OFF2 is active off2 0 Emergency OFF2 is inactive Em stop 1 Emergency OFF3 ramp stop is active off3 0 Emergency OFF3 is inactive Ack startinh 1 Start inhibit is active P an Start inhibit is inactive 7 Alarm mo No alarm is active Ex
137. 7540 and takes the last speed into use average over the previous 10 seconds 58 10 Refresh settings Refreshes the settings of parameters 58 01 58 09 and 58 12 Initial value The value is restored after the refresh is done 58 11 Reference scale Defines the factor which the DCU 16 bit communication profile uses when scaling fieldbus references to drive references and drive actual values to fieldbus actual signals The references are multiplied by this scaling factor See section DCU 16 bit profile on page 374 1 65535 Scaling factor 121 58 12 EFB comm speed Defines the communication speed cycle time for the embedded fieldbus interface Raising the speed increases the CPU load 1 2 Any change in the setting must be validated by parameter 58 10 Refresh settings The communication cycle time is 10 ms The communication cycle time is 2 ms Parameters 251 No Name Value Description FbEq 58 15 Comm diagnostics 16 bit packed boolean data word for the communication diagnostics flag bits Read only Information Reserved Last received packet was not for this node Reserved At least one packet has been successfully received after the power up Reserved Communication time out has occured Reserved Last write was not successful because of a parameter value limit violation Last read was not successful because only one register was used to read a 32 bit value Last write was not successful becau
138. 8 06 Act unit sel and 28 07 Act FBA scaling respectively Shared DI Status of shared digital inputs received through the drive to drive link Example 00000001 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off See parameters 76 11 76 16 02 43 Shared signal 1 Shows the value of shared signal 1 as received through the drive to drive link See parameters 76 11 76 16 02 44 Shared signal 2 Shows the value of shared signal 2 as received through the drive to drive link See parameters 76 11 76 16 Parameters 129 03 Control values Speed and torque control values mE 03 03 SpeedRef unramp Used speed reference ramp input in rpm 100 1 rpm 03 05 SpeedRef ramped Ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm 100 1 rem 03 06 SpeedRef used Used speed reference in rpm reference before speed error 100 1 rpm calculation 03 07 Speed error filt Filtered speed error value in rpm 100 1 rpm 03 08 Acc comp ord Output of the acceleration compensation torque in percent 10 1 Torque reference after frequency voltage and torque 10 1 limiters 100 corresponds to the motor nominal torque 03 20 Max speed ref Maximum speed reference 100 1 rpm 03 21 Min speed ref Minimum speed reference 100 1 rem 04 Appl values Process and counter values 04 01 Act val Final actual value after selection see parameter group 28 Procact sel The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28 06 Act unit sel and 28 07 Act FBA scaling respectively See also pa
139. 83647 2147483647 02 40 FBA setpont REAL 16 0 3268 0241 FBAactva REAL 16 0 32708 OxFFFFFFFF 0243 Shared signal REAL 32 032767 om 0244 Shared signal REAL 32 0 3276 Om 03 Control values 03 03 SpeedRef unramp REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 250s 03 05 SpeedRefremped REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 250ms 03 06 SpeedRefused REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 250ms 03 07 Speederorfit REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 260us 08 08 Acc comp torg REAL 16 1600 1600 250us 03 09 REAL 16 1600 1600 250us 03 13 forqreftoTC REAL 16 1600 1600 260us 03 14 REAL 16 1600 1600 2850W8 2m 03 20 REAL pm 2m 03 21 Win speedref REAL 16 3000 0 mm 2ms 04 Appl values 2m 04 02 Setpoint REAL 32 0 3268 2ms 04 04 Process PiDerr REAL 32 32768 3278 2ms 04 05 Process PID out REAL 32 32768 32768 2ms 04 06 REAL 16 32768 32768 10ms 04 07 REAL 16 32768 32768 10ms_ 312 Additional parameter data T Data R Update ype length ce time O408 Processvari REAL 16 32768 32768 t0ms 04 09 Counterontime UINT32 32 02147483647 s 10ms 0410 Counterontime2 UINT32 32 0 2147483647 s i0ms 0477 Counteredge UINT32 32 0 2147483647 10ms 04 12 Counteredge2 UINT32 32 0 2147468047 Om 04 73
140. 9 01 9 02 9 03 9 06 User IO sel lo User IO sel hi 3 Reset ChgParLog enum 16 Menu set active Power unit Fan ctrl mode Macro Read Only 16 21 Menu selection Drive boot Speed fb sel Additional parameter data 317 te fin Renee 9 en def macro een s emer ICI w v2 m w 9 1 3 149 meua s omes WA 29 ems 9 ras w 1 o m 91 9 amp 3 ma Frat der 0 amp 2 0 A n inate 10 mits a O a N e a 20 01 20 02 20 03 20 04 20 05 20 06 20 07 20 08 20 09 20 10 Maximum speed o rpm Minimum speed 3 mm Pos speed ena Maximum current 0 30000 a 0 00 A Torg lim sel Bit pointer Maximum torque 1 0 1600 Oa Minimum torque1 REAL 16 1600 0 BERE Maximum torque2 REAL 16 Minimum torque2 1500 rpm 30000 0 0 30000 0 rpm C TRUE C FALSE C FALSE 300 0 300 0 Max torque1 x Min torque rpm ms rpm ms rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm A ala O O 20 12 P motoring lim REAL 0 1600 300 0 20 13 P generating lim REAL 0 1600 300 0 21 Speed ref 21 01 Speed reff sel Valpointer 32 J AMscaled 318 Additional parameter data 22 06 22 07 22 08 22 09 22 12 Shape time acc1 Shape time acc2 Shape time dec1 Shape time dec2 Em stop time 23 Speed ctrl 23 01 23 02 23 03 23 04 23 05 23 06
141. ABB industrial drives Standard pump control program for ACQ810 drives Cy pu la a m AT y gt mi S ILLI aaa i T ar M W A 1111111111 UA t ABE br WEL LS X sa EA C E T s 4 T T i Faro Arrt Power and productivity AA UD LD for a better world PR do d List of related manuals Drive hardware manuals and guides Code English ACQ810 04 drive modules 1 1 to 45 kW 1 to 60 hp 3AUA0000055159 hardware manual ACQ810 04 drive modules 55 to 160 kW 3AUAO00000551 61 75 to 200 hp hardware manual ACQ810 04 drive modules 200 to 400 kW 3AUA0000055155 250 to 600 hp hardware manual ACQ810 04 drive modules 200 to 500 kW 300 to 3AUA00001 20538 00 hp hardware manual Safe torque off function for ACSM1 ACS850 and 3AFE68929814 ACQ810 drives application guide Drive firmware manuals and guides ACQ810 standard pump control program 3AUA0000055144 firmware manual ACQ810 04 drive modules start up guide 3AUA0000055159 Application programming for ACS850 and ACQ810 3AUA0000078664 drives application guide Option manuals and guides Manuals and quick guides for I O extension modules fieldbus adapters etc You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover For manuals not available in the Document library contact your local ABB rep
142. ARE VERSION Information on the firmware UIFQ Firmware of the ACQ810 drive 2010 Firmware version 0 Firmware patch version PRODUCT VARIANT 7 ACQ810 Pump control program You can scroll the information with A and S Y P Press EP to return to the Par Backup LOC PAR BACKUP 2 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC BACKUP INFO BACKUP INTERFACE VER 0 4 0 4 FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ 2010 0 EXIT 00 00 LOC G BACKUP INFO FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ 2010 0 UIFQ 200F 0 PRODUCT VARIANT EXIT 00 00 LOC PAR BACKUP 1 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL E O Settings In the I O Settings mode you can The ACQ810 control panel 47 e check the parameter settings that configure the I Os of the drive check the parameters that have an input or output selected as their source or target e edit the parameter setting Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals S hw Go to the Main menu by pressing lt S if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press SP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys A and SY 7 and pressing Select the I O group e g Digi
143. AULT 0x3181 Programmable fault 30 08 Wiring or earth SUPPLY PHASE 0x3130 Programmable fault 30 06 Suppl phs loss MOTOR PHASE 0x3182 Programmable fault 30 04 Mot phase loss ID RUN FAULT OxFF84 Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Fan is not able to rotate freely or fan is disconnected Fan operation is monitored by measuring fan current Difference between output phase U2 and W2 current measurement gain is too great Incorrect input power and motor cable connection or ground earth fault in the motor cable or motor Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Motor circuit fault due to missing motor connection all three phases are not connected Motor ID run is not completed successfully The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum current setting and or internal current limit of the drive is too low The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum speed setting and or calculated field weakening point is too low Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check that there is no earth fault in motor or motor cables measure insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative Check fan operation and connection Contact your loc
144. Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 1073742347 02 13 AI5 scaled see page 120 1073742349 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page T1198 292 Parameters 81 11 Al out hi level Pressure limit for primary outlet pressure supervision See parameter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl 0 00 32767 00 Pressure limit 100 1 bar bar 81 12 Very high ctrl Enables the secondary supervision of pump outlet pressure and selects the action taken when very high outlet pressure is detected The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained above the pressure limit 81 13 Al out very high for longer than the value of parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly See the diagram at parameter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl Note With a pressure switch this parameter has no effect Not sel Secondary outlet pressure supervision not used Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive s 7 1 Stop Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive The 2 drive will restart if the pressure falls below the limit 81 13 Al out very high Pressure limit for secondary outlet pressure supervision See parameter 81 12 Very high ctrl 0 00 32767 00 Pressure limit 100 1 bar bar 81 14 DI status outlet Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump outlet The normal state is 1 If the selected input switches to O the action defined by param
145. B MOTORID RUN page337 9 EMERGENCY STOP page 33 JEE 08 16 Alarm word2 Alarm word 2 This alarm word is refreshed ie when the alarm terminates the corresponding bit is cleared Alarm o oveen FIELDBUS COMM page 387 O O z PANELCTRLLOSS page33 OO 8 Al SUPERVISI N page 337 4 FE PAR CONF page 337 O B NOMOTORDATA age3S OOO OOOO ooo mE 142 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq Alarm word 3 This alarm word is refreshed ie when the alarm terminates the corresponding bit is cleared Alarm Reserved PS COMM page 338 RESTORE page 338 CUR MEAS CALIBRATION page 338 Reserved EARTH FAULT page 338 AUTORESET page 338 MOTOR NOM VALUE page 338 Reserved STALL page 338 LOAD CURVE page 338 LOAD CURVE PAR page 338 U f curve par page 338 Reserved of Al Al A N oy AeA Gl o GOI NI O a NO m O1 Alarm word 4 This alarm word is refreshed ie when the alarm terminates the corresponding bit is cleared Alarm OPTION COMM LOSS page 338 SOLUTION ALARM page 343 MOTOR TEMP2 page 339 IGBT OVERLOAD page 339 IGBT TEMP page 339 COOLING page 339 MENU CHANGED page 339 TEMP MEAS FAILURE page 340 Maintenance counter alarms 2055 2071 page 340 DC NOT CHARGED page 340 AUTOTUNE FAILED page 340 START INTERLOCK page 340 E
146. Communication break monitoring enabled in control location EXT1 Communication break monitoring disabled in control location EXT2 Example 50 21 bit O 1 bit 1 0 That is the communication break monitoring is enabled in EXT1 and disabled in EXT2 e If the drive is currently in EXT1 and the communication breaks the drive takes the action defined in parameter 50 02 Comm loss func e If the drive is currently in EXT2 and the communication breaks the drive does not take any action If the communication is re established before switching back to EXT1 the drive continues operating and does not remember the temporary loss of communication 51 FBA settings Fieldbus adapter specific settings 51 01 FBA type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 Fieldbus module is not found or it is not properly connected or parameter 50 01 FBA enable is set to Disable 1 PROFIBUS DP 32 CANopen 37 DeviceNet 128 Ethernet 132 PROFINET IO 135 EtherCAT 136 Ethernet POWERLINK 485 RS 485 62944 SERCOS interface 51 02 FBA par2 Parameters 51 02 51 26 are adapter module specific For more information see the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used 51 26 FBA par26 See parameter 51 02 FBA par2 51 27 FBA par refresh Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatic
147. DC COM O O lt 2 A 3 XD24 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC wm 3 jH Digital input output ground 4 Ground selection jumper XDI Digital input DI2 Constant speed D2 2 DigtalutDI3 Ree a Ys DgtalimputDa a fa Start interlock 0 Stop a H XDIO XAI Reference voltage VREF Reference voltage VREF AGND Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al Le Current Speed reference 1 Al1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Current Process actual value 1 7 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al1 AI2 current voltage selection jumper XAO Analog output AO1 Current Analog output AO2 Speed rpm 2 Drive to drive link Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start P Control panel connection Memory unit connection Application macros 111 Multipump control macro E Description and typical application This macro is suitable for pump stations that consist of multiple pumps each controlled by a separate drive The configuration supports redundancy so that in case of a pump failure or maintenance action on one drive the remaining drives continue operation The drives communicate with each other through the drive to drive D2D link It is possible to distribute two analog and five digital signals from a specific drive to the other drives via the drive
148. Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO3 0 000 22 700 mA Minimum AOS3 output value 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA Parameters 175 15 17 AO3 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 13 AOS src that corresponds to the maximum AO3 output value defined by parameter 15 15 AO3 out max lAo3 MA 15 15 15 16 p 15 18 15 17 Signal real selected by par 15 13 lAo3 MA 15 15 15 16 15 17 15 18 Signal real selected by par 15 13 32768 000 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO3 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 18 AO3 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 13 AOS src that corresponds to the minimum AO3 output value defined by parameter 15 16 AO3 out min See parameter 15 17 AOS src max 32 68 000 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO3 output 1000 1 32768 000 value 15 25 AO ctrl word Defines whether the signs of the sources connected to analog outputs AO1 and AC2 are considered or not AO1 func O In signed Sign of AO1 source is taken into account 1 In absolute Absolute value of AO1 source is used 1 O In signed Sign of AO2 source is taken into account 1 In absolute Absolute value of AO2 source is used 176 Parameters 15 AO calibration Activates a calibration function that can be used to improve the accuracy of analog outputs No action Normal
149. EL To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT onthe OC t TIME FORMAT 1 menu nd and select a suitable format with keys A y and Press SE to save or Fy to 12 hour cancel your changes CANCEL 00 00 SEL 38 The ACQ810 control panel To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press and select a suitable format OK CANCEL Press DN to save or ES to cancel your changes To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press Rl Specify the hours with keys CA and SY 7 and press CANCEL wet Then specify the minutes Press E wi to save or CZ to cancel your changes To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys C and v_ and press Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press A To cancel your changes press To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press Ew Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed Scroll the text with keys CAS and Ww 7 To return to the previous display press To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press To enable automatic clock
150. EXT1 Effective if control location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus 12 Reserved sito Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 367 E Status word for the ABB Drives profiles The table below shows the Fieldbus status word for both ABB Drives profiles The embedded fieldbus interface converts the Drive status word 02 37 EFB main sw to this form for the transfer in the fieldbus The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles on page 369 Name Value STATE Description RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON Bl NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED f eee E 2 STA BN 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive ME ai ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBITED 1 Warning Alarm FAULT No fault SWC ON INHIB OFF2 inactive ALARM OFF2 ACTIVE a No warning alarm i i 0 Actual value equals Reference is within tolerance limits i e in speed control speed error is 10 max of nominal motor speed Actual value so from Reference is outside so limits Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 REMOTE Drive control location LOCAL ABOVE Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds LIMIT supervision limit set by drive parameter Valid in both directions of rotation O0 Actual frequency or spe
151. FB COMM LOSS page 341 14 Reserved AO CALIBRATION page 341 mh Al A N Ol eI OINI NO O OO al Parameters 143 Pump fault word Pump fault word Jar c mawa 1 MAX FLOW page 352 2 LOW PRESSURE page 382 5 HH PRESSURE page 382 VERY LOW PRESS page 3 5 VERY HIGH PRESS page 3S 6 WAXCLEANNNGSQgedB 7 PPEFLLTOUT ege 38 B MF MASTER LOST page 353 9 WENO SHARED DATA page T m Pump alarm word Pump alarm word Alarm MAX FLOW page 341 14 BOOSTING page 342 PIPE FILLING page 342 NO MORE PUMPS page 342 AUTOCHANGE page 342 SLEEPING page 342 START DELAY page 342 MF MASTER LOST page 343 Reserved LC TANK FULL page 342 LC TANK EMPTY page 343 MF NO SHARED DATA page 343 09 System info Drive type program revision and option slot occupation information 09 01 Drive type Displays the drive type for example ACQ810 Bt LEE ANNE NN LE a O O1 C NT NT NTN no NIN Gl Gi A co N gt S o co a w S D o D 2 R G 144 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 09 02 Drive rating ID Displays the inverter type ACQ810 of the drive 0 Unconfigured 201 02A7 4 202 03A0
152. FBA sw bit13 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 29 02 24 FBA main sw bit 29 Note that this functionality may not be supported by the fieldbus communication profile Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iia 50 10 FBA sw bit14 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 30 02 24 FBA main sw bit 30 Note that this functionality may not be supported by the fieldbus communication profile Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iia 50 11 FBA sw bit15 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status word bit 31 02 24 FBA main sw bit 31 Note that this functionality may not be supported by the fieldbus communication profile 244 Parameters Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iid 50 12 FB comm speed Selects the fieldbus communication speed Raising the speed increases the CPU load The table below shows the read write intervals for cyclic and acyclic data with each parameter setting Selection Cycic Aey 1 Cyclic data consists of fieldbus CW and SW Ref1 and Ref2 and Act1 and Act2 Acyclic data consists of the parameter data mapped to parameter groups 52 FBA data in and 53 FBA data out Low Low speed selected 50 15 FBA cw used Selects the fieldbus Control Word which controls the drive Forfieldbus control through a fieldbus adapter module
153. Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC O PAR EDIT 1002 Ext1 start inl DI1 P 02 01 00 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC QU PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl DIOA P 02 03 03 CANCEL 00 00 SEL e UY I O SETTINGS L1 DI EPS GAME TE Fh 1010 Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT The ACQ810 control panel 49 E Reference Edit In the Reference Edit option you can e accurately control the local reference value e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit reference value If the panel is in the remote control mode REM shown on REM amp MESSAGE the status line switch to local control LOC shown on the Raference editi ng status line by pressing E See page 22 for more enabled onl y in information on switching between the local and remote local control mode control modes Note By default reference editing from the panel is only possible in the local control mode In the remote control 00 00 mode the reference can be edited from the control panel only if it ie parameter 02 34 Panel ref has been specified as the source of the active external reference The message shown on the right is displayed if the reference cannot be edited from the panel Otherwise go to the Main menu by pressing X if you LOC MAIN MENU 1 are in the Output mode Otherwise ii EZ repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 EN
154. FbEq 15 12 AC2 src min Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 07 AO2 src that corresponds to the minimum AO2 output value defined by parameter 15 10 AO2 out min See parameter 15 11 AO2 src max Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO2 output 1000 1 32768 000 value Selects a drive signal to be connected to analog output AO3 01 01 Motor speed rom see page 118 1073742081 01 02 Motor speed 96 see page 118 1073742082 01 03 Output frequency see page 116 1073742083 01 04 Motor current see page 116 1073742084 01 05 Motor current see page 1168 1073742085 01 06 Motor torque see page 118 1073742086 01 07 Dc voltage see page 116 1073742087 01 22 Power inu out see page 118 1073742102 01 23 Motor power see page 118 1073742103 03 03 SpeedRef unramp see page 129 1073742595 03 05 SpeedRef ramped see page 129 1073742597 03 06 SpeedRef used see page 129 1073742598 03 14 Torq ref used see page 129 1073742606 04 05 Process PID out see page 129 1073742853 04 22 Act val 6 see page 130 1073742870 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 15 14 AO3 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO3 See parameter 15 02 AO1 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 15 15 AO3 out max Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO3 0 000 22 700 mA Maximum AO3 output value 15 16 AO3 out min
155. I O extensions Settings Parameter group 15 Analogue outputs page 170 Diagnostics Parameters 02 16 02 19 page 120 E Programmable digital inputs and outputs The drive has five digital inputs a digital start interlock input and two digital input outputs One digital input DI5 doubles as a PTC thermistor input See section Thermal motor protection on page 83 One of the digital input outputs can be used as a frequency input the other as a frequency output The number of digital input outputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 14 Digital I O page 159 Program features 71 Diagnostics Parameters 02 01 DI status page 119 02 03 DIO status page 120 02 20 Ered in page 120 and 02 21 Freq out page 120 E Programmable I O extensions The number of inputs and outputs can be increased by using FIO xx I O extensions The drive I O configuration parameters include the maximum number of DI DIO Al AO and RO that can be taken into use with different FIO xx combinations The table below shows the possible I O combinations of the drive Digital Analog Relay inputs i outputs outputs JCU Control Unit 2 4 JCU Control Unit FIO 01 FIO 11 FIO 21 FIO 31 For example with an FIO 21 connected to the drive parameters controlling DI1 7 DIO1 2 Al1 3 AO1 2 and RO1 4 are in use Settings Parameter groups 13 Analogue inputs page 153 14 Digital I
156. I1 DI6 and DIIL meut 16 Dii Di2 on Example 0100001 DIIL is on DI1 is on DI2 DI6 are off Note DI6 is available only with an FIO I O extension module See section Programmable I O extensions on page 71 120 Parameters No Name Value 02 02 RO status 02 03 DIO status 02 04 AIT 02 05 Al1 scaled 02 06 Al2 02 07 AI2 scaled 02 08 AI3 02 09 AI3 scaled 02 10 Al4 02 11 Al4 scaled 02 12 Al5 02 13 Al5 scaled 02 16 AOT 02 17 AC2 02 18 AO3 02 19 AO4 02 20 Freq in 02 21 Freq out Status of relay outputs RO6 RO1 Example 000011 RO1 and RO2 are energized RO3 RO6 are de energized Note RO3 RO6 are available only with an FIO I O extension module See section Programmable I O extensions on page 71 Status of digital input outputs DIO6 DIO1 Example 001001 DIO1 and DIO4 are on remainder are off Note DIO3 DIO6 are available only with an FIO I O extension module See section Programmable I O extensions on page 71 Value of analog input Al1 in V or mA Input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit Scaled value of analog input Al1 See parameters 13 04 Al7 max scale and 13 05 Al1 min scale Value of analog input Al2 in V or mA Input type is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit Scaled value of analog input Al2 See parameters 13 09 AI2 max scale and 13 10 Al2 min scale Value of analog input Al3 in V or mA For input type information see the
157. L INPUTS 16 07 Param save Save restores to oaves parameter value changes including Done those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 362 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit data words with the ABB Drives profile or DCU 16 bit profile or 32 bit data words with the DCU 32 bit profile The diagram below illustrates the operation of the fieldbus interface The signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the diagram Fieldbus network Cyclic communication EXT1 2 Start func 02 36 EFB main ow I 10 01 10 04 Speed REF1 sel S um a 02 38 EFB main ref1 i 02 39 EFB main ref2 02 37 EFB main sw Actual 1 DATA I O selection Group 58 21 01 Par 01 01 99 99 Speed REF2 sel 250 o J 2 S 21 02 Acyclic communication Parameter table 1 See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus 2 Data conversion if parameter 58 06 Control profile is 0 ABB Classic or 1 ABB Enhanced See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 364 3 See parameter 50 04 FBA ref modesel and 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel for the actual value selections Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 363 S Control word and Status word The Fieldbus control word CW is a 16
158. LEN NL NN NL O O NO O 47 Voltage ctrl E ECC mm E 31 FCI Eee 7 04 Suppy vorege REA 8 109 V 490v LI 100 0 Done O on 49 Data storage 49 01 Data storage UINT32 32768 32767 0 Additional parameter data 325 Nof name mee iem AO A 002 Data storage UNa 16 23 0 zooa Data storages NTS 16 aerer o 004 Data storages H E 16 arenar 0 49 05 Datastorages UNTSZ 32 2147489647 21ara836o7 0 49 06 Data storageo TOS 32 217483647 2147089647 0 807 Data storage UINTSZ 32 2147489647 21ara836o7 0 50 Fieldbus Some emm ve ont f owe Ssmi mm 3 M 30 03 Comos tout UNT 16 03 8898 s oss 5004 FBA eri modes emm 16 o2 Sw 50 05 FBA ref2modeser emm 16 o2 Speed 3006 F8A act a x a s007 RBA az Valponter 3 ros snos rei wnm2ss etom 32 oras 50 00 FBA sw 3 so BRpomer oras Som ek sumarse eteme 32 rs 5071 FBA sw bso BRpomer HHH rs 5012 78 comm speed emm 002 ww 3015184 cwused A 32 PE 50 20 Fb main sw func Pb 0b000 0b111 0b001 51 FBA settings Ta UE E 52 FBA data in E om 0 9999 ala O OD 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 Idle 326 Additional parameter data ome ien O Ranae ume armaro 83 01 FBA data outt UINT32
159. O page 159 15 Analogue outputs page 170 and 94 Ext IO conf page 300 E Programmable relay outputs The drive has two relay outputs The signals to be indicated by the outputs can be selected by parameters Relay outputs can be added by using FIO xx I O extensions Settings Parameter group 14 Digital I O page 159 Diagnostics Parameter 02 02 RO status page 120 E Fieldbus control The drive can be connected to several different automation systems through its fieldbus interface See chapters Control through the embedded fieldbus interface page 355 and Control through a fieldbus adapter page 383 2 Program features Settings Parameter groups 50 Fieldbus page 242 51 FBA settings page 245 52 FBA data in page 246 53 FBA data out page 247 and 58 Embedded Modbus page 249 Program features 73 Motor control E Constant speeds It is possible to predefine up to 7 constant speeds Constant speeds can be activated for example through digital inputs Constant speeds override the speed reference Settings Parameter group 26 Constant speeds page 197 E Critical speeds A Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of for example mechanical resonance problems Settings Parameter group 25 Critical speed page 196 E Speed controller tuning The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted
160. O LZ ule YS e2ua8J9joJ paads ejqeue peeds sod 0 0Z peeds uunuuxelA LO OZ 0 e qeue peeds Ban y0 0z peeds winwiull ZO0 Oc sqe uiui jespeeds 60 LZ ujoe 1SoJ 8JeuS 6 97 1ed Buisn epeui eq ued peeds juenrajal 1887 10 gpaeds jJsuoy g 9z ueewjeq 99100 eseo dojs 1 SE JO SSO 1 SE JO uOj 2e SSOT NSW 4 94 1ed Buisn apeu eq ued paads juenajas 1587 JO gpeedg jsuo g 9z ueewjeq 20049 S Duiuee 9 10 0Z 9 peeds eos dund 9e 7z r Pep eys ou HIN SZ HA LZ 2 DUL eur 9L Z9 m deis ed 1 Z8 UBIH 6167 peeds Buljeos uoun Bulueajo epoui 19167 64 r 03uo9 9 9 Hd 0C 9 peeds suoy peeds uBIH El 4q LZ 9 Spo JSMOIIOS 94 peeds 49MOJ O4 HA ZZ 9 ibd dn euoN 8167 491 SJejse N AZA p ds jeos dung 9 Z Buljeos did NO Qld S99014 S Y 396 Control block diagrams 043uoo ds b10 UIN OL EZ C 1119 ds 19 DIO 60 0 did mE X m eyes BuidooJG v Lec ds uiui 1e J909J 81 ez ds ulW Je J900q ZVEZ ds uiui depe ld QLY Z ds xew depe ld Sl ez OUI JU eq v0 z eui uoneAueqd 0 EZ eu uoneJBeju Z0 EZ ule podold 0 z HU 10119 peeds 0 0 Ne 041uoo ds b10 XE N 60 z d 0 C b10 duioo 29v 90 0 eu
161. RUE Pe bee a ee d E PUE E vx Default control connections for the TRAD macro o Application examples poaceeeneebon Gh ober ce be eee ee ee ee eee EOS dba VS Sb E Level control MACTO uus suona w Saas ge ae a ewe eee a ew ew ee ee Description and typical application 0 0 0 eaa eee Default settings 0 eee teen e eas Default control connections for the Level control macro o o oooooooo Multipump control macro ee eens Description and typical application naana aaa eaa ee ee Deau SEOS a esses Ed eei xm eee we E ER ESE wee eee ee Ghee SUN SIE Default control connections for the Multipump control macro Pressure sensor connection examples creen 6 Parameters What this chapter contains clle rn 115 Terms and abbreviations 0 err 115 Summary of parameter groups aana aa 116 Parameter listing mmn 118 01 Actual Valle S uuucuaeuatacrgmzehresuUmeSESE RES USP EU SUR EXE JU m 0r d a duds 118 02 UO values 504 ee eee oe oh ood ee et eee tug eed dou ab ed oe nee eee eee oe 119 OS Control values 8644 oran SHS Ge Ob dere Ete Ede eX Ex x Ex 129 04 AOC VAIUCS 2 eu eee eadeead REEEMERDPUERERUTSERENEELEREU SORS S USES OS 129 OS Pump VANES asesores y rre dores ones EES eee bees bos hee be bee du 130 00 Drive Statue xzrcimsirduRESesuERiu SEG Rede Be onde 2b pasas a 133 08 Alarms amp TaUllS ceadeead surcoreano coa 138 OS SySIEM INO 2 ausa guerres curidcee e5sesernr
162. Read only 1 0x0000 0xFFFF Bits 0 15 of the Control word as a hex value 252 Parameters No Name Value 58 22 Raw CW MSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 98 23 Raw SW LSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 98 24 Raw SW MSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 98 25 Raw Ref 1 LSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 98 26 Raw Ref 1 MSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 27 Raw Ref 2 LSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 98 28 Raw Ref 2 MSW 0x0000 0xFFFF 58 30 Transmit delay 0 65335 ms 58 31 Ret app errors Z O Z o 58 32 Word order MSW LSW LSW MSW 58 39 Data l O 1 0 9999 58 36 Data I O 2 0 9999 Bits 16 32 of reference 1 as a hex value Shows the LSW part of reference 2 which the drive receives from the Modbus master Read only Bits 0 15 of reference 2 as a hex value Shows the MSW part of reference 2 which the drive receives from the Modbus master Read only Bits 16 32 of reference 2 as a hex value Defines the delay time which the slave waits until it sends a response Transmit delay time 1 1 ms Bits 0 15 of reference 1 as a hex value Shows the MSW part of reference 1 which the drive receives from the Modbus master Read only Selects whether the drive returns Modbus exception codes or not e T Least sioniteant word fret then Mos significant word See parameter 58 55 See parameter 58 55 121 Shows the MSW part of the Control Word which the drive receives from the Modbus master Read only Bits 16 32 of the Control word as a hex value Shows the LSW part
163. Selects the motor stop function Coast Stop by cutting of the motor power supply The motor coasts 1 to a stop WARNING If the mechanical brake is used ensure it N is safe to stop the drive by coasting Ramp Stop along ramp See parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp on page 186 11 04 Dc hold speed Defines the DC hold speed See parameter 11 06 Dc hold 0 0 1000 0 rpm DC hold speed 11 05 Dc hold curr ref Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal current See parameter 11 06 Dc hold O 10096 DC hold current 1 7 196 2 10 1 rpm 152 Parameters Name Value Description FbEq 11 06 Dc hold Enables the DC hold function The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter 11 04 Dc hold speed the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 11 05 Dc hold curr ref When the reference speed exceeds parameter 11 04 Dc hold speed normal drive operation continues DC hold Motor speed Reference 11 04 Dc hold speed 0 DC hold disabled 1 DC hold enabled Notes The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched off The DC hold function can only be activated in speed control mode The DC hold function cannot be activated if parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to
164. Start level 7 reached Start level 8 1 Start level 8 reached High level 1 1 High level 1 reached High level 2 1 High level 2 reached High speed High speed reached 31 Reserved P mE A N Ol A OI KM 0 KM gt lo 06 22 MF status word Multipump communication status word aster running Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 1 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 2 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 3 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 4 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 5 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 6 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 7 is present on the drive to drive link Only valid if the drive is master Drive with node number 8 is present on the drive to drive link 23 08 Alarms amp faults Alarm and fault information bs 08 01 Active fault Fault code of the latest fault 08 02 Last fault Fault code of the 2nd latest fault 08 03 Fault time hi Time real time or power on time at which the active fault occurred in format dd mm yy day month and year Parameters 139
165. TER Go to the Reference Edit option by selecting REF EDIT LOC U REF EDIT on the menu with keys lt 4 and X V 2 and pressing IOOO0 00rpm CANCEL 00 00 NEXT Select the correct sign with keys LA and SY Z and OC t REF EDIT press Select the correct numbers with keys A y and and after each number is selected press X 1250 O rpm CANCEL 00 00 SAVE After the last number is selected press Go to the LOC i 1250 00rpm Output mode by pressing The selected reference 49 10 uz value is shown in the status Tine A 10 7 x DIR 00 00 MENU 50 The ACQ810 control panel E Drive Info In the Drive Info option you can e view information on the drive e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view drive info 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt if you are in the Output mode Otherwise press EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu 2 Go to the Drive info option by selecting DRIVE INFO on the menu with keys lt 4 and S V 7 and pressing ENTER 3 The display shows information about the drive You can scroll the information with keys lt 4 and SY 7 Note The information shown may vary according to the firmware version of the drive DRIVE NAME Drive name defined as a text in DriveStudio commissioning and maintenance tool DRIVE TYPE e g ACQ810 DRIVE MODEL Type code of the drive FW VERSION See page 45 SOLUTION PROGRAM Ve
166. TO signals are lost Drive stopped No action if both STO signals are absent If only one of the signals is lost the drive trips on STO1 LOST 0x8182 or STO2 LOST 0x8183 Only Alarm The drive generates a SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A alarm if both STO signals are absent If only one of the signals is lost the drive trips on STO1 LOST 0x8182 or STO2 LOST 0x8183 30 08 Wiring or earth Selects how the drive reacts to an incorrect input power and motor cable connection or to a ground earth fault in the motor cable or motor Note When supplying the drive through the DC connection set this parameter to No to avoid nuisance fault trips For 4 more information refer to Common DC configuration application guide 3AUA0000073108 English Fault The drive trips on fault WIRING OR EARTH FAULT 1 0x3181 Parameters 209 No Name Value Description FbEq 30 09 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition A stall condition is defined as follows The drive is at stall current limit 30 10 Stall curr lim and the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30 11 Stall freq hi and e the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 30 12 Stall time See section S all protection parameters 30 09 30 12 on page 85 Ena warn Enable warning O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates alarm STALL 0x7121 upon a stall condition Ena fault Enable faul
167. Totalfiow UINTS2 32 0 2147483887 mv Moms 05 09 Bypass ref REAL 32 s2768 32768 wm 10ms 05 10 Speedref REAL 32 32768 32767 wm RIT 05 20 kWh cumentread UINTS2 32 0 2147488047 kWh ms 05 27 kWh prev read UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh ms 05 22 kWh posprevread UINTS2 32 0 2147483647 kWh 10ms 05 23 kWh cur mon read UINT32 32 0 2147483647 kWh ms 05 24 kWh January UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh ms 05 25 kWh February UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh 10ms 0526 kWh March UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh 10ms 0527 kWh Apr UINT32 32 02197483647 kWh 10ms 0528 kWh May UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh ms 0529 kWh June UINTS2 32 02147483647 kWh 10ms 0530 kWh July UINTS2 32 02147488647 kWh ms 05 317 kWh August UINT32 32 0 2147488647 KWh 10ms 05 32 kWh September UINT32 32 0 2147483647 kWh ms 0533 kWh October UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh ms 05 34 kWh November UINT32 32 02147483647 kWh ms 05 35 kWh December UINT32 32 02147488647 kWh ms
168. acting the drive s energy consumed from the direct on line consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 45 08 Pump ref power As such the accuracy of this signal is dependent on the accuracy of the direct on line power estimate entered in that parameter See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 240 01 36 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct on line motor 100 1 connection This value is a multiplication of parameters 01 35 Saved energy and 45 02 Energy tariff1 See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 240 01 37 Saved CO2 Reduction in CO emissions in metric tons compared to 10 1 metric direct on line motor connection This value is calculated by ton multiplying the saved energy in MWh by 45 07 CO2 Conv factor default 0 5 tn MWh See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 240 Celsius 01 39 Output voltage Calculated motor voltage 01 40 Speed filt Filtered result from 01 01 Motor speed rpm The filter time is 100 1 rpm set with parameter 56 08 Speed filt time This signal is not used in motor control 01 41 Torque filt Filtered result from 01 06 Motor torque The filter time is set 10 1 with parameter 56 09 Torque filt time This signal is not used in motor control 01 42 Fan start count Number of times the drive cooling fan has been started 121 02 I O values Input and output states and values control and status words 02 01 DI status Status of digital inputs D
169. after the set N magnetizing time has passed even if motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases It includes the flying start function starting to a rotating machine and the automatic restart function a stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions Note If parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default 11 02 Dc magn time Defines the constant DC magnetizing time See parameter 11 01 Start mode After the start command the drive automatically premagnetizes the motor the set time To ensure full magnetizing set this value to the same value as or higher than the rotor time constant If not known use the rule of thumb value given in the table below Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time 1 kW 2 50 to 100 ms 1 to 10 kW gt 100 to 200 ms 10 to 200 kW gt 200 to 1000 ms 200 to 1000 kW gt 1000 to 2000 ms Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time 1 1ms 11 03 Stop mode
170. aks Check piping for blocks Check the piping for leaks Check the general condition of the components of the pumping station 342 Fault tracing Alarm fieldbus code 2209 2222 MAX CLEANINGS 0xC008 08 09 Alarm logger5 b8 08 21 Pump alarm word b ALL PUMPS INLOCKD OxC009 08 09 Alarm logger5 b9 08 21 Pump alarm word b10 ENERGY LIMIT OxCO0A 08 09 Alarm logger5 b10 08 21 Pump alarm word b11 DATE WRONG OxC00B 08 09 Alarm logger5 b11 08 21 Pump alarm word b12 BOOSTING OxCOOE 08 09 Alarm logger5 b14 08 21 Pump alarm word b15 PIPE FILLING OxCOOF 08 09 Alarm logger5 b15 08 21 Pump alarm word b16 NO MORE PUMPS 0xC010 08 10 Alarm logger6 bO 08 21 Pump alarm word b17 CLEANING 0xC011 08 10 Alarm logger6 b1 08 21 Pump alarm word b8 AUTOCHANGE 0xC012 08 10 Alarm logger6 b2 08 21 Pump alarm word b18 SLEEPING 0xC013 08 10 Alarm logger6 b3 08 21 Pump alarm word b19 START DELAY 0xC014 08 10 Alarm logger6 b4 08 21 Pump alarm word b20 LC TANK FULL 0xC016 08 10 Alarm logger6 b5 08 21 Pump alarm word b23 Maximum number of cleaning sequences exceeded see parameter group 82 Pump cleaning All interlock signals are off indicating no pumps are available Energy consumption limit exceeded see parameter group 83 Energy monitoring Date has not been set Sleep boost is active The soft pipefill function is being performed No further pumps are avai
171. al ABB representative Check input power and motor cable connections Check the insulation resistance of the motor cable and motor Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Connect motor cable Check the fault logger for a fault code extension See appropriate actions for each extension below Check setting of parameters 99 06 Mot nom currentand 20 05 Maximum current Make sure that 20 05 Maximum current gt 99 06 Mot nom current Check that the drive is dimensioned correctly according to the motor Check setting of parameters 99 07 Mot nom voltage 99 08 Mot nom freq 99 09 Mot nom speed 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed Make sure that e 20 01 Maximum speed gt 0 55 x 99 09 Mot nom speed 0 50 x synchronous speed e 20 02 Minimum speed lt 0 and supply voltage gt 0 66 x 99 07 Mot nom voltage 346 Fault tracing Fault fieldbus code The ID run cannot be completed because the maximum torque setting is too low NEN Ope Current measurement calibration did not finish within reasonable time Check setting of parameter 99 12 Mot nom torque and torque limits defined in parameter group 20 Limits Make sure that the active maximum torque selected by 20 06 Torq lim sel gt 100 Contact your local ABB representative BEN Extension 5 8 Contact your local ABB representative oom B Extension 10 B Extension 11 Asynchronous
172. al not displayed Any other signals that are not disabled are shown together with their respective signal name Normal Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit r Shows the signal as a horizontal bar Drive name Shows the drive name The drive name can be set using the 2 DriveStudio PC tool Drive type Shows the drive type 3 i 1 T S i 3 i i 1 Normal Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit Bar Shows the signal as a horizontal bar 1 Drive name Shows the drive name The drive name can be set using the DriveStudio PC tool i 3 l i i 1 1 T Drive type Shows the drive type UU Q 56 06 Signal3 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56 03 Signal3 param is displayed on the optional control panel 56 07 Local ref unit Defines how speed reference is entered and displayed by the control panel and DriveStudio PC tool Also determines the unit of signal 02 34 Panel ref Note This parameter also applies to external control when speed reference is given from the control panel rpm Speed reference is displayed and entered in rpm Percent Speed reference is displayed and entered in percent The scaling is as follows Control panel Speed rpm reference 100 20 01 Maximum speed 100 20 02 Minimum speed 56 08 Speed filt time Defines a filter time constant for 01 40 Speed filt A longer time constant makes the filtered result more steady but slows down the
173. all parameters EXE 30 tt LOC amp PAR BACKUP Finishing restore operation Downloading finishes Parameter errors If you try to backup and restore parameters between different firmware versions the panel shows you the following parameter error information Restore operation starts normally A version check is made You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are not the same Scroll the text with keys A and CANCEL CONT To continue press Ew Press CZ to BIG the operation LOC amp PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 LOC VERSION CHECK 1 FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ 200F 0 UTFQ 200C 0 OK PRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL 00 00 CONT LOCU VER CHECK FIRMWARE VERSION PRODUCT L ell OK CANCEL 00 00 CONT E 2 42 The ACQ810 control panel If the downloading is continued the display shows a message about it Downloading continues drive is being restarted The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Downloading continues Downloading finishes The panel shows a list of erroneous parameters You can scroll the parameters with keys 44 and Kw 7 The reason for parameter error is also shown LOC amp PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive LOC PAR BACKUP Restoring downloading all parameters 30 ico r
174. ally to Done Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 246 Parameters 51 28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive In format xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number z correction number 0x0000 OXFFFF Parameter table revision 1271 51 29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 0 65535 Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file 121 51 30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format Example 0x107 revision 1 07 0 65535 Mapping file revision 51 31 D2FBA comm sta Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication Me Adapter is not configured Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive Conf err Adapter configuration error The major or minor revision code of the common program revision in the fieldbus adapter module is not the revision required by the module see parameter 51 32 FBA comm sw ver or mapping file upload has failed more than three times On line Adapter is on line 5 Adapter is performing a hardware reset 51 32 FBA comm sw ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter module in format axyz wher
175. alue A negative reference is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive value of the integer part MSW Parameters 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel select the drive actual signals for the fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2 respectively as follows e If you select value Raw data the drive parameters 50 06 FBA act1 tr src and 50 07 FBA act2 tr src select the drive parameters for the fieldbus actual value 3 8 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface ACT1 and ACT2 respectively The table below clarifies the relation between the value of drive parameter and fieldbus actual value no scaling Value of the selected drive signal Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 integer and fractional part 32767 65535 32767 65535 32768 65535 32768 65535 e If you select value Speed the drive parameter 01 01 Motor speed rom will be written to fieldbus actual value The table below clarifies the relation between the value of drive parameter value and the fieldbus actual value no scaling Value of the selected drive signal Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 integer and fractional part 32767 65535 32767 65535 32768 65535 32768 65535 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 379 E Modbus register addresses for the DCU 32 bit profile The table below shows the Modbus register addresses and data with the DCU 32 bit profile This profi
176. ameters 22 02 Acc time and 22 03 Dec time 1 Standard ramp set is active 0 Quick ramp set 1 or set 2 is active This parameter overrides parameter 75 33 QR 1 2 swtch Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Speed Speed as indicated by 05 48 Ramp status bit 7 The ramp set is changed when the actual speed exceeds the switchover speed defined by 75 38 QR NR sw ch spd Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 75 38 QR NR swtch spd When parameter 75 37 QR NR switch is set to Speed this parameter defines the speed at which quick ramp set 1 or set 2 is changed to the standard ramp set defined by 1074201904 parameters 22 02 Acc time and 22 03 Dec time The ramp set is changed when the actual speed exceeds this switchover speed 0 0 30000 0 rpm Switchover speed 10 1 rpm 268 Parameters 76 MF communication Communication configuration for applications consisting of multiple pumps with dedicated drives 76 01 Enable MF comm Enables disables drive to drive communication through the D2D link Note Drive to drive communication can only be enabled if the embedded fieldbus interface is disabled parameter 58 01 Protocol ena sel is set to Disabled Drive to drive communication disabled Drive to drive communication enabled 1 76 02 Pump node Node number of the drive on
177. ameters relevant to the traditional pump 3 control application macro is displayed Trad long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the 4 traditional pump control application macro is displayed Parameters 179 Ext short A selective list of parameters relevant to the external control 5 application macro is displayed Ext long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the external control application macro is displayed H A short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Hand Auto 7 control application macro is displayed H A long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the Hand Auto control application macro is displayed Level short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Level control application macro single pump is displayed Level long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the 10 Level control application macro single pump is displayed M lvl short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Level control 11 application macro multipump is displayed M lvl long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the 12 Level control application macro multipump is displayed M pump short A selective list of parameters relevant to the Multipump 13 control application macro single pump is displayed M pump long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the 1 Multipump control application macro single pump is displayed Full All parameters
178. an be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 35 Trad 7 runtime Pump 7 run time counter for traditional control see page 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 36 Trad 8 runtime Pump 8 run time counter for traditional control see page 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 05 Pump values Pump station actual values mE 05 01 MF status State of drive in a multipump configuration several drives connected by the drive to drive link Drive to drive communication is not active o Standby The drive is ready to start and waiting for a start command from the master The drive is running and currently the master 2 The drive is running and currently a follower Parameters 131 Trad pump cmd Pump control word The bits of this parameter can be used to control the relay outputs that switch pumps on and off Pump 1 Note The setting of parameter 78 02 Autochg trad determines whether Pump 1 refers to the first pump of the station or the first auxiliary pump of the station 05 03 Trad master In traditional pump control the number of the pump that is 1 1 directly controlled by the drive 05 04 Nbr aux pumps on Number of auxiliary pumps running 05 05 Flow act Actual flow as calculated by the drive See parameter group 100 1 m h 80 Flow calculation page 284 05 06 Flow by head Flow calculated on the basis of the HQ performance curve 100 1 m h See parameter group 80 Fl
179. and 20 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 20 and 30 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 30 and 40 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 40 and 50 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 50 and 60 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60 100 1 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 60 and 70 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70 100 1 256 Parameters 64 31 AL2 70 to 80 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 70 and 80 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80 100 1 64 32 AL2 80 to 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that fall between 80 and 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90 100 1 64 33 AL2 over 90 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that exceed 90 0 00 100 00 Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90 100 1 75 Pump logic Configuration settings for the pump station 75 01 Operation mode Selects the pump control mode Off Use this setting for a single pump and for level control applications even if t
180. and HZ then returns to the Output mode A x DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward tU shown on the status line to reverse J shown on the status line or vice versa press CZ How to set the speed or frequency reference in the Output mode oee also section Reference Edit on page 49 If you are not in the Output mode press EZ repeatedly REM YU 30 00rpom until you get there A9 10 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 x DIR 00 00 MENU 24 The ACQ810 control panel If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing Z The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode 3 To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press 4 The value changes immediately It is stored in the permanent memory of the drive and restored automatically after power switch off To decrease the value press WU 49 10 uz 0 50 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly OC amp until you get there 49 10 Hz 0 504 10 7 x DIR 00 00 MENU To increase the contrast press keys E wl and CAN LOC Y simultaneously To decrease the contrast press keys X and SY simultaneously 49 10 Hz 0 504 10 7 x DIR 00 00 MENU The ACQ810 control panel 25 EN Parameters
181. any are received by the drive Shared signals not received Yes Shared signals received The signals received are shown by parameters 02 42 Shared DI 02 43 Shared signal 1 and 02 44 Shared signal 2 76 12 Setas source Determines whether the drive broadcasts shared signals on the drive to drive link or not No The drive does not broadcast shared signals Yes The drive broadcasts the signals selected by parameters 76 13 Shared signal 1 and 76 14 Shared signal 2 as shared Z O 1 signals on the drive to drive link Digital signals are shared automatically Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer iu 76 13 Shared signal 1 Selects a signal to be broadcast as shared signal 1 on the drive to drive link Al1 scaled 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 Al2 scaled 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 Proc act 04 01 Act val see page 129 1073742849 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 76 14 Shared signal 2 Selects a signal to be broadcast as shared signal 2 on the drive to drive link Al1 scaled 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 Al2 scaled 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 Setpoint 04 02 Setpoint see page 129 1073742850 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Parameters 271 76 15 Share lost actn Defines the action taken by the drive if no shared signals are received for the t
182. arameters 26 03 Const speed sel2 and 26 04 Const speed sel3 select three sources whose states activate constant speeds as follows by par 26 02 by par 26 03 by par 26 04 Constant speed 7 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 A 09 77 0 1 m l Am C o Diae as indicated by 02 07 DI status bi1 1073807873 oe Bi npt 5 es indicated by 0201 DI status bt2 1073873409 Du Diae input DMA as indicated by 02 07 DI status bii 1073038845 oe Dio npt Di fas indicated by 0207 DI status bitay 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page les o 26 03 Const speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is O Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 2 When bit O of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 26 02 Const speed sel1 and 26 04 Const speed sel3 select three sources that my ON are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 26 02 Const speed sel1 DI2 DI3 DIA DI5 D THR npt Di2 as indicated by 0201 DI status BRA 1073807873 is Bia DR es indicated by 02 07 DI status i2 1073873409 O ou i init 8 as indicated by 0207 DI status BR 1073938945 Bis Dia inpu DE es indicated by 0207 DI status bta 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page mE 26 04 Const speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 26 01 Const speed f
183. are direct on line and switched on and off by the drive via a relay contactor system lt is possible to have one pump permanently connected to the drive or to connect any one of the pumps to the drive using contactors The drive is capable of controlling up to eight parallel pumps By default process reference setpoint is set to 40 but can alternatively be adjusted through e g analog input Al1 The process actual value or feedback signal should be connected to analog input Al2 The start command is given through digital input DI1 Relay outputs are used to control auxiliary pumps S Default settings Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Trad pump control No Name J macro default Application macros 101 S Default control connections for the TRAD macro External power input 24VI 24 V DC 1 6A R Relay output RO1 Start pump 1 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A Relay output RO2 Start pump 2 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A 24 V DC Digital input ground 24 V DC Digital input output ground Ground selection jumper XDI A E a XDIO S Digital input output DIO2 Output Fault 1 g Reference voltage VREF Reference voltage VREF AGND Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al Current Speed reference 1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2
184. ation TR Par continued Reserved uM Remote Ni ieldbus control enabled un Fieldbus control disabled Ramp emi output of Ramp Function Generator to zero The out 0 drive ramps to a stop current and DC voltage limits are NN oe e per hold m Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 0 No action i Ramp in 0 Mila orce input of Ramp Function Generator to zero No action uni Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2 Switch to external control location EXT1 T hn A Activate start inhibit T hn No start inhibit Local ctl fost local control for Control Word Used when the drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local fieldbus Local fieldbus Transfer to fieldbus local control control through Control Word or reference Fieldbus steals the control e Panel or PC tool Transfer to local control 0 Request external control external control i psu tekbus eal oii ome ref Request fieldbus local control 0 No fieldbus local control uu 2 Reserved PR B28 Freely programmable control bits See parameters 29 CW B29 90 08 50 11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter m wem Parameters 123 02 24 FBA main sw Internal Status word of the drive to be sent through the fieldbus adapter interface See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 383 Information 1 Drive is ready to receive start command Drive is not ready Enabled
185. ations on page Pointer 2 14 72 DIO invert mask Inverts status of digital input outputs as reported by 02 03 DIO status 1 Invert DIO1 1 Invert DIO2 1 Invert DIO3 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO4 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO5 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO6 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO7 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIOS on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO9 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension 1 Invert DIO10 on optional FIO 01 I O Extension Bit C CN 15 Analogue outputs Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated through the analog outputs See also section Programmable analog outputs on page 70 Dc voltage 01 07 Dc voltage see page 116 1073742087 Parameters 171 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 15 02 AOT filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1 Unfiltered signal Filtered signal x 1 _ eT filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 172 Parameters 15 05 AO1 src max Defines the real value of the signal selected by parameter 15 01 AO1 src that corresponds to the maximum AO1 output value defined by parameter 15 03 AO7 out max lanos L mA 15 03 15 04 1506 1505 Signal real selected by par 15 01 laos mA
186. atus word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 see page 133 e ne see page 133 ne see page 133 gt ww nm FbEq 1073874178 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 1073939969 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 1073874435 1073939971 1073743373 1073808909 1073874445 1073939714 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 1073939969 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 1073874435 1073939971 No Name Value Supervision1 Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 54 RO5src Trad pump5 Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer D S Q 3 D Cl S o O N Description FbEq Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073743373 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073808909 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay outp
187. automatically decreases the braking torque Overvoltage control disabled Overvoltage control enabled 1 47 02 Undervolt ctrl Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor torque the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back to the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with high inertia Auto identification of supply voltage enabled 47 04 Supply voltage Defines the nominal supply voltage Used if auto identification of the supply voltage is not enabled by parameter 47 03 Sup volt auto ld O 1000 V Nominal supply voltage 10 1V 49 Data storage Data storage parameters reserved for the user These parameters can be written to and read from using other parameters pointer settings Four 16 bit and four 32 bit storage parameters are available 49 01 Data storage1 Data storage parameter 1 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 2147483647 32 bit data 2147483647 50 Fieldbus Settings for configuration of communication via a fieldbus adapter See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 383 50 01 FBA enable Enables communication between the dr
188. be assigned an application licence consisting of an ID and password using the DriveSPC tool Likewise the application program created in DriveSPC can be protected by an ID and password If a protected application program is downloaded to a licensed drive the IDs and passwords of the application and drive must match A protected application cannot be downloaded to an unlicensed drive On the other hand an unprotected application can be downloaded to a licensed drive The ID of the application licence is displayed by DriveStudio in the drive software properties as APPL LICENCE If the value is 0 no licence has been assigned to the drive Program features 59 Notes e he application licence can only be assigned to a complete drive not a stand alone control unit A protected application can only be downloaded to a complete drive not a stand alone control unit 60 Program features Pump control features S PID control There is a built in PID controller in the drive The controller can be used to control process variables such as pressure flow or fluid level In process PID control a process setpoint reference is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference A process actual value feedback is also brought back to the drive The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level setpoint The control program allows switching between
189. bit or 32 bit packed boolean word It is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control word In the embedded fieldbus communication the CW is written to drive parameter 02 36 EFB main cw from where it can be used in the control of the drive The Fieldbus CW is either written to the drive Control word as it is or the data is converted See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 364 The Fieldbus status word SW is a 16 bit or 32 bit packed boolean word It contains status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller In the embedded fieldbus communication the SW is read from drive parameter 02 37 EFB main sw The Drive status word is either written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 364 EN References Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are 16 bit or 32 bit signed integers The contents of each reference word can be used as the speed or process reference In the embedded fieldbus communication the REF 1 and REF2 are written to 02 38 EFB main ref1 and 02 39 EFB main ref2 from where you can use them in the control of the drive The references are either written to the drive references as they are or the values are scaled See section About the EFB communication profiles o
190. bt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl 0 000 1800 000 s Deceleration time 1000 1s Parameters 187 22 06 Shape time acc1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the beginning of the acceleration 0 000 s Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps 0 001 1000 000 s S curve ramp The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between Acceleration Linear ramp Par 22 07 0s Linear ramp Par 22 06 0s S curve ramp Par 22 07 gt 0s S curve ramp LD Par 22 06 gt 0 s Deceleration S curve ramp LU Par 22 08 gt 0s Linear ramp Par 22 08 0s S curve ramp Par 22 09 gt 0s Linear ramp Par 22 09 0s we 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at start of acceleration 1000 1s 22 07 Shape time acc2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of the acceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time accf1 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at end of acceleration 1000 1s 22 08 Shape time dec Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the beginning of the deceleration See parameter 22 06 Shape time acc1 0 000 1800 000 s Ramp shape at start of deceleration 1000 1s 188 Parameters Name Value Description 22 09 Shape time dec2 A ILITETTNUUTIIU T mr the shape of the deceleration ramp at the
191. c and 50 07 FBA act2 tr src select the drive values for fieldbus actual value ACT 1 and ACT2 The table below shows the scaling AAA value Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 integer k x ee 5 32 767 O S value of parameter 58 11 k x a ee ggg 768 k value of parameter 58 11 372 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface E Modbus register addresses for the ABB Drives classic profile The table below shows the Modbus register addresses for the drive data with the ABB Drives classic profile This profile provides a converted 16 bit access to the drive data Note Only the least significant 16 bits of drive 32 bit control and status words can be accessed Register Address Register Data 16 bit 400001 Fieldbus control word CW See section Control word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 3605 400002 Fieldbus reference 1 REF1 400003 Fieldbus reference 2 REF2 400004 Fieldbus status word SW See section Status word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 367 400005 Fieldbus actual value 1 ACT1 400006 Fieldbus actual value 2 ACT2 400007 Fieldbus data in out 1 Drive parameter 58 35 Data l O 1 400030 Fieldbus data in out 24 Drive Parameter 58 58 Data l O 24 400101 409999 Register address 16 bit drive parameter 400000 100 x group index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 03 18 is 400000 100 x 3 18 400318 Drive parameter access
192. c ra lego n da pe ad A LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive LOC amp PAR BACKUP Finishing restore operation EE LOC 0 PARAM ERRORS 1 9401 Ext m se estu iiie e EM TYPE OZ READY x 00 00 F LOC PARAM ERRORS 13 21110 21201 PARAMETER NOT FOUND READY 00 00 The ACQ810 control panel 43 EDTT You can edit parameters by pressing when EDIT LOC t PAR EDIT command is visible Parameter 95 01 CI board Supply is 9501 ctrl boardsupply used as an example External 24V 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT Edit the parameter as shown in section Parameters on page 25 SAVE Press ES to save the new value CANCEL Press CZ to return to the list of erroneous parameters 9501 Ctrl ET ply Internal 24V 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE The parameter value you chose is visible under the LOCU PARAM ERRORS 9 parameter name Press parameters when you have finished editing the U INCORRECT VALUE TYPE 5C READY 00 00 EDIT Trying to restore a user set between different firmware versions If you try to backup and restore a user set between different firmware versions the panel shows you the following alarm information Restore operation starts normally Version check is also OK You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are not the same You can scroll the text with keys A and SY P LOC t PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operatio
193. cannot be reset Application task creation fault Note This fault cannot be reset Application task creation fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Check e selection of the parameter which enables disables EFB communication 58 01 Protocol ena sel EFB connection at terminal XD2D on the JCON board status of the fieldbus master online offline settings of the communication supervision function parameter 58 09 Comm loss action Try to reduce the load For example use a lower fieldbus speed or optimize the application program e g lower time levels If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Try to reduce the load For example use a lower fieldbus speed or optimize the application program e g lower time levels If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Try to reduce the load For example use a lower fieldbus speed or optimize the application program e g lower time levels If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Try to reduce the load For example use a lower fieldbus speed or optimize the application program e g lower time levels If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Reload the application program into the drive If the problem persists co
194. cation macros Factory default macro S Description and typical application This macro is suitable for a pump station consisting of one drive controlling a single pump The system can consist of e g one ACQ810 drive one pump and a sensor The sensor typically measures either flow or pressure and is located at the output of the pump By default process reference setpoint is set to 4096 but can alternatively be adjusted through e g analog input AI 1 The process actual value or feedback signal should be connected to analog input Al2 The start command is given through digital input DI1 The sleep function is activated to optimize the energy efficiency of the installation By default the drive is stopped if the motor speed is below 209 of its nominal speed for longer than 60 seconds S Default settings See chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Application macros 95 S Default control connections for the Factory default macro XPOW 24 V DC 1 6A XRO1 XRO2 Relay output RO1 Ready G 250 V AC 30 V DC P 2A Relay output RO2 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC P 2A 6 XD24 24 V DC 24VD Digital input ground DIGND 24 V DC 24VD Digital input output ground DIOGND Ground selection jumper XD Ololololu zieoziziz On S Go ho gt O OIO O lt lt Tg DIIL XDIO DIO 2 poz 2 XAI VREF AGND Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Al1 Current Spe
195. ceive start command Drive is not ready Enabled 1 External run enable signal is received aud No external run enable signal is received 1 Drive is modulating Drive is not modulating Normal operation is enabled Drive is running and following given reference Normal operation is disabled Drive is not following given reference for example it is modulating during magnetization Emergency OFF2 is active Emergency OFF2 is inactive Emergency stop OFF3 ramp stop is active Emergency stop OFF3 is inactive Start inhibit is active Start inhibit is inactive An alarm is active See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 No alarm is active At setpoint Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value i e the difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within running 1 A L9 LE EE M 1 SE NN E om NN NEG EA the speed window defined by parameter 19 10 Speed window Drive has not reached setpoint continued 128 Parameters Bi Name Value nformati n continued Pym 1 Operation is limited by any of the torque limits 0 Operation is within the torque limits as limit LE speed exceeds limit defined by parameter 19 08 Above speed lim i r speed is within the defined limits omm act External control location EXT2 is active EN control location EXT1 is active LL fb cil ieldbus local control is active Fieldbus local control is inact
196. ck ramp set 2 consists of 75 35 Quick ramp acc2 and 75 36 Quick ramp dec2 For more information on the quick ramp mode see section Quick ramp mode on page 68 EE II o 0 No Quick ramp mode is disabled 1 Yes Quick ramp mode is enabled Set1 Set2 Disable Only quick ramp set 1 is used 1 Enable Both quick ramp set 1 and set 2 are used QR Enable 266 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 Defines the quick ramp set 1 acceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling not to parameter 20 01 Maximum speed If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits 0 000 1800 000 s Quick ramp set 1 acceleration time 1000 1s 75 32 Quick ramp dec1 Defines the quick ramp set 1 deceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling not from parameter 20 01 Maximum speed to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the referenc
197. cted O Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 77 06 Sleep boost step When the drive is entering sleep mode the setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time defined by parameter 77 07 Sleep boost time N Ss Nr gt No auxiliary pumps are started If active sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up See the diagram in section Sleep function starting page 61 0 00 32767 00 Sleep boost step 100 1 77 07 Sleep boost time Sets the boost time for the sleep boost step defined by parameter 77 06 Sleep boost step 0 100 s Sleep boost time 1 1s Parameters 273 No Name Value Description FbEq 77 08 Wake up mode sel Selects the signal that is compared to the wake up level 77 10 Wake up level and the condition that must be true for the drive to wake up If the selected condition does not remain true until the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay expires the delay counter is reset Wake gt ref If the process actual value see group 28 Procact sel remains below the process setpoint see group 29 Setpoint sel multiplied by the wake up level for longer than the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay the drive wakes up See the diagram below Wake up delay 77 11 Process actual value 4 Process setpoint x Wake up level 77 10 100 Wake ref If the process actual value see group 28 Procact sel remains above the process setpoint see group
198. ction is disabled Soft ext When the source selected by parameter 77 05 Sleep ext sel is 0 the sleep function is disabled When the source selected by parameter 77 05 Sleep ext sel is 1 the input of the PID controller is set to 0 After the drive enters sleep mode it will not wake up until the signal returns to 0 77 02 Sleep int sel Selects the internal signal to be monitored by the sleep function when parameter 77 01 Sleep mode sel is set to Internal Int ext or Soft ext 2 3 1 1721s Al2 scaled 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 04 01 Act val see page 129 1073742849 05 05 Flow act see page 131 1073743109 2 2 Parameters Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page d 115 77 03 Sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function when parameter 717 01 Sleep mode sel is set to Internal Int ext or Soft ext 32768 00 Sleep start level 100 1 32768 00 77 04 Sleep delay Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 77 03 Sleep level When the monitored signal falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the signal exceeds the sleep level the counter resets 0 12600 s Sleep start delay 77 05 Sleep ext sel Defines a source that is used by parameter 77 01 Sleep mode sel selections External Int ext and Soft ext See the descriptions of those selections for the usage of this signal source Nouwd Nosotras sele
199. d BET EET FBA refl 2105 Speed share 2109 SpeedRef min abs EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOCU PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel 02 I O values CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT 2101 Speed refl sel P 02 0 0207 AI2 scaled CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC PARAMETERS 2101 Speed TESTS AI2 scaled 2105 Speed share 2109 SpeedRef m n abs EXIT 00 00 EDIT se 28 The ACQ810 control panel How to change the value of bit pointer parameters The bit pointer parameter points to the value of a bit in another signal or can be fixed to O FALSE or 1 TRUE For the latter option see page 30 A bit pointer parameter points to a bit value 0 or 1 of one bit in a 32 bit signal The first bit from the left is bit number 31 and the first bit from the right is bit number 0 i MENU Go to the Main menu by pressing A if you are in the 9C a MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Otherwise press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS LOC U PAR GROUPS 01 on the menu with keys A and S WV 2 and pressing 1 Actual values ENTER 2 7 3 Select the appropriate parameter group with keys LA y m and SY P Here the bit pointer parameter 10 02 Ext1 TH TA y r LO start in is used as an example 11 Start stop mode 12 Operating mode 13 Analogue inputs 14 Digital I O EXIT 00 00 SEL Press lt to select the approp
200. d speed Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Communication between drive and option module FIO xx is lost Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module is lost Let drive cool down Check for excessive ambient temperature Check for cooling fan failure Check for obstructions in the air flow Check the dimensioning and cooling of the cabinet Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Check setting of parameter 95 01 Ctrl boardSupply Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Check external devices for faults Check parameter 30 01 External fault setting Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual and Application guide Safe torque off function for ACSM 1 ACS850 and ACQ810 drives 3AFE68929814 English Check minimum maximum speed settings parameters 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed Check PC tool or control panel connection Check control panel connector Replace control panel in mounting platform Contact your local ABB representative Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 and or Slot 2 Check that option modules or Slot 1 2 connectors are not damaged To determine
201. d state transitions of the drive The State diagram on page 391 presents the most important states including the FBA profile state names The FBA Control Word parameter 02 22 see page 121 commands the transitions between these states and the FBA Status Word parameter 02 24 see page 123 indicates the status of the drive Fieldbus adapter module profile selected by adapter module parameter defines how the control word and status word are transmitted in a system which consists of fieldbus controller fieldbus adapter module and drive With transparent modes control word and status word are transmitted without any conversion between the fieldbus controller and the drive With other profiles e g PROFIdrive for FPBA 01 AC DC drive for FDNA 01 and ABB Drives profile for all fieldbus adapter modules fieldbus adapter module converts the fieldbus specific control word to the FBA communication profile and status word from FBA communication profile to the fieldbus specific status word For descriptions of other profiles see the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module 390 Control through a fieldbus adapter E Fieldbus references References FBA REF are 16 32 bit signed integers A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as torque or speed reference
202. d to change between firmware versions and backups are not always compatible with other firmware versions even if restore is allowed by the backup restore tool Before using the backup restore functions between different firmware versions refer to the release notes of each version Applications should not be transferred between different firmware versions Contact the supplier of the application when it needs to be updated for a new firmware version Parameter restore Parameters are divided into three different groups that can be restored together or individually e Motor configuration parameters and identification ID run results e Fieldbus adapter and encoder settings e Other parameters 90 Program features For example retaining the existing ID run results in the drive will make a new ID run unnecessary Restore of individual parameters can fail for the following reasons e The restored value does not fall within the minimum and maximum limits of the drive parameter The type of the restored parameter is different from that in the drive The restored parameter does not exist in the drive often the case when restoring the parameters of a new firmware version to a drive with an older version e The backup does not contain a value for the drive parameter often the case when restoring the parameters of an old firmware version to a drive with a newer version In these cases the parameter is not restored the backup rest
203. digital and analogue inputs Fieldbus controller Jero Fieldbus Data flow lt a Control word CW qt References Status word SW Actual values 9 Parameter R W requests responses Process I O cyclic oervice messages acyclic Termination Termination M Termination OFF OFF ON JCU Drive 1 JCU Drive 2 JCU Driven Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 357 Connecting the fieldbus to the drive Connect the fieldbus to terminal XD2D on the JCON board of the drive See the appropriate Hardware Manual for more information on the connection chaining and termination of the link XD2D is the connection point for a drive to drive link a daisy chained RS 485 transmission line with one master and multiple slaves 358 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface Set the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the parameters shown in the table below The Setting for fieldbus control column gives either the value to use or the default value The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter or instructs in its use The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time or when parameter 58 10 Refresh settings is activated Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 50 15 FBA cw used P 02 36 Selects the address of the Fi
204. do A6jeuz LO Sp 400 Control block diagrams Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com searchchannels Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field Contact us www abb com drives www abb com drivespartners 3AUA0000055144 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE 2013 11 20 Power and productivity Ah HD Up for a better world F a ED HD
205. drive is running 0 00 10000 00 Nominal power of the motor 100 1 kW kW 99 11 Mot nom cosfii Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor model Not obligatory if set should match the value on the rating plate of the motor Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 00 1 00 Cosphi of the motor 100 1 99 12 Mot nom torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate motor model Not obligatory Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 2147483 647 Nominal motor torque 1000 1 Nem Nm 304 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 99 13 IDrun mode Selects the type of the motor identification performed at the next start of the drive for Direct Torque Control During the identification the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control After the ID run the drive is stopped Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Once the ID run is activated it can be cancelled by stopping the drive If ID run has already been performed once parameter is automatically set to NO If no ID run has been performed yet parameter is automatically set to Standstill In this case the ID run must be performed Notes ID run can only be performed in local control i e when drive is controlled via PC tool or control panel ID run cannot be performed if parameter 99 05
206. e 83 04 Mon tolerance SS 32 He kWh owm ESC mm ua CI omes 83 06 Energy reser eum 16 92 207 owe arn of mm 7 or ee aasan SSCS 94 Ext IO conf Additional parameter data 333 nof name EI O unt A 9501 ct soarasupoy emm 8 Ont rew 8701 Use gvenparams emm 18 Ont gt metes mme emm 5 mn omowe eum 31 LAM omoran enum 19 93 poro 96 1 Motnom cost REAL x Out 99 onome ewm 6 o7 LI 98 16 Phaseinverson Umm Of e 334 Additional parameter data Fault tracing 335 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter lists the alarm warning and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions The alarm fault code is displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as the DriveStudio PC tool An alarm or a fault message indicates abnormal drive status Most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter If not an ABB representative should be contacted In this chapter the alarms and faults are sorted by the four digit code The hexadecimal code in brackets that follows the alarm fault message is for fieldbus communication Safety Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive The must be read befo
207. e If the motor may only be run in the forward direction within a certain range above 0 rpm leave this parameter at 0 rpm and use parameter 27 09 SpeedRef min abs to define the lower boundary of the range Parameters 183 20 03 Pos speed ena Selects the source of the positive speed reference enable command 1 Positive speed reference is enabled 0 Positive speed reference is interpreted as zero speed reference In the figure below 03 03 SpeedRef unramp is set to zero after the positive speed enable signal has cleared The speed reference is set to zero and the motor is stopped along the currently active deceleration ramp 20 03 Pos speed ena i 20 04 Neg speed ena ora a 03 03 SpeedRef unramp Example The motor is rotating in the forward direction To stop the motor the positive speed enable signal is deactivated by a hardware limit switch e g via a digital input If the positive speed enable signal remains deactivated and the negative speed enable signal is active only reverse rotation of the motor is allowed Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 20 04 Neg speed ena Selects the source of the negative speed reference enable command See parameter 20 03 Pos speed ena Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page iid 20 05 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current 20 06 Torq lim sel Defines a source that selects between the two sets of torque l
208. e signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl 0 000 1800 000 s Quick ramp set 1 deceleration time 1000 1s 75 33 QR 1 2 swtch Selects the source for switching from quick ramp set 1 to quick ramp set 2 1 Quick ramp set 1 is active 0 Quick ramp set 2 is active Parameter 75 37 QR NR sw ch overrides this parameter Speed Speed as indicated by 05 48 Ramp status bit 6 The ramp 1074136368 set is changed when the actual speed exceeds the switchover speed defined by 75 34 QR 1 2 swtch spd Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Mid 75 34 QR 1 2 swtch spd When 75 33 QR 1 2 swtch is set to Speed this parameter ME defines the speed at which quick ramp set 1 is changed to quick ramp set 2 The ramp set is changed when the actual speed exceeds this switchover speed 0 0 30000 0 rpm Switchover speed 10 1 rpm Parameters 267 No Name Value Description FbEq 75 35 Quick ramp acc2 Defines the quick ramp set 2 acceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter
209. e OPERATE SW Bit1 1 FAULT SW Bit3 1 OFF1 CW BitO0 0 CW Bit7 1 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111 OFF1 and SW Bit12 1 ES ACTIVE SW Bit1 0 from any state from any state n f 0 1 0 V Emergency Stop Emergency OFF A CW Bit3 1 OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 and BCD SW Bit12 1 OFF3 OFF2 V ACTIVE F SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE F SW Bit4 0 CW Bit4 0 n f 0 Iz0 gt gt CD OPERATION ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 E D RFG OUTPUT ENABLED B e CW Bit6 0 CWzxxxx x1xx xx11 1111 5 RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED C S gu CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 condition rising edge D 370 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface E References for the ABB Drives profiles The ABB Drives profiles support the use of two Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 The references are 16 bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer A negative reference is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference The fieldbus references are scaled before they are written into signals 02 38 EFB main ref1 or 02 39 EFB main ref2 for the use in the drive Parameters 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel define the scaling and possible use of the fieldbus reference REF1 and REF2 as follows e f you select value Speed the fieldbus reference can be used as a speed reference and it is scaled as follows Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 Corresponding speed reference
210. e Terms and abbreviations on page E 44 07 X Ontime2 limit Sets the alarm limit for on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func 0 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on time counter 2 121s 44 08 Ontime2 alm sel Selects the alarm for on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func On time2 Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 Device clean Pre selectable alarm for on time counter 2 DN Presdedaesamrovimecnerz i 236 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 44 09 Edge count1 func Configures rising edge counter 1 This counter is incremented every time the signal selected by parameter 44 10 Edge count1 src switches on unless a divisor value is applied see parameter 44 12 Edge count1 div After the limit set by parameter 44 11 Edge count1 lim is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 13 Edg cnt1 alm sel is given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 11 Counter edge7 Bit 2 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 44 10 Edge count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter
211. e a major revision number xy minor revision numbers z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 904 0x0000 OXFFFF Common program version of adapter module 121 51 33 FBA appl sw ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy minor revision numbers z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 904 0x0000 OXFFFF Application program revision of adapter module 121 52 FBA data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus controller via fieldbus adapter 121 1 2 52 01 FBA data in1 Parameters 52 01 52 12 select data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller Parameters 247 tal 288 Status Word 32 bits 52 12 FBA data in12 See parameter 52 01 FBA data in1 53 FBA data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to drive via fieldbus adapter 53 01 FBA data out1 Parameters 53 01 53 12 select data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive Control Word 16 bits Control Word 32 bits Reference REF2 32 bits 101 9999 Parameter index Example To use the received data as process setpoint set the value to 240 ie parameter 02 40 FBA setpoint Then define P 02 40 as the source in parameter 29 02 or 29 03 using the pointer setting 53 12 FBA data out12 See parameter 53 01 FBA data out1 56 Panel display Selection of
212. e copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press C gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line stops rotating To start the drive in local control press lt gt The arrow amp or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint The ACQ810 control panel 23 E Output mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three signals e change the direction of the motor rotation set the speed or frequency reference e adjust the display contrast e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing CZ repeatedly The top right corner of the display shows the LOC 5 reference value The center can be configured to 49 l 10 Ta show up to three signal values or bar graphs see page 31 for instructions on selecting and modifying 7 the monitored signals DIR 00 00 MENU How to change the direction of the motor rotation If you are not in the Output mode press ESP repeatedly REM 1 30 00rpm until you get there A9 l 10 HZ 0 50 A x DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status OC T 30 00rpom line switch to local control by pressing L The display 4 9 10 briefly shows a message about changing the mode
213. e pue juiod3es o4juoo Ajid sseooJd Control block diagrams 399 Jed WOU ON 66 Jed J0jouu Jasn 76 uleb diis 0 0p suredejod 0 LO aeos wou DOL GZ LO 4 jno nui J9MOg ZZ LO eje no eo pue ejeuns3 se peeds JOJON y L LO d 1emod JOJO CZ LO pep dolo C nb 10 JOJO N 90 LO snes ull biol 20 90 pesn jou bio pL C0 lene xn 4ZL 0 s euBis a eo uonesueduJioo 0 Or 3109 910 epoui Jj JO1O A S0 66 3INIL LSNOO epoui UO 166 lSV4d OLNV euin UBEN 90 20 LL epou uelis L0 LL O1JUO9 eS jueuno J010W GO LO jueJJno JOJO YO LO ebeyo g 70 L 0 043u02 a3Nb 0 199 11 Jeynui anbio L Bulueyeem plels 3219591 SBEHOA VOOr JUSIIND uunuJixe N S0 Oc Jes WI DIOL 90 07 cenbuo UINWIUIAN OL OZ ZONbHIO LUNWIXEW 60702 enbJo uinuulutA g0 0Z Lenbio winwixey 007 ud peeds JOJON LO 10 Jeu JOM JOMOd eDeyo OG ui Bupesauao d El OZ LUI BULOJOW d ZL OC uonesiundo DunjeJq xn 4 Xn JO yoAJepu cO 7v 119 JOAIBAO LO ZY 91 0 424 b101 L 0 GHOA e Jno J f ELSE PHOA enJno 4 N ZL 8 EWOA anno 4 N LL 9 ZHOA BAINI A N 0L 9 JOA eAuno 4 N 608 gba e uno 4 N 80 8 ybeJj anna 4 N 208 cbeJj enuno 4 N 90 8 cbeJj BAIND 4 N GO SE ba anno 4 N v0 9 ounj anno 4 N 0 8 391 xn 4 LOSE 9AJn2 J f un
214. e stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 3 100 1 Start 4 level Defines the start level for pump 4 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 4 100 1 Start 5 level Defines the start level for pump 5 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 5 100 1 Start 6 level Defines the start level for pump 6 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 9 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 6 100 1 Start 7 level Defines the start level for pump 7 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Start level for pump 7 100 1 Start 8 level Defines the start level for pump 8 This is also the stop level for the pump unless Common stop is selected at parameter 79 02 Stopping mode See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00
215. e used in deceleration see parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp Also defines the rpm value that corresponds to 20000 for fieldbus communication with ABB Drives communication profile 0 30000 rpm Acceleration deceleration terminal initial speed 1 1 rpm 19 02 Speed fb sel Selects the speed feedback value used in control Note The speed feedback value is always estimated Estimated A calculated speed estimate is used 19 03 MotorSpeed filt Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter i e time within the actual speed has reached 63 of the nominal speed filtered speed 01 01 Motor speed rpm If the used speed reference remains constant the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with the actual speed filter Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another A very long filter time results in unstable control If there are substantial interferences in the speed measurement the filter time constant should be proportional to the total inertia of the load and motor in this case 10 30 of the mechanical time constant fmech Mnom Thom Ytot 27 60 where Jot total inertia of the load and motor the gear ratio between the load and motor must be taken into account Mnom motor nominal speed Thom motor nominal torque See also parameter 23 07 Speed err Ftime 0 000 10000 000 Ti
216. earranged when the difference between the runtimes of two pumps exceed a limit 78 15 Runtime diff In the new sequence the pump with the lowest runtime will be started first the pump with the highest runtime will be started last e Autochange when stopped All stop The starting sequence is shifted every time the drive in traditional pump control or the master drive in multipump or level control stops All pumps take part in the autochange sequence except in a traditional pump control configuration where a fixed pump is controlled by the drive at all times and the remaining pumps are only turned on off by the drive logic an example is shown starting on page 102 In this case the fixed pump is always started first and the starting sequence of the auxiliary pumps is determined by the autochange function Note The Autochange function works in external control location EXT2 In addition a part of the Autochange logic is used in traditional pump control configuration where the pump controlled by the drive can be changed using contactors an example is shown starting on page 105 If this kind of configuration is used in control location EXT1 and the pump connected to the drive is interlocked the drive logic connects to another pump according to the autochange sequence Settings Parameter group 8 Pump autochange page 274 Diagnostics Parameters 04 29 04 36 pump runtime counters page 130 05 02 Trad pump cmd page 131 05 0
217. ect of the profile selection Profile selection Data conv amp scaling Fieldbus Drive Communication profile selection with parameter 58 06 Control profile are e 0 ABB Classic e 1 ABB Enhanced e 2 DCU 16 bit e 2 DCU 32 bit Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 365 ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile S Control word for the ABB Drives profiles The table below shows the contents of the Fieldbus control word for both ABB Drives profiles The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in which it is used in the drive 02 36 EFB main cw The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles on page 369 OFF1_ Proceed to READY TO OPERATE CONTROL Stop along currently active deceleration ramp Proceed to OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2_ 1 Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL Emergency OFF coast to stop Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED OFF3 1 Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL Emergency stop stop within time defined by drive parameter Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED Note Run enable signal must be active see the drive documentation If the drive i
218. ected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim Defines the alarm limit for the motor thermal protection 2 when parameter 31 05 Mot temp2 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault O N 0 200 C Motor overtemperature alarm limit 1 1 C 31 08 Mot temp2 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 2 when parameter 37 05 Mot temp2 prot is set to Fault 0 200 C Motor overtemperature fault limit 1 1 C 31 09 Mot ambient temp Defines the ambient temperature for the thermal protection mode 60 100 C Ambient temperature 1 1 C 212 Parameters No Name Value Description ERE 31 10 Mot load curve Defines the load curve together with parameters 31 11 Zero speed load and 31 12 Break point When the parameter is set to 10096 the maximum load is equal to the value of parameter 99 06 Mot nom current higher loads heat up the motor The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value The load curve is used by the mot
219. ed in DriveStudio User Manual 3AFE68749026 English or e the fieldbus interface as described in chapters Control through the embedded fieldbus interface and Control through a fieldbus adapter All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive However if an external 24 V DC power supply is used for the drive control unit it is highly recommended to force a save by using parameter 16 07 Param save before powering down the control unit after any parameter changes If necessary the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 16 04 Param restore Note In case only part of the parameters are visible set parameter 16 21 Menu selection to Full E Application programming The functions of the firmware program can be extended with application programming A standard drive delivery does not include an application program Application programs can be built out of function blocks based on the IEC 61131 standard Some drive parameters are used as firmware function block inputs and can therefore be modified also via the application program Note that parameter changes made via the application program override changes made via the DriveStudio PC tool For more information see e Application guide Application programming for ACS850 and ACQ810 drives 3A4UA0000078664 English and e DriveSPC User manual 3AFE68836590 English Application program licensing and protection The drive can
220. ed reference 1 Al1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 Current Process actual value 1 Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper lt A TI TI Analog output AO1 Current Analog output AO2 Speed rpm Drive to drive link Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start Control panel connection Memory unit connection See Pressure sensor connection examples on page 114 96 Application macros External control macro S Description and typical application The external control macro can be used in single pump systems where the process is controlled by other devices than the drive The drive is speed controlled By default the drive receives a speed reference through analog input Al1 The reference can alternatively be received through one of the supported fieldbus adapters S Default settings Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Parameter External control macro default 12 01 Ext1 Ext2 sel 16 20 Macro Read Only Ext ctrl 26 02 Const speed sel1 C FALSE Sleep mode sel Not used Application macros 97 E Default control connections for the External control macro XPOW 24 V DC 1 6A XRO1 XRO2 Relay output RO1 Ready G 250 V AC 30 V DC L cw 2 2A Relay output RO2 Fault 1 pH 2
221. ed within supervision limit T toc CTRL T I External Control Location EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN External Run Enable signal received ENABLE MN No External Run Enable signal received 13 Reserved 14 AS Control Location EXT2 selected 368 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface MAL A A STATE Description 15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module NEM Fieldbus adapter communication OK Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 369 E State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive has either one of the ABB Drives profiles in use and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the embedded Fieldbus control word The upper case texts refer to the states which are used in the tables representing the Fieldbus control and status words See sections Control word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 365 and Status word for the ABB Drives profiles on page 367 ed SWITCH ON i MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ABB Drives communication profile Power ON CW Bit0 0 5 NOT READY TO ABCD SWITCH ON SW BitO 0 CW Control word SW Status word n Speed CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 RF i B LETS nan Generator READY TO f Frequency OPERATION SWITCH ON SW Bit0 1 INHIBITED SW Bit2 0 ti from any state eee CWzxxxx x1xx xxxx x111 inhibited Fault ps READY TO from any stat
222. ee the drawing at parameter 13 04 Al1 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value 1000 1 32 68 000 13 06 AI2 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See parameter 13 01 Al1 filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 13 07 Al2 max Defines the maximum value for analog input Al2 The input type current or voltage is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit see the Hardware Manual of the drive See also parameter 13 31 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Al2 maximum value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 08 AI2 min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al2 The input type current or voltage is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit see the Hardware Manual of the drive 22 000 Al2 minimum value 1000 1 unit 11 000 V Parameters 155 13 09 AI2 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al2 value defined by parameter 13 07 Al2 max Al scaled 32768 000 Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 10 AI2 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al2 value defined by parameter 13 08 A 2 min See the drawing at parameter 13 09 Al2 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value 1000 7 1 32768 000 13 11 AI3 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al3
223. elay is assumed to be set to 0 00 seconds Level process actual value 9 05 Stop level 9 06 Start 1 level 79 07 Start 2 level Frequency Pump 3 Time Frequency Pump 2 79 19 High speed Time Frequency Pump 1 9 19 High speed Time 282 Parameters 79 02 Stopping mode Selects whether the pumps are stopped simultaneously or individually Stable level When the start level of a pump parameters 79 06 Start 1 level 79 13 Start 8 level is reached the master drive waits for the level delay parameter 79 16 Start stop delay to elapse then stops the pump Common stop All the pumps running will continue to run until the stop level parameter 79 05 Stop level is reached All pumps will then be stopped one by one at intervals defined by parameter 9 16 Start stop delay 79 03 Low level Defines the low level for level control In emptying mode when the measured level falls below the low level all pumps stop if not stopped already In filling mode when the measured level falls below the low level all pumps start running at the speed defined by parameter 79 19 High speed See the diagrams at parameter 79 01 Level mode 0 00 32768 00 Low level 100 1 79 04 Low switch Selects a digital source that is used to determine that the liquid level in the container has fallen very low When the source becomes active 1 an alarm LC TANK EMPTY is given The alarm is cleared when the source switches off
224. eldbus control word in use 02 36 EFB main cw 58 01 Protocol ena Modbus RTU Initializes embedded fieldbus communication sel EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION 58 03 Node address 1 default Node address There may not be two nodes with the same node address online 58 04 Baud rate 9600 default Defines the communication speed of the link Use the same setting as in the master station 58 05 Parity 8 none 1 default oelects the parity and stop bit setting Use the same setting as in the master station 58 06 Control profile ABB Enhanced oelects the communication profile used by the default drive See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface on page 362 58 07 Comm losst 600 default Defines the timeout limit for the EFB out communication monitoring 58 08 Comm loss None default Enables disables EFB communication loss mode monitoring and defines the means for resetting the counter of the communication loss delay 58 09 Comm loss None default Defines the drive operation after the EFB action communication loss monitoring awakes 58 10 Refresh Done default Refreshes the settings of parameters settings 58 01 58 09 58 30 Transmit delay O default Defines the delay time which the slave waits until it sends a response 58 31 Ret app errors Yes default Selects whether the drive returns Modbus exception codes or not 58 32 Word order LSW MSW default Defines the order of the data words in the
225. en reads the contents of a contiguous block of holding registers same or different than those written in a server device 0x2B 0x0E Encapsulated Interface Allows reading of identification and other information Transport Read Device of the server Identification Parameter Read Device ID code supports one access type 01 Request to get the basic device identification Returns ABB ACQ810 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 381 Modbus exception codes Table below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface Code Name Deseripti n 0x01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server 0x02 ILLEGAL DATA The data address received in the query is not an ADDRESS allowable address for the server 0x03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query in not an allowable value for the server 0x04 SLAVE DEVICE An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was FAILURE attempting to perform the requested action 0x06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY The server is engaged in processing a long duration program command 382 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface Control through a fieldbus adapter 383 Control through a fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network fieldbus 384 Control through a fieldb
226. end of the pipe 0 00 100 0096 Reference step 1 100 1 29 07 Reference step 2 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when two auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 0096 Reference step 2 100 1 29 08 Reference step 3 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when three auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 0096 Reference step 3 100 1 29 09 Reference step 4 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when four auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 00 Reference step 4 100 1 29 10 Reference step 5 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when five auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 0096 Reference step 5 100 1 Parameters 207 29 11 Reference step 6 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when six auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 00 Reference step 6 100 1 29 12 Reference step 7 Sets a percentage that is added to the process setpoint when seven auxiliary direct on line motors are running See parameter 29 06 Reference step 1 0 00 100 00 Reference step 7 100 1 30 Fault functions Configurati
227. er motor identification ID run e fthe nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive e Ifthe drive is used without a motor connected for example for test purposes In scalar control some standard features are not available Settings Parameter 99 05 Motor ctrl mode page 302 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is scalar When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require a high break away torque In Direct Torque Control DTC no IR compensation is possible or needed Motor voltage IR Compensation 7 No compensation f Hz Settings Parameter 40 07 IR compensation page 233 6 Program features S User definable load curve The drive output can be limited by defining a load curve In practice the user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve even though neither is compulsory Each curve is formed by five points that represent output current or torque as a function of frequency An alarm or fault can be set up to occur when the curve is exceeded The upper boundary overload curve can also be used as a torque or current limiter Load 96 Overload area 34 14 34 15 34 16 34 17 34 13 Allowed operating range 34 11 34 10
228. er factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable Check for an earth fault in motor or motor cables by measuring the insulation resistances of motor and motor cable If no earth fault can be detected contact your local ABB representative A fault is to be autoreset Informative alarm See parameter group 32 Automatic reset The motor configuration parameters are set incorrectly Check the settings of the motor configuration parameters in group 99 The drive is not Check that the drive is sized correctly for dimensioned correctly the motor Motor is operating in stall region because of e g excessive load or insufficient motor power Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Overload or underload limit has been exceeded Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve The load curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined Check the settings of the parameters in group 34 User load curve The U f voltage frequency curve has been incorrectly or inconsistently defined Check the settings of the parameters in group 38 Flux ref Communication between drive and option module FEN xx and or FIO xx is lost Check that option modules are properly connected to Slot 1 or Slot 2 Check that option modules or Slot 1 2 connectors are not damaged To determine whether module or connector is damaged Test each module individually in Slot 1
229. error value is constant and the proportional gain of the speed controller is 1 The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable If parameter value is set to zero the l part of the controller is disabled Anti windup stops the integrator if the controller output is limited See 06 05 Limit word1 The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Gain K 1 A A T Integration time O Tp Derivation time 0 x Kp xe Eie e Kp xe e Error value J V y y Time 0 000 600 000 s Integration time for speed controller 1000 1s 190 Parameters 23 03 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass filter to eliminate disturbances The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Ae K x TR x lt p D T E
230. esentative Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual description of parameter 30 07 page 208 and Application guide Safe torque off function for ACSM1 ACS850 and ACQ810 drives SAFE68929814 English Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 347 Fault fieldbus code 0024 0027 0028 0030 0031 0032 0036 0037 0038 0045 INTBOARD OVERTEMP 0x7182 PU LOST 0x5400 PS COMM 0x5480 EXTERNAL 0x9000 SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A Programmable fault 30 07 Sto diagnostic OVERSPEED 0x7310 PANEL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 Programmable fault 30 03 Panel ctrl loss NVMEM CORRUPTED 0x6320 OPTION COMM LOSS 0x7000 FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 Programmable fault 50 02 Comm loss func Interface board between power unit and control unit temperature has exceeded internal fault limit Connection between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive is lost Communication errors detected between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive Fault in external device This information is configured through one of programmable digital inputs Safe torque off function is active i e safety circuit signal s connected to connector XSTO is lost during start or run or while drive is stopped and parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic is set to Fault Motor is turning faster than highest allowe
231. eset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 44 15 Edge count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 2 See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func Relay output RO1 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 0 1073742338 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Charged Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074333186 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 O Wise 44 16 Edge count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1 See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 2 121 44 17 Edge count2 div Divisor for rising edge counter 2 Determines how many rising edges increment the counter by 1 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 2 121 44 18 Edg cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 2 See parameter 44 14 Edge count2 func Edge count2 Pre selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2 CNN 9 Motor starts Pre selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2 Pre selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2 Dc charge Pre selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2 Output relay Pre selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2 238 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 44 19 Val count1 func Configures va
232. et See parameter 32 01 Autoreset sel 0 0 120 0 s Resetting delay 10 1s 33 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision See also section Signal supervision on page 86 33 01 Superv1 func Selects the mode of supervision 1 Disabled Supervision 1 not in use TI Low When the signal selected by parameter 33 02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33 04 Superv lo bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated High When the signal selected by parameter 33 02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 3 33 02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33 04 Superv 1 lo bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 03 Superv1 hi bit O of 06 13 Superv status is activated Abs High 33 02 Superv1 act Selects the signal to be monitored by supervision 1 See parameter 33 01 Superv1 func Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rom see page 118 1073742081 Speed 01 02 Motor speed see page 116 1073742082 Frequency 01 03 Output frequency see page 116 1073742083 No Name Value Current Current Torque Dc voltage Power inu Power motor SpRef unramp SpRef ramped SpRef used TorqRef used Process act Proc PID out Pointer 33 03 Superv1 hi 32768 00 32768 0
233. et sel Set3 par act User parameter set 3 has been loaded using parameter 512 16 09 User set sel Set4 par act User parameter set 4 has been loaded using parameter 1024 16 09 User set sel 16 11 User lO sel lo When parameter 16 09 User set sel is set to O mode selects the user parameter set together with parameter 16 12 User IO sel hi The status of the source defined by this parameter and parameter 16 12 select the user parameter set as follows 32 64 128 Status of source Status of source defined by par defined by par 16 11 16 12 User parameter set selected Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Poi 115 16 12 User lO sel hi See parameter 16 11 User lO sel lo Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 16 14 Reset ChgParLog Resets the log of latest parameter changes Reset not requested normal operation Reset Reset log of latest parameter changes The value reverts automatically to Done 16 16 Menu set active Shows which parameter list is active Parameter lists determine which parameters are displayed See also parameter 16 21 Menu selection No specific parameter list is active Single short A selective list of parameters relevant to the single pump factory default application macro is displayed Single long A more comprehensive list of parameters relevant to the 2 single pump factory default application macro is displayed Trad short A selective list of par
234. eter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl is taken after the delay set by parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly expires D Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 D5 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 81 15 Outlet ctr dly Delay for primary and secondary supervision of pump outlet pressure See parameter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl 1s 81 16 Outlet force ref Pump speed reference for parameter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl selection Protect 0 0 32767 0rpm Speed reference 1 81 17 Protect dec time PID controller ramp down time for parameter 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl selection Protect 0 18000 s PID controller ramp down time for outlet pressure 1 supervision 81 18 Flow source sel Selects an source for flow measurement for minimum maximum flow protection See parameters 87 79 12 I3 l4 I5 0 1 O 1rpm 1s Flow max prot and 81 21 Flow min prot Al1 scaled 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 Al2 scaled 02 07 Al2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 Parameters 293 Al3 scaled 02 09 Al3 scaled see page 120 1073742345 Al4 scaled 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 1073742347 Al5 scaled 02 13 Al5 scaled see page 120 1073742349 Calculated flow as indicated by 05 05 Flow act see page 1073743109 131 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 81 19 Flow max prot Defines t
235. eters 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel define the reference types speed or torque as follows e f you select value Raw data the fieldbus reference type or possible use is not selected The value is freely usable as a speed or torque reference in the drive The table below clarifies the relation between the fieldbus reference and drive reference no scaling Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 Corresponding reference integer and fractional part in the drive rpm or 32767 65535 32767 65535 32 68 65535 32768 65535 1 If the reference value is used as the speed reference it will be the motor speed in rpm If the reference value is used as the torque reference it will be the motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque e If you select value Speed the fieldbus reference can be used as a speed reference in the drive The table below clarifies the relation between the fieldbus reference and drive reference no scaling Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 Corresponding speed reference integer and fractional part in the drive rpm 32767 65535 32 67 65535 32 68 65535 32768 65535 Actual signals for the DCU 32 bit profile The DCU 32 bit profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2 The fieldbus actual values are 32 bit values consisting of two 16 bit words The MSW Most significant word is the integer part and the LSW Least significant word the fractional part of the 32 bit v
236. eters defined in the application conflict with existing drive parameters Application memory full Corrupted application file Loading of user set is not successfully completed because requested user set does not exist user set is not compatible with drive program drive has been switched off during loading Update the drive firmware If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check that the memory unit contains the correct firmware If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Reload application If fault is still active contact your local ABB representative Reload application If fault is still active contact your local ABB representative Change the template of the application in DriveSPC Check the application for conflicting parameters Reduce application size If fault is still active contact your local ABB representative Reload application If fault is still active contact your local ABB representative Reload 352 Fault tracing Code Fault fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 0311 USERSET SAVE User set is not saved Check the setting of parameter 95 01 Ctrl OxFF69 because of memory boardSupply corru
237. extension module manual Scaled value of analog input AI3 See parameters 13 14 A 3 max scale and 13 15 Al3 min scale Value of analog input Al4 in V or mA For input type information see the extension module manual Scaled value of analog input Al4 See parameters 13 19 Al4 max scale and 13 20 Al4 min scale Value of analog input Al5 in V or mA For input type information see the extension module manual Scaled value of analog input Al5 See parameters 13 24 A15 max scale and 13 25 Al5 min scale Value of analog output AO1 in mA Value of analog output AO2 in mA Value of analog output AO3 in mA Value of analog output AO4 in mA Scaled value of DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input See parameters 14 02 DIO1 conf and 14 57 Freq in max Frequency output value of DIO2 when it is used as a frequency output parameter 14 06 is set to Freq output FbEq 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 1000 1 mA 1000 1 1000 1 Hz Parameters 121 No Name Value Description FbEq 02 22 FBA main cw Internal Control Word of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface See also chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 383 Log Logical combination i e Bit AND OR Selection parameter Par Selection parameter Bt Name Vale Tog
238. f Hz The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during flux braking Therefore flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of flux braking are The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking The cooling of the induction motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during flux braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor Two braking power levels are available Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux braking is disabled The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive heating of the motor Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking energy to motor thermal energy Braking time is shorter compared to moderate braking In cyclic use motor heating may be significant Settings Parameter 40 10 Flux braking page 233 Program features 79 Application control E Application macros See chapter Application macros page 93 E Timers It is possible to define four different daily or weekly time periods The time periods can be used to control four different timers The on off statuses of the four timers are indicated by bits 0 3 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat from where the signal can be connected to a
239. f 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 ne ON lt gt Sa N N N Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 FbEq 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 1073874435 1073939971 1073743373 1073808909 1073874445 1073743106 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 1073939969 1074202113 1074267649 1074398721 1074529793 1073874434 1073939970 1074005506 1074333186 1073743363 1073808899 1073874435 1073939971 1073743373 1073808909 1073874445 Parameters 165 14 43 RO1 Ton Defines the on activation delay for relay output RO1 Drive status lil I 1 0 RO1 status 1 0 E lofi 14 43 RO1 Ton tor 14 44 RO1 Toff 0 0 3000 0 s On activation delay for RO1 Defines the off deactivation delay for relay output RO1 a See parameter 14 43 RO1 Ton Off deactivation delay for RO1 14 45 ROZsc Selos a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO2 Bit 1 of 05
240. f the pump Below is an example of an HQ performance curve The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown H m 80 13 DO 2 esi edes eme aix ione dev es exe Se les eise Q m h 80 12 80 04 0 90 32767 00 Flow rate at point 1 of the HQ curve 100 1 m3 h m h 80 05 HQ curve H1 Head in meters at point 1 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00m Head at point 1 of the HQ curve 100 1m 80 06 HQ curve Q2 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 2 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 2 of the HQ curve 100 1 m3 h m h 286 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 80 07 HQ curve H2 Head in meters at point 2 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 m Head at point 2 of the HQ curve 80 08 HQ curve Q3 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 3 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 3 of the HQ curve 100 1 m h m h 80 09 HO curve H3 Head in meters at point 3 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 m Head at point 3 of the HQ curve 80 10 HQ curve Q4 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 4 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 4 of the HQ curve 100 1 m h m h 80 11 HQ curve H4 Head in meters at point 4 of the HQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 m Head at point 4 of the HQ curve 80 12 HQ curve Q5 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at po
241. fieldbus Control Word or check wiring of selected source Fault tracing 337 Code Alarm fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 2008 2009 2013 2014 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 MOTOR ID RUN OxFF84 08 05 Alarm logger1 b8 EMERGENCY STOP OxF081 08 05 Alarm logger1 b9 DEVICE OVERTEMP 0x4210 08 05 Alarm logger1 b13 INTBOARD OVERTEMP 0x7182 08 05 Alarm logger1 b14 FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 08 06 Alarm logger2 b1 Programmable alarm 50 02 Comm loss func PANEL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 08 06 Alarm logger2 b2 Programmable alarm 30 03 Panel ctrl loss Al SUPERVISION 0x8110 08 06 Alarm logger2 b3 Programmable alarm 13 32 Al superv func FB PAR CONF 0x6320 08 06 Alarm logger2 b4 NO MOTOR DATA 0x6381 08 06 Alarm logger2 b5 Motor identification run is on Motor identification is required Drive has received emergency stop command OFF3 Measured drive temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Interface board between power unit and control unit temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit Cyclical communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module or between PLC and fieldbus adapter module is lost Control panel or PC tool selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating An analog input has reached limit defined by parameter 13 33 Al superv CW The drive does not have a functionality requested by
242. file enhanced version DCU 16 bit profile DCU 32 bit profile II 58 07 Comm loss t out Defines the timeout limit for EFB communication loss monitoring If a communication break exceeds the timeout limit the function proceeds with the action defined with parameter 58 09 Comm loss action See also parameter 58 08 Comm loss mode 0 60000 ms Timeout calculation factor The actual timeout value is calculated as follows Comm loss timeout x 100 ms Example If you set this value to 22 the actual timeout value Will be 22 x 100 ms 2 200 ms 100 1 ms 250 Parameters 58 08 Comm loss mode Enables disables EFB communication loss monitoring and defines which of the Modbus register accesses resets the timeout counter See parameter 58 07 Comm loss t out EFB communication loss monitoring is disabled Any message EFB communication loss monitoring is enabled Any Modbus 1 request resets the timeout counter Ctrl write EFB communication loss monitoring is enabled Writing to 2 control or reference word resets the timeout counter 58 09 Comm loss action Defines the drive operation after the EFB communication loss monitoring awakes See parameters 58 07 Comm loss t out and 58 08 Comm loss mode Drive trips on fault EFB COMM 0x7540 Safe speed Drive generates alarm EFB COMM LOSS 0x7540 and takes the safe speed into use see parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe Last speed Drive generates alarm EFB COMM LOSS 0x
243. fined by parameter 35 06 Proc var1 max 04 06 Process var1 35 03 35 02 Signal selected by 35 01 Signal1 param 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process 1 1 variable 1 value Parameters 22 35 03 Signall min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 07 Proc var min See diagram at parameter 35 02 Signal1 max 32 68 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process 121 variable 1 value 35 04 Proc var1 dispf Scaling for process variable 1 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus 35 05 Proc var1 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04 06 Process var1 process variable 1 A V S W 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 m A V h Wh E r a PM FM gt O OO T 1 1 2 4 T 21 dm3 h 22 alal a al a GO l CO l ODO Ol 22 S AAA 4 HZ h rp kh C loft m m kW kW F hp M m 2 2 ba 2 kP 2 G 2 PS 2 25 0 1 2 3 5 6 222 Parameters 28 MGD 28 30 FPM 30 34 ppm 34 35 pps 35 O O o O l min GW C CO N O1 Gn l Gl O17 Gn 1 aj Gl CTY C1 A CO Ql O N Y GO l N C2 Ke co m3 s h O IN O m3 m IN IN kg s kg m kg h mbar IN oO h O IN K h K h C1 h C1 IN N IN N iN O GPS gal s iN O IN 00 DA 00 gal m iN co PEN N MES
244. frequently Check that there are drives on the drive to drive link that are allowed to become Check the wiring of the drive to drive link Check that at least one drive has signal sharing enabled parameter 76 12 Check the status communication settings and wiring of the drive that is sharing its signals 06xx Faults generated by custom Check custom application program application program 354 Fault tracing Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 355 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network fieldbus using the embedded fieldbus interface 356 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system through a serial communication link using either a fieldbus adapter or the embedded fieldbus interface The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol The drive control program can receive and send cyclic data from and to the Modbus master on 10 ms time level The actual communication speed depends on other factors as well such as the baud rate a parameter setting in the drive The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources for example
245. g of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Hand Auto macro No Name default 10 05 Ext2 start in1 12 05 Ext2 ctrl mode Application macros 99 S Default control connections for the Hand Auto control macro XPOW 24 VDC 1 6A XRO1 XRO2 Relay output RO1 Ready G 250 V AC 30 V DC e 2A Relay output RO2 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V DC a 2A 6 XD24 24 V DC 24VD Digital input ground DIGND 24 V DC 24VD DIOGND Digital input output ground Ground selection jumper XD Ololololu zieoziziz On S Go ho gt O OIO O lt lt Tg DIIL XDIO DIO 2 poz 2 XAI VREF AGND Analog input Al1 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al1 Al1 Current Speed reference 1 Hand Al1 Analog input Al2 Current or voltage selectable by jumper Al2 Al2 Current Speed reference 2 Auto Al2 Al1 current voltage selection jumper Al2 current voltage selection jumper lt A TI TI Analog output AO1 Current Analog output AO2 Speed rpm Drive to drive link Safe torque off Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start Control panel connection Memory unit connection 100 Application macros TRAD Traditional pump control macro S Description and typical application This macro is suitable for a pump station where one pump at a time is directly controlled by the drive and the rest of the pumps
246. ge 355 Log Logical combination i e Bit AND OR Selection parameter Par Selection parameter Name Vale Tog Par Stop o according to the stop mode selected by par 11 03 Stop mode or according to the requested stop mode 10 01 bits 2 6 Note Simultaneous stop and start 10 04 commands result in a stop command 0 Noaction 2 action Start Iz Note Simultaneous stop and start commands 10 01 result in a stop command lee 0 No action No action action StpMode 1 Emergency OFF2 bit O must be 1 Drive is stopped by em off cutting off motor power supply the motor coasts to stop The drive will restart only with the next rising AND E of the start signal when the run enable signal is oon DE E stop OFF3 bit O must be 1 Stop within EN defined by 22 12 E stop time AND 10 13 No action StpMode 1 Emergency stop OFF1 bit O must be 1 Stop along the off 1 currently active ei ramp AND 10 15 0 j Noacio 2 2 action me 1 Stop ITI I I n I NM the currently active deceleration ramp 11 03 m Cp eon see m StpMode Coast to sto a p 11 03 coas 0 No action En run enable AND 10 11 Reset O gt 1 It t if tive fault t ese or ault reset if an active fault exists T other No action continued If all stop mode bits 2 6 are 0 stop mode is selected by parameter 11 03 Stop mode Coast stop bit 6 overrides the emergency stop bits 2 3 4 Eme
247. h the drive running 1 Normal operation e 0 Stop by ramping The deceleration time is defined by parameter 22 12 Em stop time The drive can be restarted by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start signal from O to 1 With the drive stopped e 1 Starting allowed e 0 Starting not allowed 11 Start stop mode Start and stop modes magnetization settings DC hold configuration 11 01 Start mode Selects the motor start function Notes e Selections Fast and Const time are ignored if parameter 99 05 is set to Scalar e Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetizing is selected Fast or Const time Fast The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start The pre magnetizing time is determined automatically being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size This mode should be selected if a high break away torque is required Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Parameters 151 No Name Value Description FbEq Const time The drive pre magnetizes the motor before start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 11 02 Dc magn time This mode should be selected if constant pre magnetizing time is required e g if the motor start must be synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake This setting also guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetizing time is set long enough WARNING The drive will start
248. he drives are compatible Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive using the RESTORE PARS ALL command This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does NOT include the user sets of parameters Note Use this function only to restore the parameters from a backup or to restore parameters to systems that are compatible e Restore all parameters except motor data to the drive with RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN Restore only motor data parameters to the drive with RESTORE PARS IDRUN Restore all user sets to the drive with RESTORE ALL USER SETS Restore only user set 1 4 to the drive with RESTORE USER SET 1 RESTORE USER SET 4 How to backup and restore parameters For all backup and restore functions available see page 39 Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the LOC T MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Otherwise press wa repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu AS S I STANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 40 The ACQ810 control panel Go to the Parameter Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys A and lt _W_ and pressing Ew To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL on the Par Backup with keys C and S V 7 and press Operation starts ABORT Press ES if you want to stop the operat
249. he action to be taken if the flow signal selected by parameter 81 18 Flow source sel remains above the limit set by parameter 81 20 Flow max level for longer than the time set by parameter 81 23 Flow ctrl delay Not sel Maximum flow protection disabled The drive generates alarm MAX FLOW The drive trips on fault MAX FLOW 2 81 20 Flow max level Defines the maximum flow limit See parameter 81 19 Flow max prot 0 00 32767 00 Maximum flow m h 81 21 Flow min prot Defines the action to be taken if the flow signal selected by parameter 81 18 Flow source sel remains below the limit set by parameter 81 22 Flow min level for longer than the time set by parameter 81 23 Flow ctrl delay See also parameter 81 24 Flow check delay 1 100 1 m h Not sel Minimum flow protection disabled The drive generates alarm MIN FLOW 1 The drive trips on fault MIN FLOW 2 81 22 Flow min level Defines the minimum flow limit See parameter 81 21 Flow min prot 0 00 32767 00 Minimum flow 100 1 m h 3 m h 81 23 Flow ctrl delay opecifies a delay for minimum maximum flow protection See parameters 81 19 Flow max prot and 81 21 Flow min prot 0 12600 s Delay for minimum maximum flow protection 1271s 81 24 Flow check delay After starting the drive defines a period during which the minimum flow protection is disabled so that normal flow can be reached 0 12600 s Start delay for minimum flow protection 1 1s 81 25 Appl p
250. he application has several pumps Trad ctrl Traditional pump control mode One pump at a time is controlled by the drive The remaining pumps are direct on line pumps that are started and stopped by the drive logic Reg bypass PID controller bypass mode The signal selected by parameters 28 01 28 04 is used as the reference The automatic starting and stopping of direct on line pumps is related to this actual value instead of the output of the PID controller This setting can be used in applications with a low number of sensors and low accuracy requirements Example The capacity of the pumping station outlet flow follows the measured inlet flow Measured inlet flow Reference for the pumping station ro mo mo m m m m m m m m m mom m mm m m m m Outlet a Inlet pipe 1 O pipe i I I I Outlet 7 P2 pipe 2 tank g A Outlet N P3 Drive P1 pipe 3 Po Contac Lo iis tors P3 3 phase supply 3 Parameters 257 No Name Value Description In the diagram below the slopes of the lines describe the relation between the control signal selected by parameters 28 01 28 04 and the speed of the controlled pump in a three motor system At full control signal level all pumps are operating at maximum speed Speed rpm Max speed Start speed 2 Start speed 1 No aux mo 2 aux mo tors ON tors ON Stop speed 2 Stop speed 1 Min speed
251. he required parameters in group 99 have been set 338 Fault tracing Code Alarm fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 2035 2036 2037 2039 2040 2041 2043 2044 2045 2046 2048 PS COMM 0x5480 08 07 Alarm logger3 b3 RESTORE 0x6300 08 07 Alarm logger3 b4 CUR MEAS CALIBRATION 0x2280 08 07 Alarm logger3 b5 EARTH FAULT 0x2330 08 07 Alarm logger3 b Programmable alarm 30 05 Earth fault AUTORESET 0x6080 08 07 Alarm logger3 b8 MOTOR NOM VALUE 0x6383 08 07 Alarm logger3 b9 STALL 0x7121 08 07 Alarm logger3 b11 Programmable alarm 30 09 Stall function LOAD CURVE 0x2312 08 07 Alarm logger3 b12 Programmable alarm 34 01 Overload func 34 02 Underload func LOAD CURVE PAR 0x6320 08 07 Alarm logger3 b13 U f curve par 0x6320 08 07 Alarm logger3 b14 OPTION COMM LOSS 0x7000 08 08 Alarm logger4 bO Check the connections between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit Communication errors detected between the JCU Control Unit and the power unit of the drive Restoration of backed up parameters failed Repeat the restore procedure Use another back up file if possible If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Current measurement Informative alarm calibration will occur at next start Drive has detected load unbalance typically due to earth fault in motor or motor cable Check there are no pow
252. he speed controller 4 Program features e 23 02 Integration time integration time of the speed controller 01 31 Mech time const mechanical time constant of the machinery The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1 20 A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B D Overcompensated speed controller The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration compensation Proportional integral Speed reference reference Derivative Actual speed Program features 75 Settings Parameter group 23 Speed ctrl page 186 Diagnostics Parameters 01 01 Motor speed rpm page 118 01 02 Motor speed page 118 and 01 14 Motor speed est page 116 E Scalar motor control It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of Direct Torque Control DTC In scalar control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference However the outstanding performance of DTC is not achieved in scalar control It is recommended to activate the scalar motor control mode in the following situations s n multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed aft
253. hed its preset limit 1 Ontime2 1 On time counter 2 has reached its preset limit 2 Edge 1 Rising edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit 3 Edge2 1 Rising edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit 4 Valuel 1 Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit 5 Vaue2 1 Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit Parameters 137 Bit inverted sw Shows the inverted values of the bits selected by parameters 93 14 94 2 nverted bitO See parameter 33 17 BitO invert src Inverted bit1 See parameter 33 18 Bit invert src Inverted bit2 See parameter 33 19 Bit2 invert src S 3 Inverted bit3 ee parameter 33 20 Bit3 invert src 4 Inverted bit4 See parameter 33 21 Bit4 invert src 5 Inverted bit5 See parameter 33 22 Bit5 invert src 06 20 Pump status word Pump status word Bit Name Information 0 Wed i racional pump control mode activ Multipump functionality via drive to drive link active 6 Pre ing T Sof pipet funcion aave Cleaning 1 _ Gleaning sequence acive 8 JmawerDmm Resemd i mode parameter 72 05 Ext2 ctrl mode 19 31 Reserved 138 Parameters 06 21 Level status Level control status word Name Value information ow level 1 ow level 1 reached L L L L tart evel S Start level 5 1 Start level 5 reached S tart level 6 1 Start level 6 reached Start level 7 1
254. hgParLog to Reset 12 09 2008 15 09 33 9402 Ext IO2 sel 9401 Ext IO1 sel EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control locations 53 Control locations What this chapter contains This chapter describes the control locations of the drive 54 Control locations Local control vs external control The drive has two main control locations external and local The control location is selected with the LOC REM key on the control panel or with the PC tool Take Release button
255. hreshold level after which normal process PID control is resumed A timeout for the whole pipefill phase can also be defined The following drawing illustrates the operation of the pipefill function Actual value 81 32 Pid enable dev 81 30 Req act change momo gt 81 33 Pid enb dev dly 81 30 Red act iy Speed reference rom 81 31 Act change delay 81 29 81 29 81 29 Pipefill T step 27 32 Pipefill ref acc Pipefill PID control Note The pipefill function works only in external control location EXT2 Settings Parameters 27 32 Pipefill ref acc page 202 and 27 33 Pipefill ref dec page 202 parameter group 81 Pump protection page 288 64 Program features Diagnostics Parameters 06 20 Pump status word page 137 08 20 Pump fault word page 143 and 08 21 Pump alarm word page 143 E Autochange The Autochange function can be used to equalize duty time between multiple pumps by varying the sequence in which pumps are started as the required pumping capacity increases There are three autochange modes selectable by parameter 78 07 Autochg style e Fixed intervals Fixed The starting sequence is shifted periodically at pre defined intervals parameter 78 05 Autochg interval In traditional pump control the pump speed must also be below the level defined by parameter 78 04 Autochg level e Runtime equalization Hourcount The starting sequence is r
256. iN CO gal h ft3 s ft3 m ft3 h Ib s Ib m Ib h FP on gl G l O1 C da gt N O oOo gt NO al O o dl dl N O o N O O O1 CO inH20 inwg 00 C1 co al 9 O gt O Ibsi 6 O N 3 O O ER O O Q O 3 4 65 Mrev days inWC mpmin O C1 O N O N week Parameters 223 No Name Value Description FbEq tonne m s 2 rev NI N NI y o N 12 T 74 N O inch N n m s 3 kg m 2 kg m 3 m 3 blank O N N al co CO O O O O 00 00 CO CO NI N N A NO NO N N 6 N N NI N o C o 00 D c s 3 c3 gt u min Co 83 84 blank 83 84 u s 2 min 2 u h 2 blank Vrms bits Co O1 CO N 88 89 88 89 co k CLO l O Z CAO O 1 s CO 3 al mOhm co E n N C W Maximum value for process variable 1 See diagram at parameter 35 02 Signal1 max 35 06 Proc var1 max 32768 32768 35 07 Proc var1 min m II Maximum value for process variable 1 Minimum value for process variable 1 See diagram at parameter 35 02 Signal max 32768 32768 35 08 Signal2 param Minimum value for process variable 1 Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 07 Process vara Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 118 1073742081 Speed 01 02 Motor speed see page 778 1073742082 Frequency 01 03 Output f
257. ient temperature exceeds 30 C It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature is detected Note The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the inverter Temperature measurement It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor temperature sensor between 24 V and digital input DI5 on the drive Constant current is fed through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases as the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature 7 as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage and converts it into ohms The limit for overtemperature detection is 2 5 kohm 84 Program features The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Ohm 4000 1330 Temperature PTC resistance 100 a It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the drive reacts when overtemperature Is detected For further information on the wiring refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive Settings Parameter group 31 Motor therm prot page 209 Diagnostics Parameters 01 17 Motor temp1 page 118 and 01 18 Motor temp2 page 116 E Programmable protection functions Start interlock parameter 70 20 The parameter selects how
258. ignal s connected to connector XSTO is lost Error in changing Safe torque off supervision i e parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Alarm Estimated motor temperature based on motor thermal model has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 37 03 Mot temp1 almLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded alarm limit defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Drive has received emergency OFF2 command No Run enable signal is received Check safety circuit connections For more information see appropriate drive hardware manual description of parameter 30 07 page 208 and Application guide Safe torque off function for ACSM1 ACS850 and ACQ810 drives 3AFE68929814 English Contact your local ABB representative Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit To restart drive activate Run enable signal source selected by parameter 10 11 Run enable and start drive Check setting of parameter 10 11 Run enable Switch signal on e g in the
259. ignal2 max 32 68 32 68 Maximum value for process variable 2 1 1 35 14 Proc var2 min Minimum value for process variable 2 See diagram at parameter 35 09 Signal2 max 32 68 32 68 Minimum value for process variable 2 1 1 35 15 Signal3 param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04 08 Process vara Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 35 16 Signal3 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35 20 Proc var3 max 04 08 Process var3 35 17 35 16 Signal selected by 35 15 Signal3 param 32 68 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process 121 variable 3 value 226 Parameters 35 17 Signal3 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 21 Proc var3 min See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 32768 32 68 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process 1 1 variable 3 value 35 18 Proc var3 dispf Scaling for process variable 3 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus 35 19 Proc var3 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04 08 Process var3 process variable 3 0 98 See parameter 35 05 Proc var1 unit 35 20 Proc var3 max Maximum value for process variable 3 See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 32768 32768 Maximum value for process variable 3 1 35 21 Proc var3 m
260. iioss ewm 1 0 8 a 5004 Morppase loss ewm 1 Ot a 3005 earn aut ewm 8 9 2 a EIT ewm 1 944 Fat Bor Sedemosc emm 18 tA a 3008 Worm ewm 8 Out P Bom Sando ER AC o Iaa REA 9 188 Mom Somali REL e onoo te f oe 31 Motor therm prot 3101 Mottonpt prot enum 16 Br Weremiss onm 18 EN NN NN O N Estimated 110 bo Mamen W62 76 5 99 6 mv sepe AC ICI m madre O o oo oO Estimated 32 Automatic reset 32 01 Autoreset sel Pb 16 0b000000 0b111111 MEN 0b000000 Additional parameter data 321 Data Default Factory 32 04 Delay time UINT32 16 0 120 S 0 0 s 33 Supervision EHET emm Od gt Pme 33 02 Superv1 act Val pointer 32 a Speed rom 33 03 Superv1 hi REAL 2 32768 32768 9 2 9m 33 10 Supend sol TR asr 2 e 33 77 Suenam REAL x2 3me sB 9 3272 Supenaio Ren s 32me ame 09 Bem mOmwers mtpomer 32 33 78 Ber inven Taner 32 P msm mzmerss woe 2 a sam BGmwets Bome 32 P4 Be mamerss wom 2 5 3322 es imventsro errome 32 ROT 34 User load curve 3401 Overoadiune Po 16 000000 001111 ooo 3402 undericadio Pe 16 00000 00 O90 1 3 1 322
261. ime Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw or 02 36 EFB main cw O OFF1 active Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7 Parameters 149 No Name Value Description FbEq 10 17 Start enable Selects the source for the Start enable signal 1 Start enable If the signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if running Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Note The functionality of the Start enable signal is different from the Run enable signal Example External damper control application using Start enable and Run enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop commands group 10 Start enable signal 10 17 a Started 06 01 Status word 1 bit 2 Damper open Damper closed Damper status opening ime Damper ES closing time time Run enable signal from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened 10 11 Motor speed Acceleration Deceleration time 22 02 time 22 03 DI1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 DI2 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 DI3 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02
262. ime defined by parameter 76 16 Share lost delay This parameter is only effective if parameter 76 11 Shared IO enable is set to Yes The drive generates an alarm MF NO SHARED DATA The drive trips on a fault MF NO SHARED DATA Const speed The drive continues running and adopts the speed defined by parameter 26 08 Const speed3 Last speed The drive continues running at the last valid reference received from the master 76 16 Share lost delay Delay for a shared signal loss situation See parameter 76 15 Share lost actn 0 3600 s Delay for shared signal loss 77 Pump sleep Sleep function settings See also section Sleep function on page 61 77 01 Sleep mode sel Enables disables the sleep function Sleep function disabled Internal The signal selected by parameter 77 02 Sleep int sel is compared to the value of 77 03 Sleep level If the signal remains below this value longer than the sleep delay 77 04 Sleep delay the drive shifts to sleep mode The sleep and wake up delays 77 04 Sleep delay and 77 11 Wake up delay are in force External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by parameter 77 05 Sleep ext sel The sleep delay 77 04 Sleep delay is not in force but the wake up delay 77 11 Wake up delay is Int ext When the source selected by parameter 77 05 Sleep ext sel is 1 the sleep function works as with the setting nternal When the source selected by parameter 77 05 Sleep ext sel is 0 the sleep fun
263. imits defined by parameters 20 07 20 10 0 The torque limits defined by parameters 20 07 Maximum torque1 and 20 08 Minimum torque are in force 1 The torque limits defined by parameters 20 09 Maximum torque2 and 20 10 Minimum torque2 are in force Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page i 20 07 Maximum torque Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torg lim sel 0 0 1600 0 Maximum torque 1 10 1 20 08 Minimum torque Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torg lim Sel Note Setting this parameter to 0 is not recommended Set it lower for better performance 1600 0 0 0 Minimum torque 1 10 1 184 Parameters No Name Value 20 09 Maximum torque2 Al1 scaled Al2 scaled FBA reri FBA ref2 Max torque Pointer 20 10 Minimum torque2 Al1 scaled Al2 scaled FBA reri FBA ref2 Neg max torq Min torque Pointer 20 12 P motoring lim 0 0 1600 0 20 13 P generating lim 0 0 1600 0 21 Speed ref 21 01 Speed ref1 sel Zero Al1 scaled Al2 scaled Freq in FBA ref1 FBA ref2 Panel EFB ref1 EFB ref2 Pointer 21 02 Speed ref2 sel Zero Al1 scaled Defines the source of maximum torque limit 2 for the drive in percent of the motor nominal torque See parameter 20 06 Torq lim sel Value pointer setting see
264. in Minimum value for process variable 3 See diagram at parameter 35 16 Signal3 max 32768 32768 Minimum value for process variable 3 1 1 1 1 1 36 Timed functions Configuration of timers See also section Timers on page 79 36 01 Timers enable Enable disable control for timers Whenever the source selected by this parameter is off timers are disabled when the source is on timers are enabled Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DIA as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 15 Pointer e Parameters 227 36 02 Timers mode Specifies whether the time periods defined by parameters 36 03 Start time1 36 18 Stop day4 are valid daily or weekly Timer1 mode 0 Daily 1 Weekly Timer2 mode 1 O Daily 1 Weekly 3 Timer3 mode O Daily 1 Weekly Timer4 mode O Daily 1 Weekly 36 03 Start time Defines the start time for time period 1 MEME 00 00 00 Start time for time period 1 1721s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 36 04 Stop time Defines the stop time for time period 1 MEME 00 00 00 Stop time for time period 1 1721s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400
265. in use 0 Parameters 277 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Q Co DI4 78 08 Interlock pump 3 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 3 Pointer When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started U 2 DI2 DI3 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 DI4 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 DI5 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 78 09 Interlock pump 4 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 4 When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 U U U U O Al ol N al gt Pointer 78 10 Interlock pump 5 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 5 When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started DI4 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 DI5 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 J O a J nal ms l on Ooo 2 8 Parameters Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer 120 78 11 Interlock pump 6 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 6 When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use
266. ing o ooooroo rs 86 seules m TPLTT P m 86 Maintenance counters llle eser 87 OAC ANAZO 5 299 29 9 9 899 9c ee dorada as 88 Table of contents 7 Miscellaneous sx curas aa a a ad as a 89 Backup and restore of drive contents 0 0 ce ee ee eee 89 Data storage parameters eee eee 90 Drive to drive linK cle RR RR RR RR RR ee 91 5 Application macros What this chapter contains rns General eo ou on eRe eee ee ooo ose ee Gee baa Bea ae ee de eae es bs Factory default Macro auualda uude sa rn Dress ue d ES REESE DEG EU RR a outs eves Description and typical application nanana aeaa ee ee Default settings 0 0 eee eee teens Default control connections for the Factory default macro Lus External control MaCTO a a R 0 ra XC ox 3k RW a os Wa R aa a ow Wan ww Wa Description and typical application nanana aaa ee ee Default settings 244282446 bac Rs pya ag asad da e o audes ses Default control connections for the External control macro o Hand Auto control macro Description and typical application 0 0 0 ce eee Defaull SetlingS aeg epe qu eaeehudeepeeeses crecer SU E dius Default control connections for the Hand Auto control macro TRAD Traditional pump control macro eee Description and typical application llle Default Seuls ace qa eere der E
267. ing see Terms and abbreviations on page 44 03 Ontime1 limit Sets the alarm limit for on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func 0 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on time counter 1 44 04 Ontime1 alm sel Selects the alarm for on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func Parameters 235 No Name Value Description FbEq 44 05 Ontime2 func Configures on time counter 2 This counter runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 44 06 Ontime2 src is on After the limit set by parameter 44 07 Ontime2 limit is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 08 Ontime2 alm sel is given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 10 Counter ontime2 Bit 1 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 44 06 Ontime2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on time counter 2 See parameter 44 05 Ontime2 func Relay output RO1 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 0 1073742338 Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Charged Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074333186 Bit pointer setting se
268. inputs 0 0 0 cc ee eens 70 Programmable analog outputs llli 70 Programmable digital inputs and outputs n n on 70 Programmable I O extensions n 11 Programmable relay outputs o o o o oooooooror ree 11 FICIQDUS CONVOI uus uae nme qr EGGS NAR GUERRA as Reg Rd EE E 11 MOtOFCONITOLN 2uecucecegseaeesteees see ue ee eee bas S ddm E aa 73 Constant speedS sesos ves eras yr he Ree e Dios e D meee ded iur eed Hee iol pe 73 Critical speeds 2 0 ee ee eens 73 Speed controller tuning xd choanbadeusadessedesedgedsceausiagiuaed 73 Scalar Motor CONITOL iu 2s presse ee Se esa a ra IM aS eS Sag cs we PURSE x 15 User definable load curve rr 76 User definable U f curve lille 17 FIUXIDIAKING serere ps ds aaa y eo e ee 78 Application control rrr 79 Application macros aaea a 79 AMES Sosa sua E ee eed Bee eee apre SG UR ERE PESE S E SEE 79 DC voltage Control 81 Overvoltage control nananana aaa aa 81 Undervoltage CONTO vigeancadacead asuguga pineda sr UA Ena sue 81 Voltage control and trip limits naana llli 82 Safety and protections a nn naana aaea 83 PIMCIGGCNCY ClOD EEE 445 EE IS 83 Thermal motor protection 0 0 0 0 s 83 Programmable protection functions 0 0 ee ens 84 Automatic fault reset 2 5 ceeveees oo deu eaGewee ea sed 4 mi5g mE ee ehedsueas de 85 DANO AA 86 Energy savings calculator illii 86 Energy consumption monitor
269. int 5 of the HQ performance curve E 32767 00 Flow rate at point 5 of the HQ curve 100 1 m h m h 80 13 HQ curve H5 0 00 32767 00 m Head at point 5 of the HQ curve 80 14 PQ curve P1 Power input in kilowatts of pump at point 1 on the PQ performance curve Parameters 80 14 80 23 define the PQ performance curve of the pump for the flow calculation function The P power input and Q flow rate coordinates of five points on the curve are entered The values are provided by the pump manufacturer All points defined should lie within the practical operating range of the pump Below is an example of an PQ performance curve The defining parameters of the first and last points are shown 10021m 10021m 10021m Head in meters at point 5 of the HQ performance curve 10021m P kW HU QU di uui o ne sound ER E ux sensus ne PU ata ed gue Ro pi ird ue 80 14 Q m h 80 15 80 23 0 00 32767 00 Power input of pump at point 1 100 1 kW kW Parameters 287 80 15 PQ curve Q1 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 1 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow rate at point 1 of the PQ curve 100 1 m h m h 80 16 PQ curve P2 Power input in kilowatts of pump at point 2 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Power input of pump at point 2 100 1 kW kW 80 17 PQ curve Q2 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 2 on the PQ performance curve 0 00 32767 00 Flow
270. integer in the drive rpm 20 000 value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 20 000 value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling e If you select value Raw data the fieldbus reference is scaled as shown in the table below Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 Corresponding reference integer in the drive rpm 32 767 k x 0 5 k value of parameter 58 11 k x 0 5 k value of parameter 58 11 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 371 S Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles Both the ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile support the use of two fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2 The actual values are 16 bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer A negative value is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive value The drive signals are scaled before written into fieldbus actual values ACT1 and ACT2 Parameters 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel and 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel both select the drive actual signals and define the scaling as follows e If you select value Speed the drive actual signal 01 01 Motor speed rpm is scaled and written to the fieldbus actual value The scaling is as follows Value of 01 01 Motor speed rpm rpm Corresponding fieldbus actual value ACT1 or ACT2 integer value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 20 000 value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 20 000 e If you select value Raw data the drive parameters 50 06 FBA act1 tr sr
271. ion After the backup is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press E wn to return to the Par Backup To perform restore functions select the appropriate operation here RESTORE PARS ALL is used as an example on the Par Backup with keys A and SIA Press A Restoring starts A version check is made Scroll the text with keys CAN and CONT CANCEL If you want to continue press Press if you want to stop the operation If the downloading Is continued the display shows a message about it LOC PAR BACKUP 1 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL LOCU PAR BACKUP Copying file 1 2 ABORT 00 00 LOC amp MESSAGE Parameter upload successful OK 1 00 00 LOC PAR BACKUP 3 MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL SHOW BACKUP INFO RESTORE PARS ALL RESTORE PARS NO IDRUN RESTORE PARS IDRUN EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC t PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 LOC B VERSION CHECK 1 FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ 200F 0 UTFQ 200C 0 OK PRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL 00 00 CONT LOCU PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 The ACQ810 control panel 41 Downloading continues drive is being restarted LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion LOC amp PAR BACKUP Restoring downloading
272. ion 3 The transition point between the curves is set by parameter 80 24 HQ PQ brk point 80 02 Pump inlet sel Selects the analog input or other signal source used for pump inlet pressure measurement No input selected no pressure sensor available Al1 scaled 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 Al2 scaled 02 07 Al2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 Al3 scaled 02 09 Al3 scaled see page 120 1073742345 Al4 scaled 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 1073742347 Ald scaled 02 13 Al5 scaled see page 120 1073742349 zi II o Parameters 285 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page A 115 Selects the analog input or other signal source used for I pump outlet pressure measurement em No input selected no pressure sensor avalable 0 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 02 07 Al2 scaled see page 120 02 09 AI3 scaled see page 120 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 02 13 AI5 scaled see page 120 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page EE 115 80 04 HQ curve Q1 Flow rate in cubic meters per hour at point 1 of the HQ performance curve Parameters 80 04 80 13 define the HQ performance curve of the pump for the flow calculation function The H head or level and Q flow rate coordinates of five points on the curve are entered The values are provided by the pump manufacturer All points defined should lie within the practical operating range o
273. ions Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can usually only be monitored but not adjusted some counters can however be reset by entering a 0 Bit pointer Bit pointer A bit pointer can point to a single bit in the value of another parameter or be fixed to O C FALSE or 1 C TRUE Enumerated list i e selection list FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication INT32 32 bit integer value 31 bits sign LN Packed boolean REAL 16 bit value 16 bit value 31 bits sign YA Y YA integer value fractional value REAL24 8 bit value 24 bit value 31 bits sign AGA M integer value fractional value 308 Additional parameter data Data type See enum INT32 Bit pointer Val pointer Pb REAL REAL24 UINT32 UINT32 32 bit unsigned integer value Val pointer Value pointer Points to the value of another parameter Fieldbus addresses Refer to the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication Value and bit pointer parameters are transferred between the fieldbus adapter and drive as 32 bit integer values E 32 bit integer value pointers When a value pointer parameter is connected to the value of another parameter the format is as follows Description Value pointer is Group of source Index of source connected to parameter parameter parameter For example the va
274. ious The current energy monitoring period parameter 05 20 kWh 2 current read is compared to the previous period 05 21 kWh prev read Average The current energy monitoring period parameter 05 20 kWh current read is compared to the average of the two previous periods 05 21 kWh prev read and 05 22 kWh posprev read 83 02 Mon period Defines the length of an energy monitoring period The first period starts when the drive is powered up 0 00 35791394 11 Length of monitoring period 1271 min h 83 03 kWh limit Consumed energy limit for parameter 83 01 Energy mon mode selection Limits 0 2147483647 Energy limit 121kWh kWh 83 04 Mon tolerance Tolerance for energy limit The energy consumption may exceed the reference energy by this tolerance value until the action defined by parameter 83 05 Energy mon ctrl is taken 0 2147483647 Tolerance 121kWh kWh 83 05 Energy mon ctrl Defines the action that is taken if the energy consumption exceeds the tolerance limits The drive generates alarm ENERGY LIMIT 1 83 06 Energy reset Resets the energy monitoring counters S l N No reset The parameter automatically reverts to this value after a reset Period Resets the periodic energy counters parameters 1 05 20 05 22 Month Resets the monthly energy counters parameters 05 23 05 35 83 07 Date alarm ctrl Defines the action that is taken if the date has not been set Alarm The drive generates alarm DATE WRONG 1
275. ip limits The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative either to a supply voltage value provided by the user or to an automatically determined supply voltage The actual voltage used is shown by parameter 07 79 Used supply volt The DC voltage Upc equals 1 35 times this value Automatic identification of the supply voltage is performed every time the drive is powered on Automatic identification can be disabled by parameter 47 03 Sup volt auto Id the user can then define the voltage manually at parameter 47 04 Supply voltage A Overvoltage fault level Upc high 70 V 880 V max D Overvoltage control level 1 25 x Upc 810 V max 01 07 Dc voltage eee AA Undervoltage control level 0 8 x Upc 400 V min Undervoltage fault level Upc low 50 V 350 V min Upc 1 35 x 01 19 Used supply volt Upc high 1 25 x Upc Unc low 0 8 x Upc Drives with 230 V supply voltage ACQ810 04 xxxx 2 The overvoltage fault level is set to 500 V and the minimum levels for undervoltage control and fault are removed The intermediate DC circuit is charged over an internal resistor which is bypassed when the capacitors are considered charged and the voltage is stabilized Settings Parameter group 47 Voltage ctrl page 241 Diagnostics Parameters 01 07 Dc voltage page 118 01 19 Used supply volt page 118 and 06 05 Limit word1 page 135 Program fea
276. it 81 05 Alin very low Pressure limit for secondary inlet pressure supervision See parameter 81 04 Very low ctrl 0 00 32767 00 Pressure limit 100 1 bar bar 81 06 DI status inlet Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch at the pump inlet The normal state is 1 If the selected input switches to O the action defined by parameter 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl is taken after the delay set by parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly expires No pressure switch connected 1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly Delay for primary and secondary supervision of pump inlet pressure See parameter 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl 0 81 08 Inlet forced ref Pump speed reference for parameter 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl selection Protect 0 0 32767 0rpm Speed reference 10 1 rpm 81 09 Outlet prot ctrl Enables the primary supervision of pump outlet pressure and selects the action taken when high outlet pressure is detected The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained above the pressure limit 81 11 Al ou
277. it Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation Local The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99 01 Language 45 07 CO2 Conv factor Conversion factor for converting energy into CO emissions kg kWh or tn MWh Used for multiplying the saved energy in MWh to calculate the value of signal 01 37 Saved CO2 121 1 reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in metric tons 01 37 Saved CO2 01 35 Saved energy MWh x 45 07 CO2 Conv factor tn MWh Parameters 241 0 0 10 0 Conversion factor for converting energy into CO emissions 1 1 kg kWh or tn MWh 45 08 Pump ref power Pump power when connected directly to supply Used for reference when energy savings are calculated See parameters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 0 0 1000 0 Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 45 09 Energy reset Resets the energy counters 01 35 Saved energy 01 36 Saved amount and 01 37 Saved CO2 Reset not requested normal operation Reset Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to Done 121 1 47 Voltage ctrl Overvoltage and undervoltage control settings See also DC voltage control on page 61 47 01 Overvolt ctrl Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller
278. it profile is in use the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Fieldbus control word as is to the Drive control word bits O to 15 parameter 02 36 EFB main cw Bits 16 to 32 of the Drive control word are not in use E Status word for the DCU 16 bit profile When the DCU 16 bit profile is in use the embedded fieldbus interface writes the Drive status word bits 0 to 15 parameter 02 37 EFB main sw to the Fieldbus status SW word as is Bits 16 to 32 of the Drive status word are not in use E State transition diagram for the DCU 16 bit profile See section State diagram on page 391 in chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter E References for the DCU 16 bit profile See section References for the ABB Drives profiles on page 370 E Actual signals for the DCU 16 bit profile See section Actual values for the ABB Drives profiles on page 371 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 375 E Modbus register addresses for the DCU 16 bit profile The table below shows the Modbus register addresses and data with the DCU16 bit communication profile Note Only the least significant 16 bits of the drive 32 bit control and status words can be accessed Register data 16 bit Le AAA a BL EA 400065 Data in out 24 drive parameter 58 58 Data I O 24 400101 409999 Register address 16 bit drive parameter 400000 100 x group index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 03 18 is 400000 100 x 3 18 40
279. ith timed function 2 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Timer1 ena Time period 1 enable Timer2 ena Time period 2 enable Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable Timer4 ena Time period 4 enable Boost ena Boost enable 36 23 Timed func3 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 3 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 3 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Timer1 ena Time period 1 enable Timer2 ena Time period 2 enable Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable Timer4 ena Time period 4 enable Boost ena Boost enable Parameters 231 36 24 Timed func4 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 4 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 4 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Timer1 ena Timer2 ena ne Time period 1 enable Time period 2 enable Timer3 ena Time period 3 enable Timer4 ena Time period 4 enable Boost ena
280. ive Zero IN speed is below limit defined by parameter 19 06 Zero speed speed limit 0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit Rev act ee is running in reverse direction ome is running in forward direction 15 Reserved em 1 A fault is active See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 0 No fault is active Local A control is active e the drive is controlled from PC tool or panel control panel 0 Local control is inactive 18 26 26 Reserved LE Request ctl 1 Control Word is requested from fieldbus 0 Control Word is not requested from fieldbus SW B28 Programmable control bits unless fixed by the used profile See parameters SW B29 90 08 50 11 30 SW B30 EFB main ref1 Internal and scaled reference 1 of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface See parameter 50 04 FBA ref modesel and chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 355 EFB main ref2 Internal and scaled reference 2 of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface See parameter 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel and chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 355 FBA setpoint Target parameter for writing the setpoint from the fieldbus The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28 06 Act unit sel and 28 07 Act FBA scaling respectively FBA act val Target parameter for writing a feedback value from the fieldbus The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 2
281. ive and fieldbus adapter Disable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter disabled Enable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter enabled 50 02 Comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus communication break The time delay is defined by parameter 50 03 Comm loss t out Parameter 50 21 Comm loss enable defines when the dini of fieldbus communication is enabled Ouo O Fault Upon a communication break the drive trips on fault FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 and coasts to stop Spd ref Safe Upon a communication break the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Last speed Upon a communication break the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS COMM 0x7510 and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 50 03 Comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter 50 02 Comm loss func is taken Time count starts when the link fails to update the message 0 3 6553 5 s Time delay Parameters 243 50 04 FBA reri modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF1 scaling and the actual value which is sent to the fieldbus FBA
282. ive either stops or trips on a fault In digital pressure monitoring one limit is observed Whenever the limit is met the drive indicates an alarm trips on a fault or starts to follow a pre defined reference Flow monitoring The control program has a monitoring function for flow that can be configured to generate an alarm or a fault whenever the flow falls below or rises above predefined limits The flow can either be calculated or measured using a flow meter connected to for example an analog input Program features 67 Application profile monitoring The application profile monitoring function can be used for long term supervision of an actual signal If the selected signal remains above the supervision limit for a specified time an alarm is generated For example monitoring the deviation between the PID controller setpoint and actual value parameter 04 04 Process PID err gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves On the other hand the PID controller output parameter 04 05 Process PID out remaining at 100 for a long time would indicate a leak in the outlet piping Settings Parameter group 81 Pump protection page 288 Diagnostics Parameters 06 20 Pump status word page 137 08 20 Pump fault word page 143 and 08 21 Pump alarm word page 143 68 Program features E Quick ramp mode The quick ramp mode allows users to define multiple ramp sets to accelerate or decelerate
283. lable for starting A pump cleaning sequence is in progress The Autochange function is being performed The drive has entered sleep mode A pump will start after the start delay has elapsed The level of the liquid in the container is very high the source selected by parameter 79 15 High switch is 1 Check for reasons that might have had an increasing effect on the monitored signal parameter 82 09 For example increased viscosity of the fluid or faulty pump bearings may increase the current drawn by the motor and trigger the cleaning sequence more frequently Check the interlock settings in parameter group 78 Pump autochange Check that the pumps are switched on Check the interlock wiring from the pumps Check for reasons for increased energy consumption Set the date and time page 37 Informative alarm Informative alarm Check that all appropriate pumps are switched on Informative alarm Informative alarm Informative alarm Informative alarm Informative alarm Fault tracing 343 Alarm fieldbus code 2224 2225 2400 LC TANK EMPTY 0xC017 08 10 Alarm logger6 b6 08 21 Pump alarm word b24 MF MASTER LOST 0xC018 08 10 Alarm logger6 b 08 21 Pump alarm word b21 MF NO SHARED DATA 0xC019 08 10 Alarm logger6 b8 08 21 Pump alarm word b25 SOLUTION ALARM OxGF80 08 08 Alarm logger4 b1 08 18 Alarm word4 b1 The level of the liquid in the co
284. lation 20 01 Flow colo mode emm 16 0 3 Wwe 20 02 Pump niet sel vane 32 gt gt ze 30 03 Pump ouetsel varme 32 P Ze Additional parameter data 331 MIES O A m h kW h m Bosi Fowcacgan REAL 16 o mmo 39 20 53 Sumfowreset ewm 6 on w 81 Pump protection aror metproro ewm e 0 3 Notused 81 02 Almeaswreiniet Valpoiver 32 seme 8104 Veybwan eum os gt m 81 06 Dsmus met Bipomer 32 motes 8108 ouietproroi ewm 6 9 3 Notused 81 10 4imeas outet TR asr 32 Arse 31 32 Veo man on ewm 36 os Ms 81 34 Dsmusowet erpe 32 motes 81 18 Fiow source sel vapom 32 Pee 819 Fiowmaxpror eum 92 Www 9121 owminpror eum o Ww 332 Additional parameter data CA E A 925 apprrra ewm 18 002 ot 5128 Pet enable Tans S Mt S H H os fs CEAC O 18 0 1880 s 39s 82 Pump cleaning M O cc 001111111111 8208 mororsieps UTR 32 Taa 3 82 08 Super source vapom 32 Game 8210 Supenis m REAL 16 03m 59 e212 ig pointer Bipome 16 oa mh Cieanmaxcid eum 6 o2 am 82 34 Cieanmaxnumber umr amp ow 8 83 Energy monitoring 63 01 Energy mon mode emm 0 3 Ww
285. lay shows the Panel Sw X XX following panel information Rom CRC XXXXXXXXXX Panel SW Panel firmware version Flash Rev X XX ROM CRC Panel ROM check sum XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev Flash content version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Flash content comment When you release the 2 key the panel goes to the Output mode 22 The ACQ810 control panel E Basic operations Any mode How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive by using the control panel the drive must be in local control To switch between remote control REM shown on the LOC amp MESSAGE status line and local control LOC shown on the status switching to the line press E local control mode Note Switching to local control can be prevented with parameter 16 01 Local lock 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press L The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 23 If you press the key until the text Keep running appears the drive continues running as before The driv
286. le first quickly changes the current digit until the cursor moves A left one position This is repeated until the key is released CANCEL 00 00 SAVE After the key is released step by step adjustment of the current digit is possible If neither key is pressed for a while the cursor returns to the right one position at a time Pressing both keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value SAVE To save the new value press Ew LOCU PARAMETERS To cancel the new value and keep the original press 9906 Mot nom current CANCEL CZ 3 5 A 9907 Mot nom voltage IE Mot nom d Mot nom speg EXIT 00 00 EDIT How to change the value of value pointer parameters In addition to the parameters shown above there are two kinds of pointer parameters value pointer parameters and bit pointer parameters A value pointer parameter points to the value of another parameter Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the LOC amp MAIN MENU 1 rain ne EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Mein menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS oc PAR GROUPS Ol1 e menu with keys CA and S WV 7 and pressing x values R Select the appropriate parameter group with keys LA oc R PAR GROUPS 21 and SY P Here the value pointer parameter 21 01 15 Anal ogue outputs Speed ref1 sel is used as an example 16 System
287. le provides native 32 bit access to the drive data 400005 Reference 2 02 39 EFB main ref2 Least significant 16 bits EA 400018 Data in out 12 Drive parameter 58 46 Data I O 12 400051 Status word LSW of 02 37 EFB main sw Least significant 16 bits 400052 Status word MSW of 02 37 EFB main sw Most significant 16 bits 400053 Actual value 1 selected by parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel Least significant 16 bits 400054 Actual value 1 selected by parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel Most significant 16 bits 400055 Actual value 2 selected by parameter 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel Least significant 16 bits 400056 Actual value 2 selected by parameter 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel Most significant 16 bits 400057 Data in out 13 Drive parameter 58 47 Data I O 13 400068 Data in out 24 Drive parameter 58 58 Data I O 24 400101 409999 Register address 16 bit drive parameter 400000 100 x group index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 03 18 is 400000 100 x 3 18 400318 Drive parameter access 32 bit drive parameter 420000 200 x group 2 x index Example Modbus register address to drive parameter 01 27 420000 200 x 1 2 x 27 420254 380 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface Modbus function codes Table below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded fieldbus interface 0x03 Read Holding Registers Reads the contents of a contiguous block
288. leaning sequence performed on every start command Tria otr 1 Enable Cleaning sequence is performed when the signal selected by S E parameter 82 12 Trig pointer changes to 1 7 1 Enable Cleaning sequence reference is inverted The first step is in the reverse direction the second step in the forward direction Urderioad 1 Enable Cleaning sequence is started when the underload limit defined by parameter 34 02 Underload func is exceeded 9 Overisad 1 Enable Cleaning sequence is started when the underload limit defined by parameter 34 01 Overload func is exceeded 82 02 First Step First step frequency for the cleaning sequence in percent of the value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 0 0 100 0 First step frequency 10 1 82 03 Second Step Second step frequency for the cleaning sequence in percent of the value of parameter 19 01 Speed scaling 0 0 100 0 Second step frequency 10 7 196 82 04 Offtime Interval between forward and reverse steps during the cleaning sequence 0 0 1000 s Interval between steps 1721s 1721s Neg direction 82 05 First Step Time Duration of the first step during the cleaning sequence and of the rest of the steps which are run in the same direction 0 1000 s Duration of the first step and the rest of the steps which are run in the same direction 82 06 Second Step Time Duration of the second step during the cleaning sequence and of the rest of the steps which are run in the same
289. leration time is 1 longer compared to full braking 2 Full Maximum braking power Almost all available current is used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal energy in the motor 40 11 Mmodel t adapt Selects whether the temperature dependent parameters such as stator or rotor resistance of the motor model adapt to actual measured or estimated temperature or not Disabled Temperature adaptation of motor model disabled Enabled Temperature adaptation of motor model enabled 1 234 Parameters 44 Maintenance Maintenance counter configuration See also section Maintenance counters on page 87 44 01 Ontime1 func Configures on time counter 1 This counter runs whenever the signal selected by parameter 44 02 Ontime1 src is on After the limit set by parameter 44 03 Ontime1 limit is reached an alarm specified by parameter 44 04 Ontime1 alm sel is given and the counter reset The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 09 Counter ontime1 Bit O of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the count has exceeded the limit 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func Bit pointer sett
290. limit 0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit Rev act ee is running in reverse direction ome is running in forward direction 15 Reserved em 1 A fault is active See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 0 No No fault is active is active Local S Note control is active e the drive is controlled AA PC tool or panel control panel 0 Local control is inactive Reserved 27 Request ctl 1 Control Word is requested from fieldbus 0 Control Word is not requested from fieldbus S oa Programmable control bits unless fixed by the used profile See parameters SW B29 90 08 50 77 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter 30 SW B30 02 20 FBA main ref1 Internal and scaled reference 1 of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface See parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel and chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 383 02 27 FBA main ref2 Internal and scaled reference 2 of the drive received through the fieldbus adapter interface See parameter 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel and chapter Control through a fieldbus adapter on page 383 02 34 Panel ref Reference given from the control panel See also parameter 100 1 rpm 56 07 Local ref unit 10 lt 1 Parameters 125 No Name Value Description FbEq 02 36 EFB main cw Internal Control Word of the drive received through the embedded fieldbus interface See chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on pa
291. location EXT2 In addition parameter 12 05 Ext2 ctrl mode must have the setting P D when level control is used The start levels for the pumps as well as the alarm levels are set by parameters in group 79 Level control At any given time one of the drives acts as master The master status can be rotated between the drives using the Autochange function or one drive can be fixed to master status The start stop level settings of the master are the ones in effect The following drawing represents a station with three submersible pumps in emptying mode Each pump has a pre defined start level and more pumps are started as the level in the container rises The level sensor is connected to an analog input that is selected as the process actual value in parameter group 28 Procact sel le ae come U Analog level sensor l gt High level alarm Digital mi A level sensor Digital low level sensor Application macros 109 S Default settings Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Level control macro default 16 20 Macro Read Only Level ctrl Multi level 76 01 Enable MF comm No 110 Application macros E Default control connections for the Level control macro XPOW 24 V DC 1 6A XRO1 XRO2 Relay output RO1 Ready 1 Q 250 V AC 30 V DC 2A C Relay output RO2 Fault 1 250 V AC 30 V
292. losses are higher than 20 i e the motor cannot be de coupled from the driven equipment or if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running i e in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals With Reduced ID run the control in the field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as with the Normal ID run Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID Run 90 seconds Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 100 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN Standstill Standstill ID run The motor is injected with DC current The motor shaft will not rotate Note A standstill ID run should be selected only if the Normal Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused by the connected mechanics See also selection Adv standst E GN E 5 Cur meas cal Current offset and gain measurement calibration The calibration will be performed at next start Advanced Advanced ID run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID run can take a couple of minutes This mode should be selected when top performrance is needed across the whole operating area Note The driven machinery must be de coupled from the motor
293. lue counter 1 This counter measures by integration the area below the signal selected by parameter 44 20 Val count1 src When the total area exceeds the limit set by parameter 44 21 Val count1 lim an alarm is given if enabled by bit 1 of this parameter The signal is sampled at 0 5 second intervals Note that the scaled see the FbEq column at the signal in question value of the signal is used The current value of the counter is readable and resettable from parameter 04 13 Counter value1 Bit 4 of 06 15 Counter status indicates that the counter has exceeded the limit Counter mode O Loop If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds 1 1 Saturate If alarm is enabled by bit 1 the alarm stays active until reset Alarm ena Alarm enable O Disable No alarm is given when limit is reached 1 Enable Alarm is given when limit is reached 44 20 Val count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rom see page 118 1073742081 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 44 21 Val count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 1 See parameter 44 19 Val count1 func 0 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 1 121 44 22 Val count1 div Divisor for value counter 1 The value of the monitored signal is divided by this value before integration 1 2147483647 Divisor for
294. lue that should be written into parameter 33 02 Superv1 act to change its value to 01 07 Dc voltage is 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0111 1073742087 32 bit integer When a value pointer parameter is connected to an application program the format is as follows 0 244 4 Description Value pointer is Relative address of connected to application program application program variable Note Value pointer parameters connected to an application program are read only via fieldbus Additional parameter data 309 E 32 bit integer bit pointers When a bit pointer parameter is connected to value 0 or 1 the format is as follows Wee 0 Bit pointer is connected ERN O False 1 True to 0 1 When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a bit value of another parameter the format is as follows 2 255 1 255 MC Description Bit pointer is Bit selection Group of Index of connected to source source signal bit parameter parameter value When a bit pointer parameter is connected to an application program the format is as follows Description Bit pointer is connected Bit selection Relative address of to application program application program variable Note Bit pointer parameters connected to an application program are read only via fieldbus 310 Additional parameter data Parameter groups 1 9 Data Update No Name De lezan Range unit Vime Notes 07 01 Motor s
295. m sets bit 8 of 08 08 Alarm logger4 The voltage of the Wait for the DC voltage to rise intermediate DC circuit has not yet risen to operating level Speed controller autotune See parameter 23 20 PI tune mode routine did not finish successfully No Start interlock signal Check circuit connected to DIIL input received Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative temperature measurement of the drive Fault tracing 341 Code Alarm fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 2077 2081 EFB COMM LOSS 0x7540 08 08 Alarm logger4 b12 AO CALIBRATION 0x7380 PIPEFILL TIMEOUT OxC000 08 09 Alarm logger5 bO 08 21 Pump alarm word b9 MIN FLOW 0xC001 08 09 Alarm loggers b1 08 21 Pump alarm word bO MAX FLOW OxC002 08 09 Alarm logger5 b2 08 21 Pump alarm word b1 LOW PRESSURE 0xC003 08 09 Alarm logger5 b3 08 21 Pump alarm word b2 HIGH PRESSURE 0xC004 08 09 Alarm logger5 b4 08 21 Pump alarm word b3 VERY LOW PRESS OxC005 08 09 Alarm logger5 b5 08 21 Pump alarm word b4 VERY HIGH PRESS OxC006 08 09 Alarm logger5 b6 08 21 Pump alarm word b5 PROFILE HIGH 0xC007 08 09 Alarm logger5 b 08 21 Pump alarm word b6 Embedded fieldbus interface has been taken into use and there is a communication break between the drive and the master station Analog output calibration has failed Maximum allowed time for the Pipefill function exceeded Measured fl
296. m logger4 b5 does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of drive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary 2053 MENU CHG Loading a parameter listing Enter password at parameter 16 03 Pass PASSWORD REQ requires a password code Ox6F81 2054 MENU CHANGED A different parameter listing Informative alarm Ox6F82 is being loaded 08 08 Alarm logger4 b6 340 Fault tracing Alarm fieldbus code 2055 DEVICE CLEAN 0x5080 2056 COOLING FAN 0x5081 2057 ADD COOLING 0x5082 2058 CABINET FAN 0x5083 2059 DC CAPACITOR 0x5084 2060 MOTOR BEARING 0x738C 2061 MAIN CONTACTOR 0x548D 2062 RELAY OUTPUT SW 0x548E 2063 MOTOR START COUNT 0x6180 2064 POWER UP COUNT 0x6181 2065 DC CHARGE COUNT 0x6182 2066 ONTIME1 ALARM 0x5280 2067 ONTIME2 ALARM 0x5281 2068 EDGE1 ALARM 0x5282 2069 EDGE2 ALARM 0x5283 2070 VALUE1 ALARM 0x5284 2071 2072 2073 2074 2076 VALUE2 ALARM 0x5285 DC NOT CHARGED 0x3250 08 08 Alarm logger4 b9 AUTOTUNE FAILED 0x8481 08 08 Alarm logger4 b10 START INTERLOCK OxF082 08 08 Alarm logger4 b11 TEMP MEAS FAILURE 0x4211 08 08 Alarm logger4 b Maintenance counter alarm See parameter group 44 Maintenance Note Any maintenance counter alar
297. m shows the order of some common speeds in a pump application 20 01 Maximum speed 75 05 Start speed 1 Start speed of auxiliary pump or follower 1 75 12 Stop speed 1 Stop speed of auxiliary pump or follower 1 77 03 Sleep level 27 19 PID minimum 0 rpm Negative speeds only used by the pump cleaning function 82 03 20 02 Minimum speed 0 32767 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 1 121mm 1 121mm 75 06 Start speed 2 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 2 See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 32767 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 2 121mm 1 121mm 75 07 Start speed 3 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 3 See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 32767 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 3 121mm 1 121mm 5 08 Start speed 4 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 4 See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 32767 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 4 5 09 Start speed 5 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 5 See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 3276 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 5 75 10 Start speed 6 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 6 See parameter 75 05 Start speed 1 0 3276 rpm Start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 6 75 11 Start speed 7 Defines the start speed for auxiliary pump or follower 7 See parameter 75
298. m value for analog input Al5 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 Al5 minimum value 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 11 000 V 158 Parameters 13 24 Al5 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al5 value defined by parameter 13 22 Al5 max Al scaled 32768 000 Real value corresponding to maximum Al5 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 25 Al5 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al5 value defined by parameter 13 23 A 5 min See the drawing at parameter 13 24 Al5 max scale 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to minimum Al5 value 1000 1 32 68 000 13 31 Al tune Triggers the Al tuning function Connect the signal to the input and select the appropriate tuning function A tune is not activated Al1 min tune Current analog input Al1 signal value is set as minimum value of Al1 into parameter 13 03 Al1 min The value reverts back to No action automatically Al1 max tune Current analog input Al1 signal value is set as maximum value of Al1 into parameter 13 02 A 1 max The value reverts back to No action automatically Al2 min tune Current analog input Al2 signal value is set as minimum value of Al2 into parameter 13 08 AI2 min The value reverts back to No action automatically Al2 max tune Current anal
299. master drives 2 and 3 have parameter 75 03 Follower mode set to Copy of mstr Speed Flow demand Master Drive 1 PA Follower Drive 2 PAR a Follower Drive 3 PA Drive status 260 Parameters No Name Value Master speed Speed Description FbEq The drive follows the same reference received from the PI 2 controller as the master but is started and stopped by the logic This is usually the most economical follower mode Flow demand Master Follower T Stopped Master Follower Drive 2 pooped UL Stopped Master Drive 3 A A Drive status In case the master status switches from one drive to another and the reference changes drastically the drive compares the most recent reference value with the previous reference If the difference between the references is more than 10 the follower will accelerate decelerate towards the new reference along a ramp The acceleration and deceleration ramps are defined by parameters 75 26 Master speed acc and 75 27 Master speed dec respectively The ramping will end when the new reference is reached No Name Value 75 04 Follower ref Reference Speed Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 0 32767 rpm Parameters 261 Description FbEq Only visible when Multipump is selected at parameter 75 01 Operation mode Defines the reference used when parameter 75 03 Follower mode is set to Const speed and the drive is running as a follower
300. maximum motor cable length is shorter than with Default Low noise Minimizes motor noise control performance optimized for 1 high gt 300 Hz output frequencies Note Drive loadability is reduced with this setting and some derating must be applied if a certain constant output current is needed This setting is not recommended for cyclic load applications The maximum motor cable length is 50 m 164 ft with drives up to 45 kW Default Control performance optimized for long motor cables 2 Custom The minimum switching frequency is defined manually by 3 parameter 40 02 Sf ref 40 02 Sfref Defines the minimum switching frequency reference when parameter 40 01 Motor noise is set to Custom Note The switching frequency limits of the hardware may prevent the drive control from accepting too high or low a value 1 0 8 0 kHz Minimum switching frequency reference 1 1 kHz 40 03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated motor slip 100 means full slip gain 0 means no slip gain The default value is 100 Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip gain Example with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite of the full slip gain 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm The static speed error is 1000 rpm 998 rpm 2 rem To Compensate the error
301. me constant of the actual speed filter 1000 1 ms ms 19 06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit The motor is stopped along a speed ramp until the defined zero speed limit is reached After the limit the motor coasts to stop 0 00 30000 00 Zero speed limit 100 1 rpm rpm Parameters 181 No Name Value Description 19 07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position Without Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below the value of 19 06 Zero speed limit the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop 19 06 Zero speed limit With Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below the value of 19 06 Zero speed limit the Zero speed delay function activates During the delay the function keeps the speed controller live the inverter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart Speed Speed controller remains active Motor is decelerated to true zero speed 19 06 Zero speed limit 1 1 ms 0 30000 ms Zero speed delay
302. meter 33 09 Superv3 func 03 14 Torq ref used see page 129 FbEq 1073742103 1073742595 1073742597 1073742598 1073742606 1073742849 1073742853 100 1 100 1 1073742081 1073742082 1073742083 1073742084 1073742085 1073742086 1073742087 1073742102 1073742103 1073742595 1073742597 1073742598 1073742606 Parameters 217 AA A ec Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 129 1073742853 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 33 11 Superv3 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 3 See parameter 33 09 Superv3 func 32768 00 Upper limit for supervision 3 100 32768 00 33 12 Superv3 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 3 See parameter 33 09 Superv3 func 32768 00 Lower limit for supervision 3 100 32768 00 33 17 BitO invert src Parameters 33 17 33 22 enable the inversion of freely selectable source bits The inverted bits are shown by parameter 06 17 Bit inverted sw This parameter selects the source bit the inverted value of which is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit O Relay output RO2 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 1 1073807874 Relay output RO3 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 2 1073873410 Relay output RO4 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 3 1073938946 Relay output RO5 as indicated by 02 02 RO status bit 4 1074004482 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Constant and bit pointer set
303. meter 64 03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64 13 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 64 02 PVL filt time Peak value logger filtering time See parameter 64 01 PVL mE signal Selects the signal to reset the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 64 04 AL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2 The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running The results are displayed by parameters 64 24 64 33 Each parameter represents an amplitude range and shows what portion of the samples fall within that range The signal value corresponding to 100 is defined by parameter 64 05 AL signal base Parameter 64 03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 The latest time the loggers were reset is stored into parameter 64 13 Note Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current 01 04 Motor current The results are displayed by parameters 64 14 64 23 100 of the signal value corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive see the appropriate Hardware Manual Speed rpm 01 01 Motor speed rpm see page 118 1073742081 254 Parameters No Name Value Speed Frequency Current Current Torque Dc voltage
304. module in option slot 2 O No option 1 No comm 2 Unknown 8 FPBA 01 11 FDNA 01 13 FENA 11 14 FLON 01 09 21 19 FB COMMON FENA 11 FECA 01 FEPL 02 22 FSCA 01 10 Start stop dir Start stop direction run enable and emergency stop source selections start inhibit and start interlock configuration 10 01 Ext1 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external control location 1 EXT1 Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Not sel No start or stop command sources selected In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by parameter 10 02 Ext1 start in1 The states of the source bit are interpreted as follows State of source Command via par 10 02 0 Parameters 145 3 wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by parameters 10 02 Ext1 start in and 10 03 Ext start in2 The state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows N State of source 1 State of source 2 Command via par 10 02 via par 10 03 Ay o f S9 FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus 3 Control Word selected by parameter 50 15 FBA cw used Reserve In1F In2R The source selected by 10 02 Ext1 start in is the forward start signal the source selected by 10 03 Ext1 start in2 is the reverse start signal via par 10 02 via par 10 03 0 pp O Se 3 O aroma A Sarreverss In1St In2Dir The so
305. motors only Acceleration did not finish within reasonable time Asynchronous motors only Deceleration did not finish within reasonable time Asynchronous motors only Speed dropped to zero during ID run Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative MIX Extension 14 16 Contact your local ABB representative 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 CURR U2 MEAS 0x3184 CURR V2 MEAS 0x3185 CURR W2 MEAS 0x3186 STO1 LOST 0x8182 STO2 LOST 0x8183 STO MODE CHANGE OxFF7A Measured offset error of U2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Measured offset error of V2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Measured offset error of W2 output phase current measurement is too great Offset value is updated during current calibration Safe torque off function is active i e safety circuit signal 1 connected between XSTO 1 and XSTO 3 is lost Safe torque off function is active i e safety circuit signal 2 connected between XSTO 2 and XSTO 4 is lost Error in changing Safe torque off supervision i e parameter 30 07 Sto diagnostic setting could not be changed to value Fault Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB repr
306. motr 6406 PVE peak values REAL 52 8216592168 eaor Dateofpeak uma 32 omm f d 64 08 Time ofpeak UINT32 32 000000255889 s E409 Cumentarpesk REAL s2 R A e470 Dever atpeak REAL 0 200 V e472 Date e Uma 3 momo 4 13 Time ofreset_ UmTs sz 009000 25585 s pem AOT REM 36 omo CA E em ve ov 3 rara RE 859 X srta arraoioso REAL 16 o RIR m w oo earnen REL 3 9 99 a p r Rea 16 o lae m 16 ow pza noo m 16 ow pw uz2030 REAL w 9o SIR REA om 5520 arz 400 REAL 16 9o IRR REAL omo e430 alz 60 REAL w 9o SIR REA 16 oo sr32 arzaoio Rea w 9o O 328 Additional parameter data Data Default Factory 75 Pump logic 75 04 Follower ref REAL 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 05 Start speed 1 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 06 Start speed 2 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 07 Start speed 3 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 08 Start speed 4 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 09 Start speed 5 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 10 Start speed 6 UINT32 0 32767 1300 rpm 75 11 Start speed 7 UINT32 1300 rpm 75 12 Stop speed 1 UINT32 800 rpm 32 32 32 0 32767
307. n 00 00 LOCU VER CHECK 1 FIRMWARE VERSION UIFQ 200F 0 UIFQ 200C 0 OK PRODUCT VARIANT CANCEL 00 00 CONT LOC VER CHECK FIRMWARE VERSION PRODUCT e OK CANCEL 00 00 CONT L 44 The ACQ810 control panel If the downloading is continued the display shows a message about it Downloading continues drive is being restarted The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Downloading continues Downloading continues drive is being restarted Downloading finishes Panel shows a text identifying the alarm and returns to the Par Backup LOC amp PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 LOCU PAR BACKUP Restarting drive LOC PAR BACKUP Restoring downloading user set 1 Errem RE 5 076 NEN po LOC B PAR BACKUP Initializing param restore operation 00 00 LOC C PAR BACKUP Restarting drive LOCU PAR BACKUP Finishing restore operation A LOC t ALARM ALARM 2036 RESTORE EXIT The ACQ810 control panel 45 Trying to load a user set between different firmware versions If you try load a user set between different firmware versions the panel shows you the following fault information Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS Oc U PAR GROUPS 16 on the main menu as shown in section Parameters on 12 Ope Pati ng mode page 25 1
308. n page 364 E Actual values Fieldbus actual signals ACT1 and ACT2 are 16 bit or 32 bit signed integers They convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master The drive values are either written to the fieldbus actual values as they are or the values are scaled See section About the EFB communication profiles on page 364 E Data inputs outputs Data input output I O are 16 bit or 32 bit words containing selected drive parameter values Parameters 58 35 Data I O 1 58 58 Data I O 24 define the addresses from which the master either reads data input or to which it writes data output 364 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface About the EFB communication profiles A communication profile defines the rules for data transfer in between the drive and the fieldbus master for example if packed boolean words are converted and how e ifthe signal values are scaled and how how the drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the four profiles the ABB Drives classic profile ABB Drives enhanced profile 16 bit DCU profile or 32 bit DCU profile For either one of the ABB Drives profile the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive Both DCU profiles are transparent that is no data conversion is done The figure below illustrates the eff
309. nJ Jie peeds 7 0 z peeds wnwlulN 70 07 pesn jewpeeds 90 0 peeds uunuuixe w L0 0z oj um JJ3peeds El EZ Iu UM J13peeds ZLC Z 9UNYJUIM JJ3peeds LL EZ Bu puey 10 119 pasds au 4 dwos 2oy 90 Z au 19 duioo 29V S0 c A wudu peeds JOJO0IN LO LO OJ8Z UI duey ZL 110 Z0 90 048Z jno dwey y 11q Z0 90 0 eAnippe peeds 80 ez peduieJ joypeeds 90 0 m epou Jj JOJO S0 66 O19Z Ul duies ZL Y Z0 90 OJaz no dwey py 1q z0 90 pueuJuJoo peeds ajes Control block diagrams 397 yo WIVIS O1 01424 BIOL cL 60 je1 peeds 119 ds Jou bio 60 0 gt i DURLULU OO peeds jse r 18S C2 LIS 2 LO cL E50 GUEd LL Ha LO 90 qj e901 6 HA L0 90 gt MES dasds uonoeJes epoui Burnejedo uoneoyipoui a9u3 19191 anb o 398 Control block diagrams LE Le 9299JJ INO Pld spun 9y OZ FO spun jov JZ FO 90 82 J9julog sun joy 60 S0 oro e LO FO ate IV 96 mo 0 EN JE ppv LIY soez vow Jea xew Joy J9JUIO y RU 90 Vas IV 0 9JS BA 10V a OUL BA OY LO 8z Ies ZIL IEA PY J8juiog 0 Sc TO L0 4Z Jes juiodjes Aid EA xeu Tow JQJUIO Y JOJUIO F0 6Z Gld O LZ vas 9299JJ JO Pld IV 0 2JS Z julod as 24S JUIOdJaS suun jov cZ po spun Ov pz TO jas yun yoy UOI JDBIVS en eA enjo
310. nal motor torque See 10 1 also parameter 01 29 Torq nom scale 01 07 Dc voltage Measured intermediate circuit voltage 10021V 01 14 Motor speed est Estimated motor speed in rpm 100 1 rpm 01 15 Temp inverter Estimated IGBT temperature in percent of fault limit 10 7 196 01 17 Motor temp1 Measured temperature of motor 1 in degrees Celsius when a KTY sensor is used With a PTC sensor the value is always 0 01 18 Motor temp2 Measured temperature of motor 2 in degrees Celsius when a KTY sensor is used With a PTC sensor the value is always 0 01 19 Used supply volt Either the user given supply voltage parameter 47 04 Supply voltage or if auto identification is enabled by parameter 47 03 Sup volt auto ld the automatically determined supply voltage 01 21 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent 01 22 Power inu out Drive output power in kW or hp depending on setting of 100 1 kW parameter 16 17 Power unit Filtered using 100 ms low pass or hp filtering 01 23 Motor power Measured motor shaft power in kW or hp depending on 100 1 kW setting of parameter 16 17 Power unit Filtered using 100 ms or hp low pass filtering kWh inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive in 1 1 kWh either direction in kilowatt hours Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool kWh supply Amount of energy that the drive has taken from the AC 1 1 kWh supply in kilowatt hours Can be reset by en
311. nce SpeedRef min abs 20 02 Minimum speed 0 30000 rpm Absolute minimum limit for speed reference 1 1 rpm 186 Parameters 22 Speed ref ramp Speed reference and emergency stop OFF 3 ramp settings 22 02 Acc time Defines acceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling not to parameter 20 01 Maximum speed If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive torque limits 0 000 1800 000 s Acceleration time 1000 1s 22 03 Dec time Defines deceleration time as the time required for the speed to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19 01 Speed scaling not from parameter 20 01 Maximum speed to Zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive torque limits If there is any dou
312. nd other available sources for example digital and analog inputs Fieldbus adapters are available for various serial communication protocols for example e DeviceNet FDNA xx adapter e EtherNet IP FENA xx adapter LoNWonks FLON xx adapter e Modbus FSCA xx adapter e PROFIBUS DP FPBA xx adapter Control through a fieldbus adapter 385 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the User s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting parameter 50 01 FBA enable to Enable The adapter specific parameters must also be set See the table below Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION AND SUPERVISION see also page 242 50 01 FBA enable 1 Enable Initializes communication between drive and fieldbus adapter module 50 02 Comm loss 0 No Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus func 1 Fault communication break See also parameter 2 Spd ref Safe 50 21 Comm loss enable 3 Last speed 50 03 Comm loss t 0 3 6553 5 S Defines the time between communication out break detection and the action selected with parameter 50 02 Comm loss func 50 04 FBA ref1 0 Raw data Defines the fieldbus reference scali
313. ng modesel and 50 05 2 Speed When Raw data is selected see also FBA ref2 modesel parameters 50 06 50 11 50 21 Comm loss See 50 21 Comm Activates fieldbus communication enable loss enable monitoring for control location EXT1 or EXT2 or both The drive can detect a fieldbus communication break ONLY when it is in a control location where the monitoring is enabled ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION see also page 245 51 01 FBA type Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module These parameters are adapter module specific For more ae information see the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used 51 27 FBA par 0 Done Validates any changed adapter module refresh configuration parameter settings 386 Control through a fieldbus adapter Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 51 28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 51 29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 51 30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision stored in the memory of the drive Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication 51 32 FBA comm Displays the common program revision of sw ver the adapter module 51 33 FBA appl
314. ng function that can be used to prevent solids from building up on pump impellers or piping The function consists of a programmable sequence of forward and reverse runs of the pump to shake off any residue on the impeller or piping This is especially useful with booster and wastewater pumps The cleaning sequence can be programmed to occur at suitable intervals or whenever certain triggering conditions are met By default the cleaning sequence is started in the forward direction but it can also be started in the reverse direction To rotate the pump in the reverse direction you must set parameter 20 02 Minimum speed to a negative value enable a negative speed reference using parameter 20 04 Neg speed ena and then define the reverse step frequency using parameter 82 03 Second Step Note Not all pumps can be rotated in the reverse direction Settings Parameter group 82 Pump cleaning page 296 Diagnostics Parameters 06 20 Pump status word page 137 08 20 Pump fault word page 143 and 08 21 Pump alarm word page 143 E Protective functions Pressure monitoring The control program contains protective functions for two level analog or single level digital pressure monitoring of both the inlet and outlet of the pump In analog monitoring whenever the pressure being monitored meets the first limit the drive indicates a warning trips on a fault or starts to follow a pre defined reference When the second limit is met the dr
315. nge interval counter are stored The counters will continue from these values after the drive is powered on Example There are three pumps in a system parameter 5 02 Nbr of pumps is set to 3 Autochange level is set to 1500 rpm An Autochange occurs when the drive speed is below 1500 rpm and the Autochange interval has elapsed since the previous Autochange Upon the Autochange All pumps are stopped The starting sequence is incremented from 1 2 3 to 2 3 1 etc The contactor that controls the speed regulated pump is closed The delay set by parameter 75 25 Drive start dly passes The speed regulated pump is energized and normal operation starts If the Autochange level is O rpm and the interval has elapsed Autochange will occur during a stop for example when the Sleep function is active 0 32767 rpm Autochange level 1 1 rpm 78 05 Autochg interval Specifies the Autochange interval See parameter 78 04 Autochg level 0 00 1092 25 h Autochange interval 100 1h 78 06 Interlock pump 1 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 1 When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page pa 78 07 Interlock pump 2 Selects the input or signal for status of pump 2 When the input is 1 the drive assumes the pump is in use and can be started Not used The interlock is off meaning that the pump is not
316. ns 240 o A 241 49 Dala SIOlado 4 euedeneu sees tO T IT narrada dao 241 oj ANI M E CP 242 Ju FBA SeUNOS 245 92 PDA Cale H 2 3004 6 8 aed eke hod ee bee he GREE EERE ESTE a ea a aa 246 99 Por dala OUl AA 247 56 Panel display ou os 45 ou ep ee aaa ra idea 247 58 Embedded Modbus ern 249 64 Load analyzer aces e R RR RR R RR RRR RRR dem s de stats 253 FO PUMPIOJIC M T 256 76 MF communication 0 0 0 0 hrs 268 PUNO S e oso nebecas eet nce sere E ey heee UAEERESEREASE XE EE NS B EE RES 2 1 78 Pump autochange 0 eee hrs 2 4 9 Level CONWO 279 80 Flow calculation s seda mean RE E RR Uo AREE ScRPE SEES need 284 01 Pump PIOlCCHON sensores rro edubecun 3 PREIS SUR EIS Pea pe pex qub sees 208 62 P ump cleaning rus srta rea a a ph eb de o hoes E 296 83 Energy monitoring llle 299 9A EXO CONI spare a eee e e N AE hee 300 95 Hw configuration aaa e rs 300 97 User motor par eden crac raras 300 99 SII Gala 2 acea afe dex E uode HERE C7 on E P t Aaa e 301 Table of contents Y f Additional parameter data What this chapter contains rs Terms and abbreviations acu mora V Seed a RR ara EUR ORE EUER ER asa RU Fieldbus addresses leer Pointer parameter f
317. nt for acceleration compensation 10 1 ms 23 0 Speed err Ftime Defines the time constant of the speed error low pass filter If the used speed reference changes rapidly the possible interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with 0 00 600 00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time 100 1s the speed error filter Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller tuning problems A long filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another A very long filter time results in unstable control 0 0 1000 0 ms Speed error filtering time constant O filtering disabled 10 1 ms 192 Parameters 23 08 Speed additive Defines a speed reference to be added after ramping Note For safety reasons the additive is not applied when stop functions are active Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 23 11 SpeedErr winFunc Enables or disables speed error window control Speed error window control forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive It supervises the speed error value speed reference actual speed In the normal operating range window control keeps the speed controller input at zero The speed controller is evoked only if the speed error exceeds the upper boundary of the window parameter 23 12 SpeedErr win hi or the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the lower boundary of the window 23 13 SpeedErr win l
318. ntact your local ABB representative Reload the application program into the drive If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative 0210 JMU MISSING JMU Memory Unit is Check that the JMU is properly installed OxFF61 missing or broken If the problem persists replace the JMU Fault tracing 351 Code Fault fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 0301 UFF FILE READ 0x6300 0302 APPL DIR CREATION 0x6 100 0303 FPGA CONFIG DIR 0x6 100 0304 PU RATING ID 0x5483 0305 RATING DATABASE 0x6 100 0306 LICENSING 0x6100 0307 DEFAULT FILE 0x6100 0308 APPL FILE PAR CONF 0x6300 0309 APPL LOADING 0x6300 Extension Other 0310 USERSET LOAD OxFF69 Extension 10 Extension 35 File read error Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Drive internal fault Note This fault cannot be reset Corrupted application file Note This fault cannot be reset Application file imcompatible or corrupted Note This fault cannot be reset Template used in the application incompatible with drive firmware Param
319. ntainer is very low the source selected by parameter 79 04 Low switch is 1 The drive cannot detect a master on the drive to drive link and is not itself allowed to become master Shared signals not received Alarm generated by custom application program Informative alarm Check that there are drives on the drive to drive link that are allowed to become master Check the wiring of the drive to drive link Check that at least one drive has signal sharing enabled parameter 76 12 Set as source Check the status communication settings and wiring of the drive that is sharing its signals Check custom application program 344 Fault tracing Fault messages generated by the drive Code Fault fieldbus code Cause What to do other information 0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has Check motor load 0x2310 exceeded internal fault limit Check acceleration times in parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp Check motor and motor cable including phasing and delta star connection Check that the start up data in parameter group 99 corresponds to the motor rating plate Check that there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in motor cable 0002 DC OVERVOLTAGE Excessive intermediate Check that overvoltage controller is on 0x3210 circuit DC voltage parameter 47 01 Overvolt ctrl Check mains for static or transient overvoltage Check deceleration time Use coast to stop function
320. ntrol Panel has ten options in the Main menu Parameters Assistants Changed Par Fault Logger Time amp Date Parameter Backup I O Settings Reference Edit Drive Info and Parameter Change Log In addition the control panel has an Output mode which is used as default Also when a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset the fault in the Output or Fault mode The operation in these modes and options is described in this chapter Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you LOC 5 can start stop change the direction switch between 49 10 uz local and remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values To do other 10 7 tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate option on the menu The status line see DIR 00 00 MENU section Status line on page 18 shows the name of LOC Y MAIN MENU 1 the current menu mode item or state PARAM ETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Mode Main menu Abbreviations of option the Main menu options How to get help Any 21 How to find out the panel version Any How to start and stop the drive How to switch between local and remote control Any DENEN O c rm Lo CC e How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any How to set the speed or frequency reference in the Output mode Output How to adjust the display contrast
321. ny parameter with a bit pointer setting see page 775 In addition bit 4 of parameter 06 14 is on if any one of the four timers is on Each time period can be assigned to multiple timers likewise a timer can be controlled by multiple time periods The figure below presents how different time periods are active in daily and weekly modes Time period 1 Start time 00 00 00 Stop time 00 00 00 or 24 00 00 Start on Tuesday Stop day Sunday Time period 2 Start time 03 00 00 Stop time 23 00 00 Start day Wednesday Stop day Wednesday Time period 3 Start time 21 00 00 Stop time 03 00 00 Start day Tuesday Stop day Saturday Time period 4 Start time 12 00 00 Stop time 00 00 00 or 24 00 00 Start day Thursday Stop day Tuesday Time period 1 weekly Time period 1 daily Time period 2 weekly Time period 2 daily Time period 3 weekly Time period 3 daily Time period 4 weekly Time period 4 daily Friday gt C jo C 2 U Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Saturday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday 80 Program features A boost function is also available for the activation of the timers a signal source can be selected to extend the activation time for a parameter adjustable time period Timer active Timer enable signal Boost signal i Boost time Settings Parameter group 36 Timed functions page 226 Diagnostics Parameter 06 14 Timed func stat
322. o When the speed error moves outside the window the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller parameter 23 01 Proport gain which the torque selector adds to the torque reference The result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive Example In a load loss condition the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed If window control were inactive the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were reached Disabled Speed error window control inactive Absolute Speed error window control active The boundaries defined by parameters 23 12 SpeedErr win hi and 23 13 SpeedErr win lo are absolute Relative Speed error window control active The boundaries defined by parameters 23 12 SpeedErr win hi and 23 13 SpeedErr win lo are relative to speed reference 23 12 SpeedErr win hi Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window Depending on setting of parameter 23 11 SpeedErr winFunc this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference 0 3000 rpm Upper boundary of speed error window 1 1 rpm Parameters 193 No Name Value Description FbEq 23 13 SpeedErr win lo Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window Depending on setting of parameter 23 11 SpeedErr winFunc this is either an
323. oad time Note This fault must be disabled for the underload curve to work as a triggering condition for the pump cleaning sequence see parameter 82 01 Pump clean trig bit 8 An active fault would trip the drive and the cleaning sequence would not be performed No Name Value 34 03 Load freq 1 500 Hz 34 04 Load freq2 1 500 Hz 34 05 Load freq3 1 500 Hz 34 06 Load freq4 1 500 Hz 34 07 Load freq5 1 500 Hz 34 08 Load low lim O 1600 34 09 Load low lim2 0 1600 34 10 Load low lim3 O 1600 34 11 Load low lim4 O 1600 34 12 Load low lim5 O 1600 34 13 Load high lim1 O 1600 34 14 Load high lim2 O 1600 34 15 Load high lim3 O 1600 34 16 Load high lim4 O 1600 34 17 Load high lim5 O 160096 34 18 Load integ time O 10000 s Parameters 219 Frequency at point 4 1 1 Hz Drive output frequency at point 5 of user load curve Frequency at point 5 1 1 Hz Minimum load current or torque at point 1 of user load curve Minimum load at point 1 1 1 Minimum load current or torque at point 2 of user load curve Minimum load at point 2 1 1 Minimum load current or torque at point 3 of user load curve Minimum load at point 3 1 1 Minimum load current or torque at point 4 of user load curve Minimum load at point 4 1 1 Minimum load current or torque at point 5 of user load curve Minimum load at point 5 1 1 Maximum
324. od 4 1 1s 24 00 00 24 00 00 86400 3617 Sadaya Defines tne weekday on which tme period begins Time period 4 starts on Monday Thursday Time period 4 starts on Thursday 7 Time period 4 ends on Monday Time period 4 ends on Friday Saturday Time period 4 ends on Saturday Time period 1 ends on Sunday T 36 19 Boost signal Boosting can be used to extend the timer enable signal for the time defined by parameter 36 20 Boost time The boost time starts when the boost signal changes state from 1 to 0 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page aa 00 00 00 Boost time CS LS A LEN LEE MN easi OMM A Ls NENNEN 24 00 00 230 Parameters Timed Tunc Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 1 Also determines whether boost is used with timed function 1 The parameter is a 16 bit word with each bit corresponding to a function Whenever a bit is set to 1 the corresponding function is in use The bits of the binary number correspond to the following functions Function SS Timer2 ena Time period 2 enable Boost ena Boost enable Timed func2 Selects which time periods 1 4 are used with timed function 2 Also determines whether boost is used w
325. odules or the drive to drive link External references are given through the fieldbus interface analog inputs or drive to drive link Two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 are available The user can select control signals e g start and stop and control modes separately for both external control locations Depending on the user selection either EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time Selection between EXT1 EXT2 is done via digital signal or fieldbus control word 56 Control locations Program features 57 Program features What this chapter contains This chapter describes the features of the control program Drive configuration and programming The drive control program is divided into two parts e firmware program e application program Drive control program Application program Speed control Torque control Drive logic I O interface Function block Firmware program blocks parameter interface Protections Feedback block library i Fieldbus interface Standard eaga The firmware program performs the main control functions including speed and torque control drive logic start stop I O feedback communication and protection functions Firmware functions are configured and programmed with parameters 58 Program features E Programming via parameters Parameters can be set via e the control panel as described in chapter The ACQ810 control panel e the DriveStudio PC tool as describ
326. of the Status Word which the drive sends to the Modbus master Read only Bits 0 15 of the Status word as a hex value Shows the MSW part of the Status Word which the drive sends to the Modbus master Read only Bits 16 32 of the Status word as a hex value Shows the LSW part of reference 1 which the drive receives from the Modbus master Read only 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 Defines the address of the drive parameter which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes to the register address corresponding to Modbus In Out parameter no 1 The Modbus master defines the type of the data input or output The value is conveyed in a Modbus frame using two 16 bit words If the drive parameter is a 16 bit value the LSW Least significant word conveys the value If the drive parameter is a 32 bit value the next Modbus In Out parameter is also reserved Parameter address Format xxyy where XX 7 parameter group yy parameter index Parameters 253 58 58 Data I O 24 See parameter 58 35 NENNEN 0 9999 See parameter 58 35 121 64 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings See also section Load analyzer on page 88 64 01 PVL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by parameter 64 02 PVL filt time The peak value is stored along with other pre selected signals at the time into parameters 64 06 64 11 Para
327. og input Al2 signal value is set as maximum value of Al2 into parameter 13 07 Al2 max The value reverts back to No action automatically 13 32 Al superv func Selects how the drive reacts when analog input signal limit is reached The limit is selected by parameter 73 33 Al superv CW The drive trips on an AJ SUPERVISION 0x8110 fault 1 Spd ref Safe The drive generates an AJ SUPERVISION 0x8110 alarm 2 and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Parameters 159 Last speed The drive generates an A SUPERVISION 0x8110 alarm and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 13 33 Al superv cw Selects the analog input signal supervision limit Action selected by parameter 13 32 Al superv func is taken if Al1 min sup Al1 signal value falls below the value defined by equation par 13 03 AIT min 0 5 mA or V 1 Al1 max sup Al1 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation par 13 02 Al1 max 0 5 mA or V 2 Al2 min sup AI2 signal value falls below the value defined by equation par 13 08 AI2 min 0 5 mA or V 3 Al2 max sup Al1 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation par 13 07 AI2 max
328. on of behavior of the drive upon various fault situations 30 01 External fault Selects a source for an external fault signal O External fault trip 1 No external fault Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 30 02 Speed ref safe Defines the safe speed reference that is used with the Spd ref Safe setting of supervision parameters 13 32 Al superv func 30 03 Panel ctrl loss or 50 02 Comm loss func upon an alarm This speed is used when the parameter is set to Spd ref Safe 30000 30000 Safe speed reference 1 1 rpm rpm 30 03 Panel ctrl loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool communication break O p Drive trips on fault PANEL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 1 Spd ref Safe The drive generates alarm PANEL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 30 02 Speed ref safe WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break Last speed The drive generates alarm PANEL CTRL LOSS 0x5300 and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue N operation in case of a communication break 30 04 Mot phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is detected Fault The drive trips on fault MOTOR PHASE 0x3182 1 208 Parameters 30 05 Earth fault Selects how the dri
329. or thermal protection model when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated IN 96 Motor current In Nominal motor current 150 100 50 31 11 JLIZ Drive output frequency 50 150 Maximum load for the motor load curve 31 11 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31 10 Mot load curve and 31 12 Break point Defines the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve A higher value can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost the cooling See the motor manufacturer s recommendations See parameter 31 10 Mot load curve 50 15096 Zero speed load for the motor load curve 31 12 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 37 70 Mot load curve and 31 11 Zero speed load Defines the break point frequency of the load curve i e the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of parameter 31 10 Mot load curve towards the value of parameter 31 11 Zero speed load See parameter 31 10 Mot load curve 0 01 500 00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve 100 1 Hz Name Value No 31 13 Mot nom tempRise Parameters 213 Description FbEq Defines the temperature rise of the motor when the motor is loaded with nominal current See the motor manufacturer s recommendations The temperature rise value is used by the motor thermal protection model when parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated
330. ore tool will warn the user and offer a possibility to set the parameter manually User parameter sets The drive has four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent memory and recalled using drive parameters It is also possible to use digital inputs to switch between different user parameter sets See the descriptions of parameters 16 09 16 12 A user parameter set contains all values of parameter groups 10 to 99 except the configuration settings for fieldbus adapter communication As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets make sure the settings correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set In an application where different motors are used with one drive the motor ID run needs to be performed with each motor and saved to different user sets The appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched Settings Parameter group 16 System page 176 E Data storage parameters Four 16 bit and four 32 bit parameters are reserved for data storage These parameters are unconnected and can be used for linking testing and commissioning purposes They can be written to and read from using other parameters pointer settings Settings Parameter group 49 Data storage page 241 Program features 91 S Drive to drive link The drive to drive D2D link is a daisy chained RS 485 transmission line that allows basic master follower communication with one master dri
331. ormat in fieldbus communication sees 32 bit integer value pointers llle 32 bit integer bit pointers llli Parameter groups 1 9 0 ele hs Parameter groups Wide io QU ELE aed OR C orto ed bn Seen Togo ae US 8 Fault tracing What this chapter contains mw D ES sr ea RR SUUS SUE Qu E a de RECO RUE E oe Sele a HOWTOTGSOl S a KE R R K KR eds RR RR Snare RR ee a a a a RRR ee EE xs SIF vi aT Alarm messages generated by the drive 0 0 ee ne Fault messages generated by the drive llle 9 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface What this chapter contains rn SYSTEM overview llle ees shines Connecting the fieldbus to the drive aaa Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface llle Setting the drive control parameters 0 0 0 0 cc ee ens Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface es Control word and Status word 0 0 ee eee KL ass ota as ela as dy SoS Hee Shea Ss a eee eee ne es Actual e SA Data inputs outputs rrr About the EFB communication profiles llle ABB Drives classic profile and ABB Drives enhanced profile Control word for the ABB Drives profiles llli Status word for the ABB Drives profiles llle State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profiles oo References
332. otor thermal model has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 37 08 Mot temp2 fltLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31 08 Mot temp2 fltLim Faulty temperature sensor or sensor wiring Excessive IGBT junction to case temperature This fault protects the IGBT s and can be activated by a short circuit in the motor cable Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Drive module temperature is excessive Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 06 Mot temp2 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check the sensor and its wiring Check motor cable Check ambient conditions Check air flow and fan operation Check heatsink fins for dust pick up Check motor power against drive power Check setting of parameter 95 03 Temp inu ambient Check ambient temperature If it exceeds 40 C 104 F ensure that load current does not exceed derated load capacity of drive See appropriate Hardware Manual Check drive module cooling air flow and fan operation Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of d
333. ow below minimum limit Measured flow above maximum limit Pressure at pump inlet too low Pressure at pump outlet too high Pressure at pump inlet too low Pressure at pump outlet too high Application profile protection limit exceeded see parameters 81 25 81 27 Check selection of the parameter which enables disables EFB communication 58 01 Protocol ena sel EFB connection at terminal XD2D on the JCON board status of the fieldbus master online offline settings of the communication supervision function parameter 58 09 Comm loss action Check that the analog output to be calibrated is connected to the corresponding analog input AO1 to AI1 AO2 to AI2 See the description of parameter 15 30 AO calibration Check that the analog input has been set to current using the jumper on the control unit Refer to the Hardware manual of the drive for the settings Check the functioning of the analog output and input Check the pump system Check parameters 81 28 81 35 Check the pump system for reasons such as leaks that might cause a loss of measured flow Check parameters 81 18 81 24 Check the pump system for reasons that might cause an increase in measured flow Check parameters 81 18 81 24 Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump Check piping for leaks Check piping for blocks Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump Check piping for le
334. ow calculation page 284 05 07 Flow by power Flow calculated on the basis of the PQ performance curve 100 lt 1 m3 h See parameter group 80 Flow calculation page 284 05 08 Total flow Total calculated flow Stored when the drive is not powered 1 1m Can be reset using parameter 80 33 Sum flow reset 05 09 Bypass ref Reference used when parameter 75 01 Operation mode is 10 2 1 rpm set to Reg bypass 05 10 Speed ref Final speed reference from the pump control logic 10 2 1 rpm 05 20 kWh current read Energy consumed during the current period 1 1 kWh The length of the period is set by parameter 83 02 Mon period 05 21 kWh prev read Energy consumed during the last completed period The 1 1 kWh length of the period is set by parameter 83 02 Mon period 05 22 kWh posprev read Energy consumed during the period before the last 1 1 kWh completed period The length of the period is set by parameter 83 02 Mon period BL T TS T 132 Parameters 05 35 kWh December Energy consumed during last December 1 1 kWh 05 36 First in order The first pump in the current Autochange sequence 05 37 Time autochg Time elapsed since last Autochange 1 1 ms 05 39 Next start node Only valid when the drive is master Node number of the 1 1 next drive to be started 05 48 Ramp status Ramp times currently used Enabled 1 Quick ramp mode is enabled QR Set 1 1 Acceleration and deceleration times of quick ramp set 1 par
335. p 44 19 Val count func Can be reset by entering a O using the DriveStudio PC tool 04 14 Counter value2 Reading of value counter 2 See parameter group 44 24 Val count2 func Can be reset by entering a O using the DriveStudio PC tool SE 04 26 Wake up level Final calculated wake up level See the selections of 100 1 parameter 77 08 Wake up mode sel 04 27 Shared source Node number of the drive that is currently the source of 121 shared signals See parameters 76 11 76 16 04 28 Pump runtime Pump run time counter The counter runs when the drive is 1 1h running started Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 29 Trad 1 runtime Pump 1 run time counter for traditional control see page 1 1h 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 30 Trad 2 runtime Pump 2 run time counter for traditional control see page 1 1h 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 31 Trad 3 runtime Pump 3 run time counter for traditional control see page 1 1h 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 32 Trad 4 runtime Pump 4 run time counter for traditional control see page 1 1h 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 1 1h 1 9 04 33 Trad 5 runtime Pump 5 run time counter for traditional control see page 100 Can be reset using parameter 78 14 Runtime change 04 34 Trad 6 runtime Pump 6 run time counter for traditional control see page 100 C
336. p is switched on by the relay output of the drive there must be enough time for the star delta starter to first switch to star and then back to delta before the pump is connected to the drive 0 600 s Start delay for drive controlled pump 1721s 75 26 Master speed acc Defines the acceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is higher than the previous reference This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another The parameter sets the ramp up time as seconds from zero to maximum frequency not from previous reference to new reference The parameter is effective only in the Copy of mstr and Master speed follower modes See parameter 75 03 Follower mode 0 1800 s Acceleration time 75 27 Master speed dec Defines the acceleration time in case the latest reference received by the drive is lower than the previous reference This is likely to happen when the master status is passed on from one drive to another The parameter sets the ramp down time as seconds from maximum frequency to zero not from previous reference to new reference The parameter is effective only in the Copy of mstr and Master speed follower modes See parameter 75 03 Follower mode 0 1800 s Deceleration time 121s 75 30 Quick ramp mode Enables the quick ramp mode with quick ramp set 1 or both quick ramp set 1 and set 2 Quick ramp set 1 consists of 75 31 Quick ramp acc1 and 5 32 Quick ramp dec1 Qui
337. p speed is reduced to the speed defined by 81 08 Inlet forced ref Measured inlet pressure 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly 1 I 1 81 03 Al in low level i Time Speed reference 81 08 Inlet forced ref Time 06 20 Pump status word bit 16 I i i Time 08 21 Pump alarm word bit 2 1 08 21 Pump alarm word bit 4 81 02 Al measure inlet Selects the analog input or signal source for pump inlet pressure measurement 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 120 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 02 13 AI5 scaled see page 120 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 81 03 Al in low level Pressure limit for primary inlet pressure supervision See parameter 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl bar 290 Parameters 81 04 Very low ctrl Enables the secondary supervision of pump inlet pressure and selects the action taken after very low inlet pressure is detected The selected action is taken only after the measured pressure has remained below the pressure limit 81 05 Al in very low for longer than the value of parameter 81 07 Inlet ctrl dly See the diagram at parameter 81 01 Inlet prot ctrl Note With a pressure switch this parameter has no effect Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive PA 1 Stop Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive The 2 drive will restart if the pressure rises above the lim
338. peed pm__ REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 250 07 02 Motor speed REAL 32 1000 100 2ms 07 03 Output frequency REAL 32 30000 3000 Hz 2ms 07 04 Motor current REAL 32 0 3000 A Om 07 05 Motor current REAL 16 0 1000 2ms 07 06 Motortorue REAL 16 1600 1600 2ms 07 07 Do voltage REAL 32 0 2000 V 2ms 07 14 Motorspeedes REAL 32 30000 30000 mm 2ms 07 15 Temp inverter REAL24 16 40 160 2ms 07 17 MotortempT REAL 16 10 280 C om 07 18 Motortemp2 3 REAL 16 10 280 C om EM E ML AS AE KC IU 0 100 i hp ens 10132 32 02147483847 kwh T ms GENE NENNEN 2147483647 07 26 On time counter NT32 32 0367913941 h oms 01 27 Run time counter INT32 32 0357913941 h oms 07 28 Fan on time R NT32 32 0387913941 h mms 07 28 Toranomseale mrs 92 0287088647 Nn 07 30 Polepairs NT 16 0 190 Mechtmeconst REAL 32 032787 s mm 07 32 TempphaseA REAL24 16 40 160 2ms 07 33 Temp phase B REAL24 16 40 10 2ms 07 34 Temp phase C REAC24 16 40 160 2ms 07 35 Savedenery INT32 32 02147483647 kWh T ms 07 36 Saved amount R INT32 32 0 2147a88647 moms
339. process actual value 1 Zero No source selected 02 05 Al1 scaled see page 120 1073742341 02 07 AI2 scaled see page 120 1073742343 02 09 AI3 scaled see page 120 1073742345 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 1073742347 02 13 AI5 scaled see page 120 1073742349 02 41 FBA act val see page 128 1073742377 02 43 Shared signal 1 see page 128 1073742379 05 05 Flow act see page 131 1073743109 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 me no o Sa 204 Parameters No Name Value 28 03 Act val 2 src Zero Al1 scaled Al2 scaled Al3 scaled Al4 scaled Al5 scaled FBA procact Shared sig1 Flow act Pointer 28 04 Act val func Act1 Add Sub Ul lt lt zZ 5 5 x Sqrt sub Sqrt add 28 05 Act max val 0 00 32768 00 28 06 Act unit sel as m3 h ar kPa GPM f inHg mbar inH2O in wg S E mE O 02 09 A12 scaled see page 120 02 11 Al4 scaled see page 120 Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Defines how the final process actual value is calculated from the two sources selected by parameters 28 02 Act val 1 src and 28 03 Act val 2 src The actual value is determined by parameter 28 01 Act val 1 2 sel Actual value scaling The setting equals 100 of process setpoint and is typically set to the value that corresponds to the top end of the sensor range setpoin
340. ption If the fault still occurs contact your local ABB representative 0312 UFF OVERSIZE UFF file is too big Contact your local ABB representative 0x6300 0313 UFF EOF UFF file structure failure Update the drive firmware 0x6300 If the problem persists contact your local ABB representative 0314 TECH LIB INTERFACE Incompatible firmware Check the compatibility of the firmware 0x6100 interface version Note This fault cannot be If the problem persists contact your local reset ABB representative 0315 RESTORE FILE Restoration of backed up Contact your local ABB representative 0x630D parameters failed 0316 DAPS MISMATCH Mismatch between JCU Contact your local ABB representative 0x5484 Control Unit firmware and power unit logic versions 0317 SOLUTION FAULT Fault generated by function Check the usage of the 0x6200 block SOLUTION FAULT in SOLUTION FAULT block in the the solution program application program 0318 MENU HIDING Menu hiding file missing or Reload application corrupted Contact your local ABB representative 0401 PIPEFILL TOUT Maximum allowed time for Check the pump system OxB000 the Pipefill function Check parameters 81 28 81 35 08 20 Pump fault word b7 exceeded 0402 MIN FLOW Measured flow below Check the pump system for reasons 0xB001 minimum limit such as leaks that might cause a loss of 08 20 Pump fault word bO measured flow Check parameters 81 18 81 24 0403 MAX
341. ption FbEq 99 07 Mot nom voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage as fundamental phase to phase rms voltage supplied to the motor at the nominal operating point This setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor Notes he stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the drive and the supply his parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 1 6 2 x UN Nominal voltage of the motor 1021V 99 08 Mot nom freq Defines the nominal motor frequency Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 5 0 500 0 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor 10 1 Hz 99 09 Mot nom speed Defines the nominal motor speed The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor Notes For safety reasons after ID run the maximum and minimum speed limits parameters 20 01 and 20 02 are automatically set to 1 2 times the value of this parameter This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 30000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor 1 1 rpm 99 10 Mot nom power Defines the nominal motor power The setting must match the value on the rating plate of the motor If multiple motors are connected to the drive enter the total power of the motors The unit is selected by parameter 16 17 Power unit Note This parameter cannot be changed while the
342. r the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake up delay has passed 62 Program features Setpoint Sleep boost time 77 08 y Control panel EE BOOSTING Sleep boost step 77 06 Time Selected process Wake up delay actual value 77 11 Wake up level 77 10 MEE A MEE Time Signal selected by 77 02 for example motor speed fsa Sleep delay 77 04 Control panel SLEEPING i i lt fsd l Sleep level No f NL LL ou 77 03 Time STOP START Note The sleep function works only in external control location EXT2 Settings Parameter group 77 Pump sleep page 271 Diagnostics Parameters 04 26 Wake up level page 130 06 02 Status word2 page 134 06 20 Pump status word page 137 and 08 21 Pump alarm word page 143 Program features 63 E Soft pipefill Filling up an empty system using normal PID control would cause a sudden pressure peak To avoid this a soft pipefill function is available This involves running the pump at a lower speed until a predefined threshold of process actual value for example measured pressure is achieved If a specified increase in the actual value is not achieved within a specified time pump speed is stepped up This is repeated until the process actual value reaches the t
343. rameters 04 20 04 22 04 02 Setpoint Final setpoint reference value after selection see parameter group 29 Setpoint sel The unit and scaling are defined by parameters 28 06 Act unit sel and 28 07 Act FBA scaling respectively See also parameters 04 23 04 25 04 04 Process PID err Process PID error i e difference between PID setpoint and 10 lt 1 actual value 04 05 Process PID out Output of the process PID controller 10 7 196 04 06 Process var1 Process variable 1 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 07 Process var2 Process variable 2 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 08 Process var3 Process variable 3 See parameter group 35 Process 1000 1 variable 04 09 Counter ontime1 Reading of on time counter 1 See parameter 44 01 Ontime1 func Can be reset by entering a O using the DriveStudio PC tool 04 10 Counter ontime2 Reading of on time counter 2 See parameter group 44 05 1271s Ontime2 func Can be reset by entering a O using the DriveStudio PC tool 121 04 11 Counter edge Reading of rising edge counter 1 See parameter group 44 09 Edge count1 func Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool 04 12 Counter edge2 Reading of rising edge counter 2 See parameter group 121 44 14 Edge count2 func Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool 130 Parameters 04 13 Counter value Reading of value counter 1 See parameter grou
344. re you start working with the drive How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the RESET key on the control panel or PC tool or by switching the supply voltage off for a while When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted A fault can also be reset from an external source selected by parameter 10 10 Fault reset sel 336 Fault tracing Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the fault logger with a time stamp The fault history stores information on the 16 latest faults of the drive Three of the latest faults are stored at the beginning of a power switch off Parameters 08 01 Active fault and 08 02 Last fault store the fault codes of the most recent faults Selected active faults are shown by 08 20 Pump fault word Alarms can be monitored via alarm words 08 05 Alarm logger1 08 18 Alarm word4 and 08 21 Pump alarm word Alarm information is lost at power switch off or fault reset Alarm messages generated by the drive Code Alarm fieldbus code Cause What to do other information SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A 08 05 Alarm logger1 b3 Programmable alarm 30 07 Sto diagnostic STO MODE CHANGE OxFF7A 08 05 Alarm logger1 b4 MOTOR TEMPERATURE 0x4310 08 05 Alarm logger1 b5 Programmable alarm 31 01 Mot temp1 prot EMERGENCY OFF OxF083 08 05 Alarm logger1 b6 RUN ENABLE OxFF54 08 05 Alarm logger1 b7 Safe torque off function is active i e safety circuit s
345. ref2 sel 13 Analogue inputs Analog input signal processing 13 01 Al filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1 76 y Unfiltered signal in led signal m T x 1 _ ell filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant Note The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware approximately 0 25 ms time constant This cannot be changed by any parameter 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 13 02 AIT max Defines the maximum value for analog input Al1 The input type current or voltage is selected a jumper on the JCU Control Unit see the Hardware Manual of the drive See also parameter 13 31 Al tune 22 000 22 000 Maximum Al1 value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 03 Al1 min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al1 The input type current or voltage is selected with a jumper on the JCU Control Unit see the Hardware Manual of the drive 22 000 22 000 Minimum Al1 value 1000 1 unit mA or 11 000 11 000 V 154 Parameters 13 04 Al1 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al1 value defined by parameter 13 02 Al1 max Al scaled 32 68 000 Real value corresponding to maximum Al1 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 05 AIT min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al1 value defined by parameter 13 03 A17 min S
346. requency see page 116 1073742083 Current 1073742084 Current 96 01 05 Motor current see page 1168 1073742085 mS I 01 04 Motor current see page 118 Torque 01 06 Motor torque see page 1168 1073742086 Dc voltage 01 07 Dc voltage see page 116 1073742087 Proc PID out 04 05 Process PID out see page 129 1073742853 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 35 09 Signal2 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35 13 Proc var2 max 04 07 Process var2 35 10 35 09 Signal selected by 35 08 Signal2 param 32768 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process 1 1 variable 2 value 35 10 Signal2 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35 14 Proc var2 min See diagram at parameter 35 09 Signal2 max 32768 32 68 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process 1 variable 2 value 35 11 Proc var2 dispf Scaling for process variable 2 This setting also scales the value for fieldbus L3 AAA 10 1 100 1 1000 1 10000 1 100000 1 Parameters 225 35 12 Proc var2 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04 07 Process var2 process variable 2 0 98 See parameter 35 05 Proc var1 unit 121 35 13 Proc var2 max Maximum value for process variable 2 See diagram at parameter 35 09 S
347. resentative ACQ810 manuals Firmware Manual ACQ810 Standard Pump Control Program Ka en 3AUA0000055144 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE 2013 11 20 2013 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved Table of contents 5 Table of contents 1 About the manual What this chapter contains rns 11 COMPAUDINY sch cccduerwdinene does cu eevee etaieevekuns veeeuetadecvevescss aes 11 Salely IMSTUCIONS e cobarde 95 RES usura inca bates rra ratico ES 11 o nn 11 Elo 1115 1 1 IP uaxcmeorssasuoea Uere Raus aw EENE ERASE NEEE eR cee 12 Terms a a aDDIeviallOfiS ua 25g Ei wk vu RE EGRE SUB EG ER ARS d TRE SS Sq Ea E dees 12 2 The ACQ810 control panel What this chapter contains mcus A P P lre eile le sessios sns s rtr riren ecos ap a a ea a MPEG EXTIFEORE SE Mechanical installation Electrical installation llli re E TTT EI NE Z R R TRT TRE MEN M Operating instructions llle RR ran Basics of operation els Ai E PART RUPES EESESE NEUE NUR V PG M RS S S990 S9 dr OO Help and panel version Any mode cliens 21 Basic operations Any mode ees 22 PULO rr rPPU 23 O 2 2xca vuco que E dr veg NE poU ua eae we E mg de bee ode ates Eg died ap aries 25 A SISAN og beds Gu os ba eee eee oo es 6H eee ewe pe eee eee ans a aba P 32 Changed Parameters 0 00 ee eee ee eee eee 33 FaU LOGGET PPP 35 Time
348. rgency stop overrides normal ramp stop bit 5 126 Parameters No Bi Name Value Information TP continued Reserved P Remote ET Fieldbus control enabled aa Fieldbus control disabled ame out faa output of Ramp Function Generator to zero The drive ramps to a stop current and DC voltage limits are ud ore n hold r ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 0 No action Ramp in O MINES orce input of Ramp Function Generator to zero No action und Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2 Switch to external control location EXT1 m AA Activate start inhibit m start inhibit Local ctl EN local control for Control Word Used when the drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local fieldbus Local fieldbus Transfer to fieldbus local control control through Control Word or reference Fieldbus steals the control e Panel or PC tool Transfer to local control 0 Request external control external control O ope ref Request fieldbus local control 0 No fieldbus local control m 2 Reserved 28 CW B28 Freely programmable control bits See parameters 29 CW B29 90 08 50 11 30 owes s Parameters 127 02 37 EFB main sw Internal Status word of the drive to be sent through the embedded fieldbus interface See chapter Control through the embedded fieldbus interface on page 355 Name Value Information Ready 1 Drive is ready to re
349. riate parameter group LOC Y PARAMETERS Current value of each parameter is shown below its 1001 Extl start func name Inl 1002 Extl start inl 1003 Ext1 start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the parameter 10 02 Ext1 start in with keys LOC amp PARAMETERS C A and Cw 1001 Extl start func 1002 Ext1 mE 1n1 DI 1003 Ext1 start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC PAR EDIT 1002 Ext1 start inl P 02 01 00 CANCEL 00 00 SEL Specify a new value with keys A and S Y7 The text below the cursor shows the corresponding parameter group index and bit Press to accept any of the preselected values and to return to the parameters list To freely define a bit of a binary parameter as the value choose Pointer and press Ew The parameter group index and bit will be shown Select the parameter group with CA and amp Ww 7 The text below the cursor displays the currently selected parameter group NEXT Press to select the parameter index Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting Press to select the bit Again the text below the cursor reflects the current setting save the new value for the pointer parameter press The new value is shown in the parameters list The ACQ810 control panel 29 LOC C PAR EDIT 1002 Ext1 start inl P 02 03 03 CANCEL 00 00 SEL LOC B PARAMETERS 1002 Ext1 start inl DIO4 1003 Extl start 1n2 1004 Ex
350. rithm JCU is connected to the power unit Relay output interface for a digital output signal Implemented with a relay Safe torque off Firmware of the ACQ810 drive Uninterruptible power supply power supply equipment with battery to maintain output voltage during power failure 14 About the manual The ACQ810 control panel 15 The ACQ810 control panel What this chapter contains This chapter describes the features and operation of the ACQ810 control panel The control panel can be used to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters Features e alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help e real time clock 16 The ACQ810 control panel Installation E Mechanical installation For mounting options see the Hardware Manual of the drive Instructions for mounting the control panel onto a cabinet door are available in ACS CP U Control Panel IP54 Mounting Platform Kit Installation Guide 3AUA0000049072 English E Electrical installation Use a CATS5 straight through network cable with a maximum length of 3 meters Suitable cables are available from ABB For the control panel connector location on the drive see the Hardware Manual of the drive The ACQ810 control panel 17 Layout 49
351. rive module for dust pick up Clean whenever necessary 0067 FPGA ERROR Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative 0x5401 0068 FPGA ERROR2 Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative 0x5402 0069 ADC ERROR Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative 0x5403 0070 TEMP MEAS FAILURE Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative temperature measurement of the drive 0x4211 350 Fault tracing Fault fieldbus code 0071 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 EFB COMM 0x7540 T2 OVERLOAD 0x0201 T3 OVERLOAD 0x6100 T4 OVERLOAD 0x6100 T5 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A1 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A2 OVERLOAD 0x6100 A1 INIT FAULT 0x6100 A2 INIT FAULT 0x6100 STACK ERROR 0x6100 Embedded fieldbus interface has been taken into use and there is a communication break between the drive and the master station The drive CPU is overloaded Firmware time level 2 overload Note This fault cannot be reset The drive CPU is overloaded Firmware time level 3 overload Note This fault cannot be reset The drive CPU is overloaded Firmware time level 4 overload Note This fault cannot be reset The drive CPU is overloaded Firmware time level 5 overload Note This fault cannot be reset Application time level 1 fault Note This fault cannot be reset Application time level 2 fault Note This fault
352. rot ctrl Enables disables the Application profile protection function based on long term monitoring of an internal signal If the selected signal exceeds and remains above the supervision limit longer than the delay set by parameter 81 27 Prof limit dly the alarm PROFILE HIGH is generated and 08 21 Pump alarm word bit 6 set to 1 Application profile protection disabled PID error Signal 04 04 Process PID err compared to value of parameter 87 26 Prof limit PID out Signal 04 05 Process PID out compared to value of parameter 87 26 Prof limit 294 Parameters h 81 28 Pipefill enable Enables disables or selects a signal source that enables disables the Pipefill function when the drive is started 1 Enable Pipefill function If the signal is removed before Pipefill is completed Pipefill is aborted and normal PID control enabled 1073807873 1073873409 1073938945 Pipefill function disabled DI1 The status of digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073742337 status bit 0 determines whether the Pipefill function is enabled or disabled The status of digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI enabled or disabled The status of digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 determines whether the Pipefill function is enabled or disabled status bit 3 determines whether the Pipefill function is enabled or disabled Pipefill function enabled 1 DI2 status bit 1 determines whether the
353. rror value PS n dha n gt e Error value Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 250 us Ae Error value change between two samples 0 000 10 000 s Derivation time for speed controller 1000 1s 23 04 Derv filt time Defines the derivation filter time constant See parameter 23 03 Derivation time 0 0 1000 0 ms Derivation filter time constant 10 1ms Parameters 191 No Name Value Description FbEq 23 05 Acc comp DerTime Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration compensation In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 23 03 Derivation time Note As a general rule set this parameter to a value between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed Acceleration compensation Speed reference Actual speed 23 06 Acc comp Ftime Defines the derivation filter time constant for the acceleration deceleration compensation See parameters 23 03 Derivation time and 23 05 Acc comp DerTime 0 0 1000 0 ms Derivation filter time consta
354. rs No Name Value Power motor SpRef unramp SpRef ramped SpRef used TorqRef used Process act Proc PID out Pointer 33 07 Superv2 hi 32768 00 32768 00 33 08 Superv2 lo 32768 00 32768 00 33 09 Superv3 func Disabled High Abs Low Abs High 33 10 Superv3 act Speed rom Speed Frequency Current Current Torque Dc voltage Power inu Power motor SpRef unramp SpRef ramped SpRef used TorqRef used E O Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page A Selects the upper limit for supervision 2 See parameter 33 05 Superv2 func Upper limit for supervision 2 Selects the lower limit for supervision 2 See parameter 33 05 Superv2 func Lower limit for supervision 2 Selects the mode of supervision 3 Supervision 3 not in use When the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv3 act falls below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv3 act falls below the value of parameter 33 12 Superv3 lo bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter 33 10 Superv2 act exceeds the value of parameter 33 11 Superv3 hi bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status is activated para
355. rsion information of the active application program BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM Version information of the application program template STANDARD LIBRARY Version information of the standard library TECHNOLOGY LIBRARY Not applicable to the ACQ810 POWER UNIT SERNO Serial number of the power stage JPU MEM UNIT HW SERNO Serial number in manufacturing the memory unit JMU MEM UNIT CONFIG SERNO Serial number in configuring the memory unit JMU EXI Press CZ to return to the Main menu LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC DRIVE INFO DRIVE NAME DRIVE TYPE ACQ810 DRIVE MODEL EXIT 00 00 LOC DRIVE INFO Fw VERSION UIFQ 2010 0 SOLUTION PROGRAM BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM EXIT 00 00 The ACQ810 control panel 51 E Parameter Change Log In the Parameter Change Log option you can e view latest parameter changes made via control panel or PC tool e edit these parameters e Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view latest parameter changes and edit parameters Go to the Main menu by pressing E wi if you areinthe LOC T MAIN MENU 1 Output mode Otherwise press ESP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Zi Go to the Parameter Change Log option by selecting LOC ME S S AG E PAR CHG LOG on the menu with keys A and NO G
356. rve freq5 Defines the frequency at the 5th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 08 Mot nom freq 1 50096 5th point frequency 38 09 U f curve volt1 Defines the voltage at the 1st point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 20096 1st point voltage 232 Parameters No 38 10 UT curve volt2 Defines the voltage at the 2nd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 200 2nd point voltage 38 11 UIT curve volt3 Defines the voltage at the 3rd point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 200 3rd point voltage 38 12 UIT curve volt4 Defines the voltage at the 4th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 38 13 UIT curve volt5 Defines the voltage at the 5th point on the custom U f curve in percent of parameter 99 07 Mot nom voltage 0 200 5th point voltage 38 16 Flux ref pointer Selects the source of the flux reference d Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 0 200 4th point voltage 40 Motor control Motor control settings such as performance noise optimization slip gain voltage reserve and IR compensation 40 01 Motor noise An optimization setting for balancing between control performance and motor noise level Cyclic Control performance optimized for cyclic load applications Note With this setting the
357. s process PID controller output DIA Activation of digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073938945 status bit 3 freezes process PID controller output DI5 Activation of digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 07 DI 1074004481 status bit 4 freezes process PID controller output Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page i 27 32 Pipefill ref acc Defines the time for the PID setpoint increase from O to NEM 100 O 100s PID setpoint acceleration time 1721s 1721s 27 33 Pipefill ref dec Defines the time for the PID setpoint decrease from 100 to 0 O 100s PID setpoint deceleration time 27 34 PID bal ena Selects a source that enables the PID balancing reference see parameter 27 35 PID bal ref 1 PID balancing reference enabled DI1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O 1073742337 DI2 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 DI3 Digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 1073873409 DIA Digital input DIA as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Parameters 203 Digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page da 27 35 PID bal ref Defines the PID balancing reference The PID controller output is set to this value when the source selected by parameter 27 35 PID bal ref is 1 32768 0 PID balancing reference 10 7
358. s set to receive the Run enable signal from the fieldbus this bit activates the signal Inhibit operation Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED RAND OUT _ 1 Normal operation Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION ZERO GENERATOR OUTPUT ENABLED INHIBIT _ OPERATION Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED Logd Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP IN 1 Normal operation Proceed to OPERATING ZERO Note This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters 0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 366 Control through the embedded fieldbus interface STATE Description 7 RESET 0221 Fault reset if an active fault exists Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Note This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is set as the source for this signal by drive parameters NS Continue normal operation 89 Reserved CMD Control word lt gt 0 or Reference lt gt 0 Retain last Control word and Reference Control word O and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL_ 1 Select External Control Location EXT2 Effective if control LOC location is parameterized to be selected from fieldbus Select External Control Location
359. se the parameter was read only 11 Last parameter access was not successful because the parameter or group did not exist 12 14 Reserved 15 Last write was not successful because only one register was used to read a 32 bit value 16 31 Reserved 0x0000 0xFFFF Data word hex 58 16 Received packets Shows the number of message packets received by the drive including only such packets that are addressed to the drive Note The user can reset the counter by setting the value to 0 N Bo y a MEE Dd LEE Shows the number of message packets sent by the drive Note The user can reset the counter by setting the value to 0 Shows the total number of message packets received by the drive including all packets addressed to any valid node on the fieldbus link Note The user can reset the counter by setting the value to O 98 19 UART errors Shows the number of messages with communication errors other than CRC errors which the drive has received e g UART buffer overflow errors Read only 0 65535 No of messages with errors excluding messages with CRC 1 1 errors 58 20 CRC errors Shows the number of messages with Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors which the drive has received Read only Note High electromagnetic noise levels may generate errors 0 65535 No of messages with CRC errors 1 58 21 Raw CW LSW Shows the LSW part of the Control Word which the drive receives from the Modbus master
360. select 02 22 FBA main cw Forfieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface select 02 36 EFB main cw Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 50 20 Fb main sw func Selects the rule on the basis of which the drive defines the value for 02 24 FBA main sw bit 1 Enabled 1 Parameter only Bit 1 of 02 24 FBA main sw is set to 1 whenever the external run enable signal par 10 11 Run enable is 1 O Param AND Fb cw Bit 1 of 02 24 FBA main sw is set to 1 whenever both the external run enable signal par 10 11 Run enable AND 02 22 FBA main cw bit 7 Run enable are 1 Run enable func Parameters 245 No Name Value Description FbEq 50 21 Comm loss enable Activates fieldbus communication monitoring for control location EXT1 or EXT2 or both The drive can detect a fieldbus communication break ONLY when it is in a control location where the monitoring is enabled The action taken in the case of a detected communication break is defined by parameter 50 02 Comm loss func When both control locations are selected the monitoring is always done The functionality does not take into account if the fieldbus is actually used for start stop reference and so on The communication is not monitored in the local control mode By default the monitoring is enabled in both control locations as a safety measure Communication break monitoring disabled in control location EXT 1
361. set load save parameter change log reset parameter list settings unit of power selection application macro display Speed scaling feedback and supervision settings Drive operation limits Speed reference source selection and processing Speed reference and emergency stop OFF3 ramp settings Speed controller settings Configuration of critical speeds or ranges of speed that are avoided due to for example mechanical resonance problems Constant speed selection and values Configuration of process PID control Process actual value feedback settings Process setpoint reference settings Selection and modification of process variables for display as parameters 04 06 04 08 Configuration of timers Flux reference and U f curve settings Motor control settings such as performance noise optimization slip gain voltage reserve and IR compensation Page 118 119 129 129 130 133 138 43 1 144 150 152 153 159 170 76 1 180 182 184 186 188 196 197 199 203 205 207 209 214 214 218 220 226 231 232 44 Maintenance 45 Energy optimising 47 Voltage ctrl 49 Data storage 50 Fieldbus 51 FBA settings 52 FBA data in 53 FBA data out 56 Panel display 58 Embedded Modbus 64 Load analyzer 5 Pump logic 6 MF communication Pump sleep 8 Pump autochange 9 Level control 80 Flow calculation 81 Pump protection 82 Pump cleaning 83 Energy monitoring
362. set to Output See parameter 14 04 DIO1 Ton 0 0 10 3000 0 s Off deactivation delay for DIO1 when set as an output 1 3 GREEN O or frequency input Oupa Ios used asa E CN mu ITESO CN Feqowpu D102 is used as a frequency output GREEN 7 7 ET NN when 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Output Parameters 161 Started Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073874433 Running Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Alarm Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074202113 Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074267649 Fault 1 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer He 14 08 DIO2 Ton Defines the on activation delay for digital input output DIO2 when 74 06 DIO2 conf is set to Output Drive status lil I 1 0 DIO2 status 0 14 08 DIO2 Ton 14 09 DIO2 Toff 0 0 3000 0 s On activation delay for DIO2 when set as an output 10 14 09 DIO2 Toff Defines the off deactivation delay for digital input output DIO2 when 14 06 DIO2 conf is set to Output See parameter 14 08 DIO2 Ton 0 0 3000 0 s Off deactivation delay for DIO2 when set as an output 14 10 DIO3 conf Selects whether DIO3 is used as a digital output or digital input Output DIO3 is used as a digital output m 162 Parameters No Name Value 14 11 DIO3 out src Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Faul
363. sh Switched supply and motor cabling parameter 30 06 The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been switched for example if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive The parameter selects if a fault is generated or not Stall protection parameters 30 09 30 12 The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits current frequency and time and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition E Automatic fault reset The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below minimum faults By default automatic resets are off and must be separately activated by the user Settings Parameter group 32 Automatic reset page 214 Diagnostics Parameter 08 07 Alarm logger3 page 139 86 Program features Diagnostics E Energy savings calculator This feature consists of three functionalities e An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total efficiency is maximized Acounter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in KWh currency or volume of CO emission and Aload analyzer showing the load profile of the drive see section Load analyzer on page 86 Note The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 4
364. source of setpoint reference for the PID controller Setpoint 04 25 Setpoint val 6 see page 130 1073742873 Pointer Value pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 27 12 PID gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller See parameter 27 13 PID integ time 0 00 100 00 Gain for PID controller 200 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 27 13 PID integ time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller Error Controller output controller input error O controller output G gain Ti integration time 0 00 320 00 s Integration time 100 1s Gocis 7 27 14 PID deriv time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller The derivative component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values Ex 4 and Ex according to the following formula PID DERIV TIME x Ex Ex 4 Ts in which Ts 12 ms sample time E Error Process setpoint process actual value A 27 15 PID deriv filter Defines the time constant of the 1 pole filter used to smooth the derivative component of the process PID controller 0 a Unfiltered signal Filtered signal 1 x 1 X ell filter input step O filter output t time T filter time constant 0 00 10 00 s Filter time constant 100 1s Parameters 201 27 16 PID error inv PID error inversion When the source selected by this parameter is
365. src Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision 1 Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 22 DIO6 conf Output Input 14 23 DIO6 out src Ready Enabled Started Running Parameters 163 Description FbEq Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073874435 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073939971 Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073743373 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073808909 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 779 Selects whether DIOS is used as a digital output or input DIOS is used as a digital output DIOS is used as a digital input Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO5 when 14 18 DIOS conf is set to Output Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074202113 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074267649 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074398721 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074529793 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1073874434 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1073939970 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status
366. ss PID controller input DI3 Activation of digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073873409 status bit 2 freezes process PID controller input Activation of digital input DIA as indicated by 02 07 DI 1073938945 status bit 3 freezes process PID controller input Activation of digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1074004481 status bit 4 freezes process PID controller input Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page l X 202 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 27 31 Pid out freeze Freezes or defines a source that can be used to freeze the output of the process PID controller This feature can be used when for example a sensor providing process feedback must be serviced without stopping the process The output of the PID controller is frozen as long as the selected source is 1 See also parameter 27 30 Pid ref freeze 27 01 PID setpoint sel 27 12 27 13 27 14 27 15 27 16 27 18 27 19 Process actual value group 28 Procact sel Process PID controller output not frozen Freeze Process PID controller output frozen 1 DI1 Activation of digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073742337 status bit 0 freezes process PID controller output DI2 Activation of digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 07 DI 1073807873 status bit 1 freezes process PID controller output DI3 Activation of digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI 1073873409 status bit 2 freeze
367. stalled on the drive Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors connected to the first available analog input and analog output on I O extensions installed on the drive 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Defines the alarm limit for motor thermal protection 1 when parameter 37 01 Mot temp1 prot is set to either Alarm or Fault 0 200 C Motor overtemperature alarm limit 121 31 04 Mot temp1 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 1 when parameter 31 01 Mot temp1 prot is set to Fault 0 200 C Motor overtemperature fault limit 31 05 Mot temp2 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor temperature protection 2 Motor temperature protection 2 inactive Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP2 0x4313 when the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim S e O N C 1 C 1 l Parameters 211 Fault The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP2 0x4313 or trips 2 on fault MOTOR TEMP2 0x4313 when the temperature exceeds the alarm fault level defined by parameter 31 07 Mot temp2 almLim 31 08 Mot temp2 fltLim whichever is lower A faulty temperature sensor or wiring will trip the drive 31 06 Mot temp
368. start and stop the drive through control location EXT1 set parameter 10 01 to FBA and keep parameter 12 01 to its default value C FALSE SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION 21 01 Speed ref1 sel EFB ref1 or oelects a reference received through the EFB ref2 embedded fieldbus interface as the speed reference ref1 of the drive 21 02 Speed ref2 sel EFB ref1 or oelects a reference received through the EFB ref2 embedded fieldbus interface as the speed reference ref2 of the drive Note To control the drive speed with the Embedded fieldbus reference REF1 set parameter 21 01 to EFB reri and keep parameter 72 07 to its default value C FALSE REFERENCE SCALING 50 04 FBA ref1 Raw data Defines the fieldbus reference REF1 scaling modesel Speed Selects also the fieldbus actual signal act1 when set to Speed 50 05 FBA ref2 Raw data Defines the fieldbus reference REF2 scaling modesel Speed Selects also the fieldbus actual signal act2 when set to Speed ACTUAL VALUE ACT1 AND ACT 2 SELECTION if 50 04 or 50 05 has value Raw data 50 06 FBA act1 tr src Any oelects the source for fieldbus actual value act1 when parameter 50 04 FBA ref1 modesel is set to Raw data Control through the embedded fieldbus interface 361 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 50 07 FBA act2 tr src Any Selects the source for fieldbus actual value act2 when parameter 50 05 FBA ref2 modesel is set to Raw data SYSTEM CONTRO
369. sw Displays the application program revision of ve the adapter module Note In the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module the parameter group number is 1 or A for parameters 51 01 51 26 TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION see also page 246 52 01 FBA data in1 4 6 Defines the data transmitted from drive to 92 12 FBA data 14 16 fieldbus controller in12 101 9999 Note If the selected data is 32 bits long two parameters are reserved for the transmission 51 31 D2FBA comm sta K 53 01 FBA data out1 1 3 Defines the data transmitted from fieldbus 93 12 FBA data 11 13 controller to drive out12 1001 9999 Note If the selected data is 32 bits long two parameters are reserved for the transmission Note In the User s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module the parameter group number is 2 or B for parameters 52 01 52 12 and 3 or C for parameters 53 01 53 12 After the module configuration parameters have been set the drive control parameters see section Drive control parameters below must be checked and adjusted when necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time before powering off the drive wait at least 1 minute or when parameter 51 27 FBA par refresh is activated Control through a fieldbus adapter 387 Drive control parameters The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or des
370. t O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive trips on fault STALL 0x7121 upon a stall condition 30 10 Stall curr lim Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the motor See parameter 30 09 Stall function 0 0 1600 0 Stall current limit 10 2 196 30 11 Stall freq hi Stall frequency limit See parameter 30 09 Stall function Note Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended 0 5 1000 0 Hz Stall frequency limit 10 1 Hz 30 12 Stall time Stall time See parameter 30 09 Stall function MI 0 3600 s Stall time 31 Motor therm prot Motor temperature measurement and thermal protection settings 31 01 Mot temp1 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is detected by motor thermal protection 1 Ena sup Enable supervision 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Supervision enabled 2 Motor thermal protection 1 inactive Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE 0x4310 if the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim Fault The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE 0x4310 or trips on fault MOTOR OVERTEMP 0x4310 if the temperature exceeds the alarm fault level defined by parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 almLim 31 03 Mot temp1 almLim whichever is lower A faulty temperature sensor or wiring will trip the drive 210 Parameters 31 02 Mot temp src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor thermal protection
371. t Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision 1 Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 14 DIO4 conf Output Input 14 15 DIO4 out src Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Description Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO3 when 14 10 DIOS conf is set to Output Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 ne o see page 133 Sa see page 733 see page 133 ne e e Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page
372. t Typically the measured quantity is selected 1073742341 1073742343 1073742345 1073742347 1073742349 1073742377 1073742379 1073743109 100 1 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 0 2 3 4 5 9 4 5 58 59 60 Parameters 205 d n n 28 07 Act FBA scaling Defines a divisor for process actual value for fieldbus This parameter can be used to improve calculation accuracy at low and high values 29 Setpoint sel Process setpoint reference settings 29 01 Setpoint 1 2 sel Selects the process setpoint 1 or 2 Alternatively selects a source whose status determines which process setpoint is used 0 Setpoint 1 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1 selected Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2 selected 1 Status of digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1073742337 0 determines which process setpoint is selected Status of digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 determines which process setpoint is selected DI3 Status of digital input DI3 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 2 determines which process setpoint is selected 1073807873 1073873409 Status of digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1073938945 3 determines which process setpoint is selected Status of digital input DI5 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1074004481 4 determines which process setpoint is selected Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 02 09 AI3
373. t hi level for longer than the value of parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly The pressure can be measured using an analog pressure sensor or a pressure switch The input for an analog sensor is defined by parameter 81 10 Al meas outlet With an analog sensor a separate action for very high outlet pressure can be defined using parameter 81 13 Al out very high The input for a pressure switch is defined by parameter 81 14 DI status outlet Not used Primary outlet pressure supervision not used Parameters 291 Alarm Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm afterthe 1 delay defined by parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly expires Fault Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive after the 2 delay defined by parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly expires Protect Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm after the 3 delay defined by parameter 81 15 Outlet ctr dly expires The pump speed is reduced to the speed defined by 81 16 Outlet force ref within the time defined by parameter 81 17 Protect dec time Measured outlet pressure 81 15 Outlet ctr dly 81 13 Al out very high Time Speed reference 81 17 Protect dec time 81 16 Outlet force ref Time 06 20 Pump status word bit 15 I l I Time 08 21 Pump alarm word bit 3 i i Time 1 08 21 Pump alarm word bit 5 Time 81 10 Al meas outlet Selects the analog input or signal source for pump outlet pressure measurement 02 05
374. t max sp 0 000 10 000 Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed 1000 1 Parameters 195 No Name Value Description FbEq 23 20 Pl tune mode Activates the speed controller autotune function The autotune will automatically set parameters 23 01 Proport gain and 23 02 Integration time as well as 01 31 Mech time const If the User autotune mode is chosen also 23 07 Speed err Ftime is automatically set The status of the autotune routine is shown by parameter 06 03 Speed ctrl stat WARNING The motor will reach the torque and current limits during the autotune routine ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE AUTOTUNE ROUTINE Notes Before using the autotune function the following parameters should be set All parameters adjusted during the start up as described in the ACQ810 04 drive modules Start up Guide 19 01 Speed scaling 19 03 MotorSpeed filt 19 06 Zero speed limit Speed reference ramp settings in group 22 Speed ref ramp e 23 07 Speed err Ftime The drive must be in local control mode and stopped before an autotune is requested After requesting an autotune with this parameter start the drive within 20 seconds Wait until the autotune routine is completed this parameter has reverted to the value Done The routine can be aborted by stopping the drive Check the values of the parameters set by the autotune function See also section Speed controller tuning on page
375. t2 act 1 External control EXT2 is active O External control EXT 1 is active Local fb 1 Fieldbus local control is active eo par p Fieldbus local control is inactive 10 Fault 1 Fault is active See chapter Fault tracing T E No fault is active panel 0 Local control is inactive Fault 1 1 No fault is active 0 Fault is active See chapter Fault tracing 13 15 Reserved 134 Parameters 06 02 Status word2 Status word 2 of the drive Start act 1 7 Drive start command is active O Drive start command is inactive 1 Drive stop command is active 0 Drive stop command is inactive Ready relay 1 Ready to function run enable signal on no fault emergency stop signal off no ID run inhibition Connected by default to DIO1 by par 14 03 DIO1 Stop act out src O Not ready to function Modulating 1 Modulating IGBTs are controlled ie the drive is RUNNING O No modulation IGBTs are not controlled 1 Normal operation is enabled Running Drive follows the given reference 0 Normal operation is disabled Drive is not following the given reference eg in magnetization phase drive is modulating Ref running Reserved 1 Emergency stop OFF 1 is active 0 Emergency stop OFF1 is inactive 1 Maskable by par 12 01 Start inhibit start inhibit is active O No maskable start inhibit is active 1 Non maskable start inhibit is active
376. t2 start func 1005 Ext2 start inl EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC t PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl P 0P 01 00 02 I O values CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOCU PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl 0201 DI status CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC amp PAR EDIT 1002 Extl start inl P 02 01 9i 01 DI2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UL PARAMETERS 1003 Extl start 1n2 1004 Ext2 start func 1005 Ext2 start inl EXIT 00 00 EDIT 30 The ACQ810 control panel How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to fixed 0 FALSE or 1 TRUE The bit pointer parameter can be fixed to constant value of O FALSE or 1 TRUE When adjusting a bit pointer parameter on the control panel CONST is selected in order to fix the value to O displayed as C FALSE or 1 C TRUE Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the LOC R MAIN MENU 1 Output mode eS press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 o to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS L n the menu with keys AS and SY 2 and pressing OCU PAR ee 04 Appl values 05 Pump values EXIT 00 00 SEL 4 Select the appropriate parameter group with keys LA S LOC PAR GROUP 14 and S Y P Here the bit pointer parameter 14 07 DIO2 10 LM E r out src is used as an example 11 start stop mode 12 Operating mode 13 Analoque 1nputs EXIT 00 00 SEL SEL Press DE to select the appropriate parameter group LOC U
377. tal inputs with keys LA y and Press After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection You can scroll digital inputs and parameters with keys A and Cw INFO Press The panel shows information related to I O selected y this case DI1 You can scroll information with keys CA and SY 7 EXIT ua Press ES to return to the digital inputs LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UI O SETTINGS 1 Analog Outputs n Analog inputs Digital I Os ital inputs LOC UI O SETTINGS 4 Analog outputs Analog inputs Digital I Os 0 0 acu outputs EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U I O SETTINGS 1 EXtl start 1n 1010 Fault reset sel EXIT 00 00 INFO LOC t I O INFO al OF I O ITEMS di NUMBER NODE NUMBER EXIT 00 00 48 The ACQ810 control panel Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys lt 4 and S WV 7 You can edit the parameter INFO selection turns into EDIT selection EDIT Press E wl l Specify a new value for the setting with keys 4 and SIA Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value SEL To save the new value press lo cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ LOC UI O SETTINGS 1 DI1 1002 Extl start inl DI2 DI3 1010
378. ter This feature is especially useful as a service reminder There are three types of counters e Ontime counter Measures the time a digital source for example a bit in a status Word is on Rising edge counter This counter is incremented whenever the monitored digital source changes state from O to 1 e Value counter This counter measures by integration the monitored parameter An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak exceeds a user defined limit Settings Parameter group 44 Maintenance page 234 Diagnostics Parameters 04 09 04 14 page 129 and 06 15 Counter status page 136 88 Program features E Load analyzer Peak value logger The user can select a signal to be monitored by the peak value logger The logger records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred as well as motor current DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak Amplitude loggers The drive has two amplitude loggers For amplitude logger 2 the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running and specify a value that corresponds to 100 The collected samples are sorted into 10 read only parameters according to their amplitude Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points wide and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range Percentage of samples as as as as as as as as as as O O O O O O O
379. ter that points to the value of another actual signal or parameter A pointer value is given in the format P xx yy where xx parameter group yy parameter index 116 Parameters Summary of parameter groups 01 Actual values 02 I O values 03 Control values 04 Appl values 05 Pump values 06 Drive status 08 Alarms amp faults 09 System info 10 Start stop dir 11 Start stop mode 12 Operating mode 13 Analogue inputs 14 Digital I O 15 Analogue outputs 16 System 19 Speed calculation 20 Limits 21 Speed ref 22 Speed ref ramp 23 Speed ctrl 25 Critical speed 26 Constant speeds 2 Process PID 28 Procact sel 29 Setpoint sel 30 Fault functions 31 Motor therm prot 32 Automatic reset 33 Supervision 34 User load curve 35 Process variable 36 Timed functions 38 Flux ref 40 Motor control Drive type program revision and option slot occupation information Start stop direction run enable and emergency stop source selections start inhibit and start interlock configuration Start and stop modes magnetization settings DC hold configuration Selection of external control location and EXT2 operating mode Analog input signal processing Configuration of digital input outputs relay outputs the frequency input and the frequency output Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated through the analog outputs Local lock and parameter lock settings parameter restore user parameter
380. tering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool On time counter On time counter The counter runs when the drive is powered Can be reset by entering a O using the DriveStudio PC tool Run time counter Motor run time counter The counter runs when the inverter modulates Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool Note The drive logic uses this value for equalization of pump running duties See section Autochange page 64 01 28 Fan on time Running time of the drive cooling fan Can be reset by entering a 0 using the DriveStudio PC tool Parameters 119 01 29 Torq nom scale Nominal torque which corresponds to 100 Note This value is copied from parameter 99 12 Mot nom torque if entered Otherwise the value is calculated 01 30 Polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor 01 31 Mech time const Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as 1000 1 s determined by the speed controller autotune function See parameter group 23 Speed ctrl on page 188 01 32 Temp phase A Measured temperature of phase U power stage in percent of 10 1 fault limit 01 33 Temp phase B Measured temperature of phase V power stage in percent of 10 1 fault limit 01 34 Temp phase C Measured temperature of phase W power stage in percent of 10 1 fault limit 01 35 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct on line motor 1 1 kWh connection Note This value is derived from subtr
381. the drive to drive link Notes Each drive on the link must have a unique node number e Ifthe drive is not given a priority class the node number is also used in determining the starting order of pumps 76 03 Master enable Determines or defines a source that determines if the drive is allowed to be master on the drive to drive link The drive can only be a follower on the drive to drive link The drive is allowed to be master on the drive to drive link 1 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 7m 76 04 Pump prior sel Defines a source that chooses a start priority for the drive Two preset priorities are available either can be selected permanently or a digital signal source used to switch between the two presets Please note that the Autochange feature will attempt to equalize the duty between drives with the same priority rather than between drives with different priorities With a digital source 0 priority defined by 76 05 Prior choice 1 1 7 priority defined by 76 06 Prior choice 2 C A A Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 76 05 Prior choice 1 Priority preset 1 See parameter 76 04 Pump prior sel 76 06 Prior choice 2 Priority preset 2 See parameter 76 04 Pump prior sel 1 1 1 Priority preset 2 Parameters 269 76 07 Mstr loss action If the drive is a follower cannot find a master on the drive to drive link and is not itself allowed to be master
382. the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification ID run if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1 6 of the nominal output current of the drive if the drive is used with no motor connected for example for test purposes if the drive runs a medium voltage motor through a step up transformer Scalar Scalar control This mode is suitable in special cases where DTC cannot be applied In scalar control the drive is controlled with a frequency reference The outstanding motor control accuracy of DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode Note Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 of the nominal current of the inverter See also section Scalar motor control on page 75 99 06 Mot nom current Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate If multiple motors are connected to the drive enter the total current of the motors Notes Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 9096 of the nominal current of the drive his parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 0 0 6400 0 A Nominal current of the motor The allowable range is 1 6 2 law of the drive 0 2 law with scalar control mode 10 1A Parameters 303 No Name Value Descri
383. the peak value was recorded DC voltage at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded Motor speed at peak The date the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were last reset Last reset date of loggers dd mm yy The time the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were last reset Last reset time of loggers Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between O and 10 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10 Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that fall between 10 and 20 Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20 FbEq 1073742082 1073742083 1073742084 1073742085 1073742086 1073742087 1073742102 1073742103 1073742849 1073742853 100 1 100 1 WES II oa II o 100 1A 100 1V 100 1 rpm AS II ak oa II o 100 1 100 1 No Name Value 64 16 AL1 20 to 30 0 00 100 00 64 17 AL1 30 to 40 0 00 100 00 64 18 AL1 40 to 50 0 00 100 00 64 19 ALT 50 to 60 0 00 100 00 64 20 AL1 60 to 70 0 00 100 00 64 21 AL1 70 to 80 0 00 100 00 64 22 AL1 80 to 90 0 00 100 0095 64 23 AL1 over 90 0 00 100 00 64 24 AL20to 10 0 00 100 00 64 25 AL2 10 to 20 0 00 100 00 64 26 AL2 20 to 30 0 00 100 00 64 27 AL2 30 to 40 0 00 100 00 64 28 AL2 40 to 50 0 00 100 00 64 29 AL2 50 to 60 0 00 100
384. time difference between drives The control program will compare the value of the runtime counter parameter 04 28 Pump runtime in each drive and attempt to keep the difference below this value 0 2147483647 h Maximum runtime difference between drives 1 1h 79 Level control Settings for level control applications See also section Level control macro page 108 k 79 01 Level mode Defines whether the pump station is used for emptying or filling a container Level control disabled 280 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq Emptying The pump station is used for emptying a container 1 The diagram below shows the start stop and supervision levels for emptying For simplicity only three pumps are shown Parameter 79 02 Stopping mode is assumed to be set to Common stop 79 16 Start stop delay is assumed to be set to 0 00 seconds Level process actual value 9 14 High level 9 05 Stop level 9 03 Low level Time Frequency Pump 3 9 19 High speed Time Frequency Pump 2 9 19 High speed Time Frequency Pump 1 9 19 High speed Time No Parameters 281 Name Value Description FbEq Filling The pump station is used for filling a container 2 The diagram below shows the start stop and supervision levels for filling For simplicity only three pumps are shown Parameter 79 02 Stopping mode is assumed to be set to Common stop 79 16 Start stop d
385. tination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 10 01 Ext1 start func 3 FBA oelects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT 1 is selected as the active control location 10 04 Ext2 start func 3 FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location 21 01 Speed ref1 3 FBA ref1 Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 is used sel 4 FBA ref2 as speed reference SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 16 07 Param save 0 Done oaves parameter value changes including 1 Save those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 388 Control through a fieldbus adapter The fieldbus control interface The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 32 bit input and output data words The drive supports at the maximum the use of 12 data words 16 bits in each direction Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters 52 01 FBA data in1 52 12 FBA data in12 The data transmitted from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53 01 FBA data out 53 12 FBA data out12 Fieldbus network 1 Fieldbus adapter FBA Profile EXT1 2 Start func Profile selection 4 FBA MAIN CW b FBA REF1 DATA OUT 10 01
386. tings see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 33 18 BI invert src Selects the source bit whose inverted value is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit 1 For the selections see parameter 33 17 BitO invert src 1 2 3 4 5 Bit2 invert src Selects the source bit whose inverted value is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit 2 For the selections see parameter 33 17 BitO invert src Bit3 invert src Selects the source bit whose inverted value is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit 3 For the selections see parameter 33 17 BitO invert src Bit4 invert src Selects the source bit whose inverted value is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit 4 For the selections see parameter 33 17 BitO invert src l i E Bit5 invert src Selects the source bit whose inverted value is shown by 06 17 Bit inverted sw bit 5 For the selections see parameter 33 17 BitO invert src 218 Parameters 34 User load curve Configuration of user load curve See also section User definable load curve on page 76 34 01 Overload func Configures the supervision of the upper boundary of the user load curve Ena sup Enable supervision 0 Disabled Supervision disabled 1 Enabled Supervision enabled Input value sel Input value selection 0 Current Current is supervised 1 Torque Torque is supervised Ena warn Enable warning O Disabled 1 Enabled Drive generates alarm LOAD CURVE 0x2312 when the curve is exceeded Ena fault
387. tings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 Al4 maximum value mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 18 AI4 min Defines the minimum value for analog input Al4 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 Al4 minimum value 1000 1 unit 1000 1 unit 11 000 V Parameters 157 13 19 Al4 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum analog input Al4 value defined by parameter 13 17 Al4 max Al scaled 32768 000 Real value corresponding to maximum Al4 value 1000 1 32768 000 13 20 Al4 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum analog input Al4 value defined by parameter 13 18 Al4 min See the drawing at parameter 13 19 A 4 max scale 32768 000 Real value corresponding to minimum AI4 value 1000 7 1 32768 000 13 21 Al5 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al5 See parameter 13 01 A T filt time 0 000 30 000 s Filter time constant 1000 1s 13 22 Al5 max Defines the maximum value for analog input Al5 The input type depends on the type and or settings of the I O extension module installed See the user documentation of the extension module 22 000 22 000 Al5 maximum value mA or 11 000 11 000 V 13 23 Al5 min Defines the minimu
388. to drive link see parameters 6 11 6 16 Control data shared signals Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive 8 The multipump macro has three modes selectable by parameter s n master regulated operation when the load increases the master s speed increases After the master has reached full speed other drives are started one by one Depending on a parameter setting the master status is retained by the first drive or passed on to the drive that was started last e Follower drives are run either at a pre set speed i e at the optimal operating point of the pump or at the same speed as the master In both these modes drives can be prioritized so that the one with the highest priority is the first to be started e n direct follower operation all drives run in synchronization with the master This mode can be used in time critical applications or for testing of the pump installation 112 Application macros S Default settings Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter Additional parameter data page 307 Multipump control macro default 16 20 Macro Read Only Multi pump 75 01 Operation mode Multipump 76 01 Enable MF comm Application macros 113 E Default control connections for the Multipump control macro XPOW 24 VDC 1 6A GND XRO1 XRO2 Relay output RO1 Ready NO 99 250 V AC 30 V DC LM 2 2A Relay output RO2 Fault 1 E 250 V AC
389. transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press To return to the previous display without making changes press CZ CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC G SET TIME Ij 41 CANCEL LOC G SET DATE IE 03 2008 CANCEL 00 00 OK OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 Of Australial NSw Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC t HELP EU On Mar last Sunday Off Oct last sunday US EXIT 00 00 The ACQ810 control panel 39 E Parameter Backup The Parameter Backup option is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading stores all drive parameters including up to four user sets to the Control Panel Selectable subsets of the backup file can then be restored downloaded from the control panel to the same drive or another drive of the same type In the Parameter Backup option you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel with MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run e View the information about the backup stored in the control panel with SHOW BACKUP INFO This includes e g version information etc of the current backup file in the panel It is useful to check this information when you are going to restore the parameters to another drive with RESTORE PARS ALL to ensure that t
390. tures 83 Safety and protections E Emergency stop Note The user is responsible for installing the emergency stop devices and all the additional devices needed for the emergency stop to fulfil the required emergency stop category classes For more information contact your local ABB representative The emergency stop signal is to be connected to the digital input which is selected as the source for the emergency stop activation par 10 13 Em stop off3 or 10 15 Em stop off1 Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus 02 22 FBA main cw or 02 36 EFB main cw Note When an emergency stop signal is detected the emergency stop function cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled E Thermal motor protection The motor can be protected against overheating by e the motor thermal protection model e measuring the motor temperature with 1 3 PTC sensors This will result in a more accurate motor model Thermal motor protection model The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 When power is applied to the drive for the first time the motor is at ambient temperature defined by parameter 31 09 Mot ambient temp After this when power is applied to the drive the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature 2 Motor temperature is calculated using the user adjustable motor thermal time and motor load curve The load curve should be adjusted in case the amb
391. tus word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 Bit O of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 xe xo No e N gt N Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO4 Bit 3 of 05 02 Trad pump cmd see page 131 Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 Bit 9 of 06 02 St
392. two different setpoints and actual values The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control For a more detailed diagram see page 398 Setpoint Sources 27 30 29 02 Setpoint 1 2 selection 27 01 PD 29 01 0 EUN T 04 25 27 31 27 12 27 13 7 Actual value 27 19 gt sources Actual value 27 16 28 02 1 2 selection 27 18 27 19 28 04 VV Note PID control works only in external control location EXT2 Program features 61 Settings Parameter groups 12 Operating mode page 152 27 Process PID page 199 28 Procact sel page 203 and 29 Setpoint sel page 205 Diagnostics Parameters 04 01 04 05 page 129 04 20 04 25 page 130 and 06 20 Pump status word page 137 E Sleep function The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption varies such as clean water pumping systems When used it stops the pump completely during low demand instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient operating range The following example visualizes the operation of the function The drive controls a pressure boost pump The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the process PID controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor would never stop rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping afte
393. unc is O Separate selects a source that activates constant speed 3 When bit O of parameter 26 01 Const speed func is 1 Packed this parameter and parameters 26 02 Const speed sel1 and 26 03 Const speed sel2 select three sources that are used to activate constant speeds See table at parameter 26 02 Const speed sel1 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit O 1073742337 DI2 Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Parameters 199 DI4 Digital input DI4 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 3 1073938945 Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer i 26 06 Const speed1 Defines constant speed 1 30000 30000 Constant speed 1 1 1 rpm rpm 26 07 Const speed2 Defines constant speed 2 30000 30000 Constant speed 2 1 1 rpm rpm 26 08 Const speed3 Defines constant speed 3 30000 30000 Constant speed 3 1 1 rpm rpm 26 09 Const speed4 Defines constant speed 4 30000 30000 Constant speed 4 1 1 rpm rpm 26 10 Const speed5 Defines constant speed 5 30000 30000 Constant speed 5 1 1 rpm rpm 26 11 Const speed6 Defines constant speed 6 30000 30000 Constant speed 6 1 1 rpm rpm 26 12 Const speed Defines constant speed 7 30000 30000 Constant speed 7 1 1 rpm rpm 27 Process PID Configuration of process PID control See also section P D control on page 60 27 01 PID setpoint sel Selects the
394. uo dung 0L8OJY LU pest 100 ZM 13uno pg ATEN Peto Pi 13903334 J4NSS AA Id ay EE 2 l 333 o EE 2553 5 S Q 252 208 2 o Url cca ume he ee oy m EE Ecc LE E Er SIE 5 Idx 201UX TOV2UX ES TDAIX TO TDIX vid cida 2O0 vC EN A90141NI ZW MOoOTH3LNI Noor QMVO OMLNOO 018 DOV AE E PRE AAA PD J 3OVL 0A TOYLNO9 AE C N COND 15h 9 A A AA lt 0 3 o a E o e o gt c a O o e a Q o e S o ec o a z a oO ae E iJ o a z o ec ow o x mej A e o a e a T Q A Ge lt Application macros 105 Pump alternation using contactors In this example two pumps both have a contactor configuration that enables them to be connected either to the drive output or the supply At any given time one pump is connected to the drive the other is connected to the supply Below is a listing of typical parameter values that would be used in this configuration No Nam J macro default 78 02 All 106 Application macros 9 ON 199 gay ag JOOU Jop xny oN 90g o puonipbt ON 90 38m N31 u ppu aay o33u03 dung OLBODY sunu 1709014 UiDJDDI 3jn2JI2 UD J0joUJ og xny im jourojsno NENNEN sep ooQ juo dumg Qigoov enu pundej O pg Mp 1030W op xny
395. urce selected by 10 02 Ext start in7 is the start signal 0 stop 1 start the source selected by 10 03 Ext1 start in2 is the direction signal 0 forward 1 reverse The start and stop commands are taken from the control T panel 10 02 Ext1 start in Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1 See parameter 10 01 Ext1 start func selections In and 3 wire Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running 11 Digital input DI1 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 0 1073742337 DIO4 Digital input output DIO4 as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1073938947 bit 3 Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06 14 Timed func stat The bit is on when at least one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions is on Constant and bit pointer settings see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 10 03 Ext1 start in2 Selects source 2 of start and stop commands for external control location EXT1 See parameter 10 01 Ext1 start func selection 3 wire 1074005518 Note This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running Digital input DI2 as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 1 1073807873 Digital input DIS as indicated by 02 01 DI status bit 4 1074004481 DIO5 Digital input output DIOS as indicated by 02 03 DIO status 1074004483 bit 4 146 Parameters Const Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page Pointer
396. us adapter System overview The drive can be connected to a fieldbus controller via a fieldbus adapter module The adapter module is installed into drive Slot 2 ACQ810 Isl o Fieldbus ME IL um controller B f 5 El Fieldbus al 2 g Other sm n BH devices B IXDIO BR SEAHAM E XAl Type Fxxx fieldbus adapter in Slot 2 mm B TED Pee enst j EM M S AFI E S dB r Eons N XSTO XD2D XAO Data Flow d Control Word CW References Status Word SW n Actual values Sp 2909 gt Parameter R W requests responses ee Process l O cyclic Process l O cyclic or Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface a
397. ut E Triest Tr gases re TRS TO Input current is limited by main circuit thermal limit 5 nu maxi Inverter mes en output current limit is active limits the drive output current Imax cur 1 Maximum inverter output current limit is active The limit is defined by rent parameter 20 05 Maximum current 11 Thermal 1 Calculated thermal current value limits the inverter output current IGBT MT Measured drive temperature has exceeded internal alarm limit erp Reserved us 5 bits 0 3 can be on simultaneously The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first Only one of bits 9 11 can be on simultaneously The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded first 06 12 Op mode ack Operation mode acknowledge O Stopped 1 Speed 10 Scalar 11 Forced Magn i e DC Hold 06 13 Superv status Supervision status word Bits 0 2 reflect the status of supervisory functions 1 3 respectively The functions are configured in parameter group 33 Supervision page 214 06 14 Timed func stat Bits 0 3 show the on off status of the four timers 1 4 respectively configured in parameter group 36 Timed functions page 226 Bit 4 is on if any one of the four timers is on 06 15 Counter status Counter status word Shows whether the maintenance counters configured in parameter group 44 Maintenance page 234 have exceeded their limits O Ontime1 1 On time counter 1 has reac
398. ut RO5 Bit 4 of 05 02 Trad pump cmd see page 131 1074005250 Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073743361 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073808897 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 1073874433 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 1073939969 Bit 7 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074202113 Bit 8 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074267649 Bit 10 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074398721 Bit 12 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1074529793 Bit 2 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1073874434 Bit 3 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1073939970 Bit 4 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074005506 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074333186 Bit O of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073743363 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073808899 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073874435 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073939971 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073743373 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073808909 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 see page 133 see page 133 ne Ss gt 168 Parameters No Name Value Description FbEq 14 57 Freq in max Defines the maximum input frequency for DIO1 when parameter 14 02 DIO1 conf is set to Freq input The frequency signal connected to DIO1
399. v_ and pressing T available If there are no parameter changes in the history corresponding text will be shown 00 00 If there are parameter changes in the history the panel LOC U LAST CHANGES 1 shows a list of the last parameter changes starting from 9402 Ext IO2 se the most recent change The order of the changes is also None indicated with a number in the top right corner 1 stands 11 09 2008 12 04 55 for most recent change 2 the second latest change etc 9401 Ext IOl sel If a parameter has been changed twice it is shown as 9402 Ext 102 sel one change in the list The current value of the parameter EXIT 00 00 EDIT and the parameter change date and time are also shown below the selected parameter You can scroll the parameters with keys lt 4 and amp Ww If you want to edit a parameter select ihe parameter with LOC PAR EDIT keys A and SY and press X 9402 Ext 102 sel None O CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys CAN LOC t PAR EDIT and To save the new value press E wf 9402 Ext IO2 sel To cancel the new value and keep the original press F T O 0 1 SAVE CANCEL 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 52 The ACQ810 control panel The parameter change is shown as the first one in the list Oc Y LAST CHANGES 1 of last parameter changes 9402 Ext IO se Note You can reset the parameter change log by setting FIO O01 parameter 16 14 Reset C
400. ve and multiple followers The drive to drive link is used for connecting drives when forming a station with multiple pumps Settings Parameter group 76 MF communication page 268 92 Program features Application macros 93 Application macros What this chapter contains This chapter describes the intended use operation default control connections start up procedure and an application example of each application macro More information on the connectivity of the JCU control unit is given in the Hardware Manual of the drive General Application macros are pre defined parameter sets When starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros as a basis makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user parameter set User parameter sets are managed by the parameters in group 16 System page 176 Application macros are activated through the control panel Main menu by selecting ASSISTANTS Application Macro A few basic questions about the application appear on the panel based on the answers the most suitable macro is applied by the drive Parameter 16 20 Macro Read Only indicates which application macro is active After the activation of an application macro an assistant can optionally be launched to set up the essential configuration parameters related to the application Each of these assistants can also be invoked later by selecting ASSISTANTS in the control panel Main menu 94 Appli
401. ve reacts when an earth fault or current unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable Warning The drive generates alarm EARTH FAULT 0x2330 1 The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 0x2330 2 30 06 Suppl phs loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is detected The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE 0x3130 1 30 07 Sto diagnostic Selects how the drive reacts when it detects the absence of one or both Safe torque off STO signals Note This parameter is for supervision only The Safe torque off function can activate even when this parameter is set to No Note If the drive control unit is externally powered but no main power is connected to the drive the STO1 LOST 0x8182 and STO2 LOST 0x8183 faults are disabled For general information on the Safe torque off function see the Hardware manual of the drive and Application guide Safe torque off function for ACSM1 ACS850 and ACQ810 drives 3AFE68929814 English Fault The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A if one or 1 both of the STO signals are lost Alarm Drive running The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A if one or both of the STO signals are lost Drive stopped The drive generates a SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A alarm if both STO signals are absent If only one of the signals is lost the drive trips on STO7 LOST 0x8182 or STO2 LOST 0x8183 No Drive running The drive trips on SAFE TORQUE OFF OxFF7A if one or both of the S
402. whether module or connector is damaged Test each module individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2 Check status of fieldbus communication See appropriate User s Manual of fieldbus adapter module Check settings of parameter group 50 Fieldbus Check cable connections Check if communication master is able to communicate 348 Fault tracing Code Fault fieldbus code Caust other information FB MAPPING FILE 0x6306 MOTOR OVERTEMP 0x4310 Programmable fault 31 01 Mot temp1 prot 0046 0047 Al SUPERVISION 0x8110 Programmable fault 13 32 Al superv func 0049 Estimated motor temperature based on motor thermal model has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31 04 Mot temp1 fltLim Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit defined by parameter 31 04 Mot temp1 fltLim Faulty temperature sensor or sensor wiring An analog input has reached limit defined by parameter 13 33 Al superv CW What to do Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check value of alarm limit Check motor thermal model settings parameters 31 09 31 14 Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 31 02 Mot temp1 src Check motor ratings and load Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean
403. with the connected equipment Notes By default the cleaning sequence is started in the forward direction but it can also be started in the reverse direction See bit 7 Multiple triggering conditions can exist simultaneously Forthe load curve triggering conditions bit 8 and 9 to work the LOAD CURVE 0x2312 fault must be disabled by parameters 34 01 Overload func and 34 02 Underload func The cleaning sequence observes the speed limits defined by parameters 20 01 Maximum speed and 20 02 Minimum speed he drive must be started and its run enable signal present before the cleaning sequence can be started Forward Time 82 16 Reverse 82 07 82 08 gt Parameters 297 No Name Value Description FbEq Enabled 0 No Cleaning sequence disabled 1 Yes Cleaning sequence enabled 0 No Cleaning sequence not allowed when the drive is master 1 Master enb l MP 1 Yes Cleaning sequence allowed when the drive is master O No Cleaning sequence not allowed when the drive is a follower 2 Follower enb l MN 1 Yes Cleaning sequence allowed when the drive is a follower l 1 Enable Cleaning sequence starts periodically at intervals defined by 3 Time trig parameter 82 07 Time trig 1 Enable Cleaning sequence is started whenever the signal selected by 4 Supervision parameter 82 09 Supervis source exceeds the value of parameter 82 10 Supervis limit At start 1 Enable C
404. word2 see page 134 1074005506 Bit 9 of 06 02 Status word2 see page 134 1074333186 Bit 0 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073743363 Bit 1 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073808899 Bit 2 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073874435 Bit 3 of 06 03 Speed ctrl stat see page 135 1073939971 Bit 0 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073743373 Bit 1 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073808909 Bit 2 of 06 13 Superv status see page 136 1073874445 Bit pointer setting see Terms and abbreviations on page 115 l 1073743361 1073808897 1073874433 see page 133 Noe Ss N ww Selects whether DIOG is used as a digital output or input DIOG is used as a digital output DIOG is used as a digital input Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO6 when 14 22 DIO6 conf is set to Output Bit O of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 Bit 1 of 06 01 Status word1 1073808897 Bit 2 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073874433 Bit 3 of 06 01 Status word1 see page 133 1073939969 1073743361 ne see page 133 164 Parameters No Name Value Alarm Ext2 active Fault Fault 1 Ready relay RunningRelay Ref running Charge ready Neg speed Zero speed Above limit At setpoint Supervision1 Supervision2 Supervision3 Const Pointer 14 42 RO src Trad pump1 Ready Enabled Started Running Alarm
405. xudeG pseebdqdesdqe54 oda open 143 10 Stal Stop GW a 5 ee a a oo oe oH eee eee ee oe ia aed UR dr Edi Sul do drafts 144 8 Table of contents 14 Start SOD MOE arabe toys as vod ebay ova adi daa Pea PH dn 150 12 Operating mode eee eens 152 19 Analogue inputs 4 a saccos aco eom o a eeu edoedor d A oxi dw 153 TA EUH UG su ue sop Ee R RE AR rene SERERE EE ee S NEUE EE EA EE 159 15 Analogue outputs anana aaa aaa 170 TO OySIEM zxucesceeeeiuesQesdsund aras ATR ea e gU M nese der d 176 19 Speed calculation uisu usa vidad ias dada dass 180 LOES es eo o o ee y ees e eee ons bo uN cla a Eco a io es 182 21 SPCCONE PTT 184 22 Speed ref ramp TC I T T 186 ZOSPCCO CUl resposta E a o Ea E EE E es 188 25 Critical Speed aaa eens 196 26 Constant SUCCES Zeus estre aaa reads 197 2 Proceso PID TTT 199 28 Procact sel Sn 203 29 Setpoint sel aa ln nnns 205 OO Faut TUNCHONS s soas ps Eos qe deu a REEE ES a E E EUER E REI ERA 207 31 Motor therm prat proa a e a 209 32 Automatic reset elles hrs 214 IOPE SON o 5294 9456000605 aan ds dao aaa ado e 214 34 User load Curve aaa aaa 218 35 Process variable zkvz RR aana aa 220 OO Timed TUNCHONS c oie uu ESESEmHE be ESREGPUESEZeNESRROSSQ SG NER ES S qe OE 226 DOT A AS 231 40 Motor control ere a e EYE SS 232 44 NIamtenalCe 224426464408 rises ta Em ERE NEZ E SUUS E RE E RRR RE Sg 234 45 Energy optimising Rr
406. y highlighting it with A and LOC UPAR EDIT v_ and by pressing Ew Whenever the assistant prompts the user to adjust a 9904 Motor type parameter the adjustment is made as described AM starting on page 25 Whenever the assistant prompts a question select the O0 most suitable answer with and amp V 7 and EXIT 00 00 SAVE press A After the assistant has been completed the main menu is displayed To run another assistant repeat the procedure from step 2 To abort the assistant at any point press wa The ACQ810 control panel 33 E Changed Parameters In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters DU EE menu by pressing X if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1 Otherwise press EP repeatedly until you get to the PA RAM ET E RS Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER s Mot nom d P Mot nom spes EXIT 00 00 EDIT Press XJ to modify the value LOC UPAR EDIT 9906 Mot nom NON A CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A LOC UPAR EDIT and S Y 7 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 9906 Mot nom current value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed j A
407. y outputs of the drive A contact of the manual on off switch or protective device such as a thermal relay of each pump is wired to the selected interlock input The logic will detect if the pump is unavailable and start the next available pump instead The interlock inputs are defined by parameters 78 06 78 13 If the interlock circuit of the speed regulated pump the pump connected to the drive output is switched off the pump is stopped and all relay outputs are de energized Then the drive will restart The next available pump in the Autochange sequence will be started as the regulated pump If the interlock circuit of a direct on line pump is switched off the drive will not try to start that pump until the interlock circuit is switched on again The other pumps will operate normally On Interlocks in use 1 2 6 Parameters 78 04 Autochg level Speed limit for the Autochange function when parameter 8 01 Autochg style is set to Fixed This parameter is only valid in traditional pump control The pump starting sequence is changed when the Autochange interval has elapsed and the drive speed is below this limit Autochanging is indicated by a warning on the control panel display Notes The value of this parameter must be within the allowed range between minimum and maximum limits Otherwise no Autochanging is possible When the drive is powered off the values of the starting sequence counter and the Autocha
408. y selecting FAULT LOC amp MESSAGE LOGGER on the menu with keys Ca andy and INo fault histo ry pressing found If there are no faults in the fault history corresponding text will be shown A If there is a fault history the display shows the fault log LOC UY FAULT LOGGER 1 starting with the most recent fault The number on the 36 PANEL CTRL LOSS row is the fault code according to which the causes and 29 04 08 10 45 58 corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing page 249 EXIT 00 00 DETAIL To see the details of a fault select it with keys A and GC PANEL CTRL LOSS lt WV LJ and press A Scroll the text with keys A and amp W 7 To return to the previous display press wae i LT CODE FAULT CODE EXTENSION EXIT 00 00 DIAG DIAG If you want help in diagnosing the fault press CZ OC U _ lt Check parameter 30 0 3 Panel ctrl loss se tting Check PC tool or panel connection EXIT OK 36 The ACQ810 control panel Press gt The panel allows you to edit necessary LOC UPAR EDIT parameters to correct the fault 3003 Panel ctrl loss Fault 1 EXIT 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LA LOC U PAR EDIT and SY 7 vx To accept the new value press 3003 Panel ctrl loss To cancel the new value and keep the original press S pd r e T S afe MU 2 EXIT 00 00 SAVE How to reset faults 1 When a fault occurs a

ABB ACQ810 Firmware Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents